# Home

Asset Panda's official source for help documentation for Asset Panda Pro

<h2 align="center">Asset Panda Pro Knowledge Base</h2>

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th align="center"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="image">Cover image</th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td align="center"><a href="/release-notes"><strong>Release Notes</strong><br></a>Stay informed with monthly releases!</td><td><a href="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/FZ78c8Yogh45zYGcR2mO/megaphone-icon.png">megaphone-icon.png</a></td><td><a href="/release-notes">Release Notes</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><p><a href="/get-started/set-up-the-organization"><strong>Set Up the Organization</strong></a></p><p>Start here if this is your first time in Asset Panda Pro.</p></td><td><a href="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/vWx6OAa0k4mhu73dUxIx/rocket-icon.png">rocket-icon.png</a></td><td><a href="/get-started/set-up-the-organization">Set up the organization</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><p><a href="/maintain-records"><strong>Maintain Records</strong></a></p><p>Learn how to manage your asset records.</p></td><td><a href="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/0hbSXGqbtLnrUDOeCAvr/toolbox-icon.png">toolbox-icon.png</a></td><td><a href="/maintain-records">Maintain records</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><p><a href="/tools"><strong>Tools</strong></a></p><p>Learn about tools available to work with records.</p></td><td><a href="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/ji8VHp9puhltP7kDCsuF/tools-icon.png">tools-icon.png</a></td><td><a href="/maintain-records">Maintain records</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><p><a href="/settings"><strong>Settings</strong></a></p><p>Configure the elements needed to manage your assets.</p></td><td><a href="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FHjt33sxwO4ibGYabavlh%2Fgear.png?alt=media&amp;token=328d4730-ab7d-4f87-a8d6-fdf6adbd021d">gear.png</a></td><td><a href="/settings">Settings</a></td></tr><tr><td align="center"><a href="/mobile-app"><strong>Mobile App</strong><br></a>Our mobile app makes asset tracking outside the office easy!</td><td><a href="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/AXz4fiiP8AiUpX4zEomO/mobile-icon.png">mobile-icon.png</a></td><td><a href="/mobile-app">Mobile App</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Release Notes


# 2026 Release Notes


# July 2026 Release Notes

### Core Application Updates

#### Activity Stream - User Login Log

Admins can now view user login activity directly within the Activity Stream, providing visibility into login history for security reviews and user monitoring.

* New **User Activity** section under Activity Stream in global navigation
* Logs every login with date/time, device (Web, iOS, Android), IP address, and geolocation (City/Country)
* US-based logins display City and State (e.g., Dallas, TX); international logins display City and Country
* Org, Account, and Module admins see logs for users within their accessible modules
* Custom roles without Activity Stream permission will not see login logs
* Users with multiple roles see logs from all their accessible modules

#### Kit Parent-to-Child Data Synchronization

New field-level setting allows kit parent record values to automatically sync to all child records, preserving kit data consistency across all records within a kit.

* New **Copy kit parent data into children** toggle in field settings (Collection settings & Admin Tools)
* Setting is visible only when Kits entitlement/feature flag is enabled
* Syncs on: kit creation, parent update, adding records to a kit, forms, automations, and imports
* Newly added child records inherit the current parent value; removing a record from a kit preserves the last synced value
* Disabled (greyed out with tooltip) for Unique and Auto Increment fields; hidden for Attachment and Formula fields
* Enabling on an existing field copies the current parent value to all existing child records immediately
* Child records cannot maintain a different value while synchronization is active

#### Consolidate Formula Duration into Formula Date with Multiple Output Types

Formula Duration is being merged into Formula Date, providing a single unified experience for all date and duration calculations with flexible output options.

* Removes the separate **Formula Duration** data type; consolidates into **Formula Date**
* New output options when Formula Type is Date Calculation: Date, Days, Months, Years, Time (hh:mm:ss)
* **Include time** checkbox available for Days/Months/Years outputs to include time components in calculations
* Enhanced formula builder with field picker, supported operators, formula editor, and formula examples
* Supports Date, Formula-Date, Numeric, and Numeric Formula fields as inputs
* Supports calculations: Date ± Number, Date ± Numeric Field, Date − Date, and grouped expressions with parentheses
* Real-time formula validation with inline error messages; prevents saving while errors exist
* Automatic migration of existing Formula Duration fields — no user action required; existing values preserved

#### Configurable Session Timeout & Idle Timeout

Admins can now configure organization-level session security policies with two independent timeout settings under Organization Preferences.

* **Session Timeout** — automatically signs users out after the configured duration regardless of activity. Options: 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 7 days, 30 days
* **Idle Timeout** — automatically signs users out after a period of inactivity. Options: 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 4 hours, 8 hours, Never
* Both timeouts are evaluated independently — whichever triggers first signs the user out
* Warning toast displayed before sign-out with countdown for both session expiry and idle expiry
* On expiration, the user is signed out and redirected to the login screen
* Settings apply organization-wide across Web, iOS, and Android
* Mobile consumes timeout configuration from the API — no separate mobile configuration required

#### Additional Date Formats and Separator Selection

Expanded date format support including ISO 8601 (YYYY-MM-DD) and all major format permutations with selectable separators.

* New date format categories in Organization Preferences and field settings:
  * **Year First:** YYYY-MM-DD, YY-MM-DD, YYYY-DD-MM, YY-DD-MM
  * **Day First:** DD-MM-YYYY, DD-MM-YY, DD-YYYY-MM, DD-YY-MM
  * **Month First:** MM-DD-YYYY, MM-DD-YY, MM-YYYY-DD, MM-YY-DD
* Separator selection: Dash (-) or Slash (/)
* Field-level format overrides Organization Preferences; Organization Preference used as fallback
* Supported across Collections, Categories, Forms, Reports, Saved Views, Automations, Audits, Reservations, Imports, Exports, APIs, Notifications, Activity Streams, and Mobile
* ISO-formatted imports now accepted; 2-digit years rejected with clear error messaging

#### Date-Based Automation Triggers

Automations can now trigger based on Date and Formula-Date field values — fire actions X days before or after a date (e.g., warranty expiry, lease end).

* New trigger type: **Based on a date field** with configurable days before/after
* Supports Date fields, Formula-Date fields returning valid dates, and Pull-From date fields
* Dynamic re-scheduling: if the date value changes, the trigger automatically adjusts; cancelled if record no longer qualifies
* Formula-Date fields always use their latest calculated value at evaluation time
* Null, empty, or invalid date values are ignored until a valid date becomes available
* Each qualifying trigger executes only once per configured event unless the date changes
* All existing automation actions remain supported; execution captured in existing automation logging

#### Bulk Update (Reallocate) Records

Users can select multiple records and bulk-update field values without needing a form, enabling efficient mass changes like location updates or reassignments.

* New **Bulk Update** action when one or more records are selected in a collection
* Field selection modal with search and **Show Selected** toggle; unique, barcode, system-generated, auto-increment, formula, and attachment fields are excluded
* Value entry modal with full field validation, formatting, helper text, and default values matching existing field behavior
* Background processing for large volumes with collection processing spinner and toast notifications
* Completion toast delivered only to the initiating user
* Last Updated By and Last Updated Date/Time updated on all affected records
* Enhanced **Bulk Actions Bar** with **More** overflow menu for scalable action organization; dynamic action visibility based on permissions and selection count

#### Archive Records

Users can now archive records to remove them from active collections without deleting them, preserving all data, relationships, and history for future reference or restoration.

* New **Archive** action available from bulk actions, Record Details side panel, and Full Record Details page
* Archived records move to a dedicated **{Collection Name} - Archived** section in the left navigation
* Archived list is **read-only** with Filter, Sort, Group By, Show/Hide Fields, and Export actions available
* **Unarchive** restores the record to its original collection with all data, relationships, and history intact
* **Delete** remains available for permanent removal with existing confirmation and validations
* Record details viewable in read-only mode from archived list, side panel, and full details page; all other record actions are hidden or disabled while archived
* Permissions: Org Admin, Account Admin, Module Admin, and Collaborator have access by default; Custom Roles require explicit Archive permission at the collection level
* Activity Stream captures archive and unarchive events: {UID} record archived/unarchived in {Account} / {Module} / {Collection}
* Archiving does not modify record data — existing relationships, attachments, activity logs, automations, reports, forms, APIs, imports, exports, and integrations remain unchanged
* Fully supported during Classic-to-Pro migration with no data loss

#### Send Form Log & Depreciation Reports Via Automations

**Send Form Log and Depreciation Reports via Automations** — Admins can now select **Form Log Reports** and **Depreciation Reports** as report sources in the "Send Report" action within Agents (automations). When configuring the action, users can choose one report source and one output format (PDF, Excel, or CSV). Once the automation triggers, recipients receive an email with the selected report attached in the chosen format. This expands automated reporting beyond collection reports, enabling scheduled delivery of form log and depreciation data without manual effort.

#### Standalone Attachment Uploads in Global Library <a href="#check_mark-standalone-attachment-uploads-in-global-library" id="check_mark-standalone-attachment-uploads-in-global-library"></a>

Users can now upload attachments directly to the Global Library without associating them with a record, enabling file management before linking to records when needed.

* **Upload Action** — New **Upload** button on the Global Library page opens the existing file upload flow
* Users can upload one or more supported files directly into the Global Library without selecting or creating a record
* Standalone attachments are displayed in the Global Library with existing list functionality; search, filter, sort, and download remain unchanged
* **Preview** — Preview modal follows the existing attachment preview experience. Record hierarchy information is hidden until the attachment is associated with a record; once associated, record hierarchy is displayed using existing preview behavior
* **Record Association** — Standalone attachments remain available for selection wherever attachments can be added to records. Associating an attachment with a record does not require re-uploading the file. Once associated, the attachment follows all existing attachment behavior
* **Permissions** — Existing attachment upload and access permissions continue to apply
* **Validation** — Existing file type, file size, duplicate handling, upload validations, progress indicators, and error handling remain unchanged
* **Activity Stream** — Activity log captured when an attachment is uploaded or removed directly from the Global Library:
  * `{filename}.filetype uploaded`
  * `{filename}.filetype removed`
* **Mobile** — Same standalone upload experience available on iOS and Android via the Global Library Upload action. Mobile follows web-configured attachment permissions. Standalone uploads require an internet connection; existing offline attachment behavior remains unchanged
* **Backward Compatibility** — Existing attachments remain associated with their respective records. Existing record-level attachment uploads, attachment management, APIs, imports, exports, and integrations remain unchanged

### Integrations

#### Xero Integration for Asset Panda Pro - Updates

We've expanded the Xero Integration for Asset Panda Pro. You can now push Asset Panda assets into Xero as fixed asset records, not just depreciation journals.

**Highlights**

* Fixed Asset Sync: Automatically create and update fixed asset records in Xero from your Asset Panda Pro data. No manual re-entry required.
* Field Mapping: Map Asset Panda Pro fields to matching Xero fixed asset fields during setup.
* Scheduled or On-Demand Sync: Run asset sync on a schedule or trigger it manually, using the same engine as depreciation journal posting.
* Quick Setup: Enable fixed asset sync in a few minutes through the Asset Panda Integrations Store, alongside your existing depreciation sync.

#### Zapier Integration for Asset Panda Pro

The Zapier integration for Asset Panda Pro is now live on the Zapier marketplace.

**Highlights**

* Automated Asset Creation: Automatically create assets from Google Sheets, forms, and CRMs.
* Instant Alerts: Get instant Slack or Teams alerts when assets are added or updated.
* Request Notifications: Send request ticket notifications and status updates automatically.
* Broad App Sync: Sync asset data across 9,000+ apps without any manual effort.

#### DocuSign Integration for Asset Panda Pro

The DocuSign integration for Asset Panda Pro is now live. You can send documents out for signature directly from an asset record.

**Highlights**

* Template Mapping: Map a DocuSign template to a collection.
* Asset Assignment: Assign an asset to trigger the signature workflow.
* Auto-Fill and Send: Asset Panda Pro auto-fills the form per your mapping and emails it to the assignee to sign.
* No Manual Paperwork: Ideal for equipment handovers, BYOD agreements, and acceptance sign-offs.


# June 2026 Release Notes

### Core Application Updates <a href="#core-application-updates" id="core-application-updates"></a>

#### Reservation & Calendar Updates <a href="#reservation-and-calendar-updates" id="reservation-and-calendar-updates"></a>

This major update introduces advanced asset management for complex scenarios, including full support for consumables and kits, along with significant calendar usability improvements.

* **Consumable Reservations:** Users can now reserve consumables by quantity. The system tracks availability in real-time based on overlapping schedules without affecting the total collection quantity.
* **Kit Reservations:** Entire kits can now be reserved as a single unit. The system intelligently manages kit-level availability and prevents individual items within a kit from being double-booked independently.
* **Lifecycle Data Persistence:** Field values captured during the Reserve stage now persist and remain visible through the Check-out and Check-in stages, ensuring a continuous audit trail.
* **Smart Checkout Validations:**
  * The Check Out button now intelligently handles unavailable assets, preventing transactions that include missing or double-booked items.
  * Added a strict validation to prevent checking out reservation events that contain zero assets.
* **High-Capacity Calendar Support:** Resolved a limitation where reservations with 10+ records were hidden. Large-scale events (tested up to 50+ records) are now fully visible in the Calendar View.

#### Ticketing - Email Connection <a href="#ticketing-email-connection" id="ticketing-email-connection"></a>

**Direct Communication within Ticketing** — Users can now connect external email addresses to the Ticketing module. This allows teams to communicate with customers directly from within Asset Panda, tracking all correspondence as comments on the relevant ticket.

#### Additional Fixes & Improvements <a href="#additional-fixes-and-improvements" id="additional-fixes-and-improvements"></a>

Beyond the core feature releases, the following improvements and fixes were also shipped this month:

**Performance & Stability**

* **Faster iOS Data Loading** — Increased the API fetch limit and page size from 100 to 500 records, significantly reducing load times for large datasets.
* **Automation Regression Optimization** — Optimized internal testing suites, reducing full regression execution time from 12 hours to 5.2 hours to ensure faster deployment cycles.
* **High-Zoom UI Stability** — Fixed layout breaks in the Calendar Month View that occurred when browser zoom levels were set above 100%.

**Collections & Records**

* **Date Picker Today Logic** — Fixed the date picker component so that clicking the Today button correctly highlights the current date, even if you've scrolled years into the past or future.
* **Category Label Accuracy** — Corrected the detail page label in Categories to be context-specific instead of showing the generic “Record detail.”
* **Last Updated Accuracy** — Fixed an issue on Android where the “Last updated” date incorrectly matched the “Date added” even when no updates had occurred.

**Mobile (Android & iOS)**

* **Offline Sync Reliability** — Resolved a critical sync issue where performing actions during a retry alert would cause the syncing icon to get stuck or create duplicate records.
* **SSO Login Fix (iOS)** — Cancelled SSO login attempts now return the user to the login screen gracefully without triggering an error popup.
* **Thank You Message Persistence** — Fixed a bug where configured Thank You messages were skipped after form submission on mobile devices.
* **Check-in Filtering** — The Check-in form now correctly filters to show only Checked-out events, preventing accidental returns of available assets.

### Integrations <a href="#integrations" id="integrations"></a>

#### Dell Warranty <a href="#dell-warranty" id="dell-warranty"></a>

We’ve introduced the **Dell Warranty Integration** for Asset Panda, enabling automatic synchronization of Dell warranty information directly into your asset records using Dell Service Tags.

**Highlights**

* **Automatic Warranty Sync:** Retrieve and sync Dell warranty details using the asset's Dell Service Tag.
* **Comprehensive Warranty Details:** Import warranty status, expiration dates, service levels, and other warranty information into Asset Panda.
* **Proactive Warranty Management:** Maintain accurate warranty visibility, track upcoming expirations, and help reduce the risk of warranty lapses and unexpected device downtime.
* **Easy Setup:** Enable the integration from the Asset Panda Integrations Store and map your Dell Service Tag and warranty-related fields to begin syncing.

#### Xero Integration for Asset Panda Pro <a href="#xero-integration-for-asset-panda-pro" id="xero-integration-for-asset-panda-pro"></a>

We've introduced the **Xero Integration** for Asset Panda Pro, enabling automatic synchronization of depreciation data to Xero as balanced journal entries.

**Highlights**

* **Automated Depreciation Posting:** Calculate depreciation in Asset Panda Pro and automatically post balanced journal entries to Xero.
* **GL Account Mapping:** Map your Debit and Credit General Ledger (GL) accounts directly from your Xero Chart of Accounts.
* **Flexible Journal Grouping:** Group journal entries by any supported field or create a separate journal entry for each asset record.
* **Scheduled or On-Demand Sync:** Run one-way synchronization automatically on a schedule or trigger it manually whenever needed.
* **Quick Setup:** Configure the integration in just a few minutes through the Asset Panda Integrations Store.

#### Microsoft Intune & ConnectWise Enhancements <a href="#microsoft-intune-and-connectwise-enhancements" id="microsoft-intune-and-connectwise-enhancements"></a>

* **Intune Export Updates:** Enhanced the frontend configuration for Intune exports to provide clearer mapping and sync status visibility.
* **ConnectWise Sync Reliability:** Resolved an issue where specific field configurations would cause ConnectWise syncs to process 0 records; improved error reporting for field-level mismatches.

#### API & Platform <a href="#api-and-platform" id="api-and-platform"></a>

* **Mobile Config API Update:** Updated the `app-config` API to support the latest hard-versions for mobile (Android 1.14.0 / iOS 2.2.0).
* **Import Log Refactoring:** Refactored import log logic to dynamically track changes during parallel execution, preventing ResponseError messages during bulk data syncs.

### Internal Tools <a href="#internal-tools" id="internal-tools"></a>

#### Ursa Inspection (Beta) <a href="#ursa-inspection-beta" id="ursa-inspection-beta"></a>

Initial mobile implementation for AI-powered asset inspection. Users can take pictures of assets to automatically suggest field values for form completion based on visual analysis.


# May 2026 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Pro Web

#### Linked Collection Fields in Email

**Linked Collection Fields in Automation Emails** — Users can now include fields from linked collections when composing emails via the "Send Email" action in automations. Linked collection fields are displayed as a structured table within the email body, clearly separated from the parent collection fields. When multiple linked collections exist, each is shown as its own distinct table, making it easy to view related data at a glance.

#### Linked Collection View Record

**View Linked Record Details Directly from Forms** — When working with forms that include a linked collection, users can now **preview full record details** without leaving the form. Tapping anywhere on a linked record row (outside the selection checkbox) opens a **read-only modal popup** displaying the complete record details. Closing the modal returns the user to the form's record selection view. Selecting the checkbox continues to work as before — marking the record for inclusion in the form submission. This preview is available on any form where the linked collection toggle is enabled, giving users quick access to record context right where they need it.

#### Expanded Calendar Management & Role Permissions

This update introduces comprehensive management options to edit and delete existing calendars, backed by role-based access control and full activity logging across both web and mobile platforms.

**Calendar Management (Edit & Delete)**

* **Prefilled Editing Mode:** Users can now open any existing calendar configuration in edit mode. All previously saved parameters—such as data sources, fields, and layouts—will prefill automatically, allowing for seamless updates.
* **Destructive Actions Safeguard:** Calendars can now be permanently deleted. To prevent accidental data loss, the system requires a manual confirmation prompt before removal.

**Role-Based Access Control (CRUD Permissions)**

* **Administrative Override:** System administrators retain global management capabilities and can edit, rename, or delete any calendar across the workspace.
* **Creator-Owned Permissions (Non-Admins):** Non-admin users are restricted to managing only the calendars they personally created. They cannot modify or delete calendars created by other users unless explicitly authorized.
* **Granular Custom Roles:** Custom role settings have been updated to support precise **CRUD (View, Create, Edit, Delete)** configurations, allowing teams to restrict calendar management to specific roles or seniority levels.

**System-Wide Audit Trails**

* **Omnichannel Activity Logs:** To maintain compliance and security, all calendar configuration actions—including **Create, Update, Rename, and Delete**—are tracked in real-time.
* **Cross-Platform Sync:** These audit logs capture operations executed from both the **Web Application** and the **Mobile App**, feeding them directly into the central Activity Stream.

#### Depreciation Mid-Cycle Adjustment

**Mid-Cycle Adjustment** — Users can now modify asset cost, salvage value, or useful life midway through a depreciation cycle for records using straight-line depreciation. Adjustments can be made from the side panel, full details page, or the depreciation tab.

**Stop Depreciation** — Depreciation can now be stopped on any record at a chosen date. Once stopped, book value, accumulated depreciation, and depreciation expense are frozen with no further monthly changes.

**Activity Logging** — Every mid-cycle adjustment and stop-depreciation action is automatically logged in the record's activity stream, capturing who made the change, when, and from which platform.

**Field Locking & Validation** — Once a mid-cycle adjustment exists, asset cost, salvage value, and useful life become read-only across all channels including UI, imports, automations, and APIs. Only the latest adjustment can be edited or cancelled, and adjustments cannot be set on or before the placed-in-service date.

**Cancel & Recalculate** — Future-dated adjustments can be cancelled, restoring the original depreciation schedule. Users can also recalculate depreciation from scratch by editing core fields, which removes all existing adjustments after confirmation.

**Known Issues & Limitations**

* **Unit of Production (UoP):** Mid-cycle adjustments are not supported for UoP. Switching to/from UoP requires a full schedule reset; "Forward" mode is blocked.
* **Validation:** You may see inconsistent messages if a Stop Date is set before a Mid-Cycle date.
* **Field Locking:** Locking logic for Automations and APIs is currently undergoing final validation.
* **Reporting:** Depreciation reports are being updated to fully reflect these new recalculation types.

#### Additional Fixes & Improvements

*Beyond the core feature releases (Linked Collection Fields in Email, Linked Collection View Record, Calendar Management & Role Permissions, and Depreciation Mid-Cycle Adjustment), the following improvements and fixes were also shipped this month:*

**Performance Improvements**

* **Faster Kit Operations** — Creating or updating kits with a large number of records (35+) is now significantly faster, resolving previous timeout errors.
* **Collections & Saved Views Load Faster** — Unnecessary API calls have been reduced, improving page load times when accessing collections and saved views.
* **Smoother Form Interactions** — Forms with large record sets now use virtualized rendering for faster checkbox selection and scrolling.

**Attachments**

* **Multi-Field Attachment Tags** — Attachment fields now display tags across two lines with a "+X more" indicator for better readability when files are attached to multiple fields.
* **Attachment API** — A new public API endpoint is now available for downloading attachments programmatically.

**Collections & Records**

* **Filter Persistence** — Applied collection filters no longer disappear when navigating between collections.
* **Scroll Position Retained** — The collection page no longer jumps back to the top after saving record changes. Scroll position is preserved.
* **Header Bar Stability** — Fixed an issue where the collection header bar sometimes failed to load when switching between modules.
* **Category Data Refresh** — Record data now correctly populates after closing the Add Record side panel in categories.
* **Record Display Accuracy** — Field values on the record listing page now consistently match the record details page.
* **Linked Record Count** — People Collection now correctly displays linked record counts.
* **Global Search** — Fixed an error that prevented viewing record details from global search results.
* **Row Highlighting** — Clicking a row now properly highlights it when the side panel opens.
* **Deleted Collection Cleanup** — Deleted collections no longer appear in dropdown menus.

**Forms**

* **Calculation Accuracy** — Resolved incorrect calculations when using Pull-from fields with form prompts.
* **Form Filter Fix** — Fixed an error when applying a filter under record selection in form configuration.
* **Accurate Updates** — Forms now correctly update only the selected assets, not all records in the collection.
* **"Select All" with Filters** — The "Select All" checkbox now works correctly when a filter is applied in forms.
* **Form Logs** — Form logs now correctly display updated record details.

**Custom Roles & Permissions**

* **Field-Level Permissions** — Backend support for field-level permissions in custom roles is now live.
* **Graceful Access Errors** — Users with limited field permissions now see a proper access error instead of an infinite loading state when accessing unshared forms.
* **Saved View Visibility** — Saved views shared with a custom role are now correctly visible to users with that role.

**Automations**

* **Microsoft Teams Notifications** — Dynamic field values now correctly populate in Microsoft Teams automation notification messages.
* **Duplicate Email Fix** — Resolved an issue where automations sent multiple notification emails for a single trigger.
* **Condition Accuracy** — Automations no longer trigger when configured conditions are not met.
* **Record Updates** — Fixed cases where automations executed successfully but failed to update records or generate logs.
* **Date Fields in Emails** — Date field values in automation emails are now formatted correctly.
* **Category Updates** — Automations now correctly update category fields based on configured conditions.
* **Quantity Fields** — The "Actual Quantity on Hand" value no longer clears after automation execution.

**Integrations**

* **Entra ID Sync** — Fixed an issue where Entra ID integration automation was incorrectly changing employee records during sync.
* **Google Workspace Sync** — Google Workspace automations now correctly sync people records.

**Authentication & Login**

* **SSO Stability** — Resolved cases where Entra SSO users were incorrectly redirected back to the login page.
* **Account Status** — Fixed issues where active users were shown "user has been deactivated" or "Subscription Ended" errors upon login.
* **OTP Validation** — OTP codes received via email are now validated correctly during login.
* **User Status Sync** — User reactivation and deactivation actions now correctly update the user's status.

**Imports & Exports**

* **Import Reliability** — Fixed import processes getting stuck in "In Progress" state and resolved cases of incorrect record counts during import.
* **Import Logs** — Import failures now generate proper logs and history visibility.
* **Export Audit Reports** — Export audit report download links now generate correctly.
* **Single Select Import** — Fixed import errors for single select fields when valid values were provided.

**Reservations & Calendar**

* **Calendar Visibility** — Reservations now correctly appear on the calendar UI across all configured calendars.
* **Reservation Forms** — Resolved an issue preventing users from deleting reservation forms.
* **Check-in/Check-out** — Fixed errors during check-in/check-out operations, including a "duplicate value" error and an error when replacing assets.
* **Form Trigger Accuracy** — Non-reservation forms no longer trigger incorrectly during reservations.

**Depreciation & Reports**

* **Report Accuracy** — Depreciation reports now show the correct filtered records and accurate expense values.

**Search & Scanning**

* **Barcode Scan** — Barcode scanning now correctly returns results on the web.
* **QR Audit Scan** — Fixed an issue where scanning QR codes during audits displayed multiple records instead of the correct one.
* **Exact Value Filter** — Exact value filters now return the correct results.

**Other**

* **Pull From Fields** — Fixed redirect opening incorrect people record, and resolved errors when adding pull-in additional fields.
* **Invite Emails** — Invitation emails for account access are now delivered reliably.
* **Date Formula Display** — Date formula fields now display the correct date format.

***

&#x20;

### Asset Panda Pro Mobile

#### Calendar & Reservations (iOS & Android)

* **Calendar Permissions** — Calendar access now respects collection-level permissions. View, create, edit, and delete actions are governed by your assigned role, giving admins full control over who can manage calendars.
* **Edit & Delete Calendars** — You can now edit or delete calendars you've created. Admins can manage any calendar; other users can manage their own.
* **Reservation Permissions** — Reservation actions (reserve, check out, check in, edit, cancel) are now strictly tied to your role and permissions, ensuring users only perform actions they're authorized for.
* **Reservation Search & Filter** — Search and filter reservation events by reservation ID, status, dates, reserved by, and all additional form fields directly within the calendar.
* **Reserve, Check Out & Check In from Forms** — You can now initiate reservations, check-outs, and check-ins directly from the module forms list on Android.
* **Calendar "Current User" Filter Fix** — Reservation calendars now correctly show only the logged-in user's reservations when configured for "Current User."

#### Offline Mode (iOS)

* **Faster Offline Sync** — Offline data sync is now significantly faster for large collections (50,000+ records) thanks to optimized data fetching and reduced memory usage.
* **Search in Large Collections** — Offline search on collections with up to 300K records now completes properly instead of showing an indefinite loader.
* **Accurate Record Count** — Refreshing a collection in offline mode now shows the correct count immediately rather than incrementing from zero.
* **Custom Role Download Fix** — Downloading collections for custom role users with limited permissions no longer gets stuck at 999 records.

#### Bug Fixes — iOS

* Attachment previews now work correctly in Audit flows.
* Video file types are preserved correctly when uploading to single video fields.
* Multiple audit UI improvements — better icon alignment, spacing, and a fully tappable barcode scan button.
* Negative values during consumable transfers are now handled correctly.
* Multi-page consumable forms no longer loop back to the "Add New" page on submission.
* Image previews on attachments in multi-page forms now open properly.
* Adding additional kits to Kit Content no longer causes errors.
* Category field values from Pull From Collection now populate correctly.
* Template Kit form submissions now work as expected.
* Filtering MSL fields with fractional values or special characters no longer triggers errors.
* Record Detail page header now displays "Record Detail" correctly.
* Collections are now properly visible to custom role users on iOS.
* Updating category fields via Pull From on iOS no longer shows attachment errors.
* Changing a child "Pull From" field value in forms no longer incorrectly alters the parent field value.

#### Bug Fixes — Android

* Newly created records now appear immediately in the collection without requiring a refresh.
* Calendar events are now consistent with iOS and display correctly for selected dates.
* Row summary no longer causes the first record to disappear.
* Attachment info icon no longer crashes the app.
* The "+" button in Calendar is now correctly hidden when Create permission is disabled for reservations.
* Collection dropdown for reservation calendars now only shows collections with reservations enabled.
* Copy image functionality now works correctly.
* Replaced assets in reserved events now retain their correct position.
* Languages display in the correct native format after selection.
* "Cancel" button text is no longer cropped on the Audit Add Notes screen.
* "Show More" no longer appears for empty Long Text fields.
* Search bar now appears correctly after capturing a photo, video, or audio.
* Download All Attachments now works properly from the Global Attachment screen.
* "Transfer To" field in consumable forms now populates the selected value.
* "Saved View" and "Clear Filter" buttons no longer appear when no filter is applied.
* Dialog and filter issues on the collection listing screen are resolved.
* Audit filter fields now display correctly.
* Header and record alignment after enabling row summary is fixed.
* HelpDesk collection is now properly hidden from the collection listing.
* Kit uploaded images now display correctly in the Update Kit form.

#### Backend & Platform Fixes (impacts iOS, Android & Web)

* **Barcode Scanning** — Barcode scans in form fields now correctly return results on Android and Web.
* **Form Filters** — Forms with record selection filters no longer error on initialization.
* **Reservation Forms Cleanup** — Reservation forms can now be properly deleted after disabling reservations.
* **Calendar Reservations** — Reservations are now accurately displayed on the Calendar UI.
* **QR Scanning in Audits** — Scanning a QR code during an audit now opens the single correct matching record.
* **Record Listing Accuracy** — Field values on the record listing page now match the record details page.
* **Category Field Labels** — System-generated field names correctly display as "Added By" in Category Collections.
* **Automation Reliability** — Fixed multiple issues where automations executed but failed to update records, send notifications, or generate logs.
* **Automation Notifications** — Microsoft Teams automation notifications now correctly display dynamic field values. Duplicate email notifications from automation sync summaries are resolved.
* **Import Stability** — Import processes no longer get stuck in "In Progress" state. Incorrect record count display during imports is fixed. Single select field value matching errors during import are resolved.
* **SSO Login** — Fixed issues where specific users were redirected to the login page during Entra SSO authentication.
* **Performance** — Improved collection and saved view loading speed for large accounts.
* **Audit Reports** — Export download links for closed audit reports now generate correctly.
* **User Management** — User activation/deactivation status now updates correctly. Invite emails are delivered reliably.
* **Date Fields** — Dynamic date field "Today" now auto-populates correctly on mobile devices in forms. Date format in formula fields now matches account preferences. Date field details in automation emails are now accurate.
* **Form Submissions** — "Select All" in forms now selects all filtered records beyond the first 100. Forms no longer incorrectly update unselected records.
* **Field Configuration** — Pull From field configuration updates, Pull in additional fields, and record category updates all work without errors.
* **Integration Sync** — Entra ID, Intune, Google Workspace, and ConnectWise sync automations now update records correctly.
* **Saved Views** — Users can now see saved views shared with their role.
* **Collection Page Navigation** — The page no longer jumps to the top after saving record changes.
* **Linked Records** — People Collection now correctly shows linked record count.
* **Depreciation Reports** — Reports now display correct depreciation expense values for filtered date ranges.

&#x20;

***

&#x20;

### Asset Panda Pro Integrations

#### **Attachment Download API**

We've introduced new APIs to make attachment access and retrieval easier across the platform.

**Highlights**

* **Search & Filter:** Query attachments across accounts, modules, and collections using flexible filter criteria.
* **Record-Scoped Retrieval:** Fetch all attachments linked to a specific record in a single API call.
* **Secure Download Links:** Generate time-limited, signed URLs for individual file downloads.
* **Bulk ZIP Download:** Package all matching attachments into a single ZIP archive for exports or batch workflows.
* **Permission-Aware Results:** Results are automatically scoped to the caller's organization and respect user-level permissions.

#### **Jamf Pro - Serial Number as Unique Identifier**

Serial number is now available as a selectable unique identifier across all applicable external entities in the Jamf Pro integration, giving teams more flexibility in how device records are matched and synced with Asset Panda.

#### **ArcGIS Integration**

We've introduced a new ArcGIS integration for Asset Panda, enabling bi-directional sync between both platforms to keep operational and field asset records aligned.

**Highlights**

* **Two-Way Sync:** Push asset data from Asset Panda to ArcGIS and retrieve updates back automatically.
* **GIS & Location Mapping:** Map location-based asset information seamlessly across both systems.
* **Secure Authentication:** Connects via OAuth using your ArcGIS Client ID and Client Secret, configured directly within Asset Panda.
* **Available Now:** Find it in the Asset Panda Integrations Store.

#### **ConnectWise Integration Enhancement**

The ConnectWise integration now supports custom fields and field types across key external entities, enabling richer and more accurate data mapping between ConnectWise and Asset Panda.

**Highlights**

* **Expanded Entity Support:** Custom fields are now available across Agreement, Company, Configuration, Contact, and Site entities.
* **Full Field Type Coverage:** Includes support for text, numeric, percent, date, URL, checkbox, SSL, and related field variations.
* **Improved Data Mapping:** Greater flexibility to reflect your ConnectWise data structure accurately within Asset Panda.


# April 2026 Release Notes

## Asset Panda Pro Web <a href="#asset-panda-pro-web" id="asset-panda-pro-web"></a>

### **Custom Role Field-Level Permissions**

We’ve enhanced custom role field-level permissions to give admins tighter control over sensitive data:

* When **Limit Field Permissions** is enabled for a custom role, users assigned to that role can now only access **shared locked saved views**.
* Fields marked as **hidden** in a locked saved view are no longer visible in **Show/Hide Fields**, **Filters**, **Group By**, **Sort By**, the **record side panel**, or the **full record detail page**.
* Hidden fields remain fully restricted even after toggling **Limit Field Permissions** off and on again, ensuring consistent enforcement of field-level permissions across records and views.

### **Calendar/Reservations (Updates)**

This update introduces a centralized global interface, enhanced record-level management, and granular permission controls to streamline booking and asset tracking workflows.

#### **Global Visibility & Discovery**

* **Collection Data Calendar:** A new global-level view that displays collection records as events across a date-based interface.
* **Advanced Search & Filtering:** New tools integrated into the Calendar and Reservation views to quickly locate specific assets or scheduled bookings.

#### **Record-Level Reservation Management**

* **Reservations Tab:** A dedicated **Activities** tab is now available within individual records at the collection level.
* **Flexible Actions:** Users can now **Edit** or **Cancel** existing reservations as schedules change.
* **Asset Context:** View full record details for reserved assets directly within the reservation flow to ensure accuracy during checkout.
* **Availability Recovery:** Option to **Replace unavailable items** during the checkout process to maintain operational continuity.

#### **Permissions & Audit Transparency**

* **Custom Role Permissions:** Granular security settings now allow you to limit **CRUD** actions specifically for both the Calendar and Reservation modules.
* **Comprehensive Logs:** Reservation form submissions are now captured in both the **Form Submission Logs** and the **Activity Stream** for full audit transparency.

***

## Integrations <a href="#integrations" id="integrations"></a>

### **Jira In App Console**

We’ve added a new Asset Panda Console inside JIRA, allowing users to manage assets without leaving their JIRA workspace.

#### Highlights

* Access Asset Panda in JIRA: Open the AP console directly from any JIRA ticket.
* Secure Login: Log in using your Asset Panda credentials and view all available collections.
* Search & Browse: Find assets by keyword and view key details such as ID, name, and status.
* Link Assets to Tickets: Attach one or multiple Asset Panda records to a JIRA ticket in one click.
* Quick Filtering: Easily view only the assets linked to the current ticket.
* Unlink When Needed: Remove linked assets from the ticket without affecting the original records.
* Two-Way Visibility: Linked JIRA ticket info automatically appears in the “Tickets” tab of the Asset Panda asset record.

### **NetSuite Integration**

We’ve introduced NetSuite integration, enabling Asset Panda to fetch and sync key data from NetSuite to support asset tracking and operational workflows.

#### **Highlights**

* **Core Entity Sync:** Automatically fetch and sync Inventory Items, Item Receipts, Purchase Orders, Vendors, Subsidiaries, and Departments.
* **Inventory Items Filtering:** Apply filters to control which inventory items are synced into Asset Panda.


# March 2026 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Pro Web <a href="#asset-panda-pro-web" id="asset-panda-pro-web"></a>

#### Currency Support Expansion <a href="#currency-support-expansion" id="currency-support-expansion"></a>

The following currency codes have been added to the **Currency** data type field settings:

* **JMD:** Jamaican Dollar
* **CRC:** Costa Rican Colón

These options will be available for selection within the currency configuration menu across all collections.

***

### Integrations <a href="#integrations" id="integrations"></a>

#### **Jamf Pro Two-Way Sync** <a href="#jamf-pro-two-way-sync" id="jamf-pro-two-way-sync"></a>

We’re introducing 2-way sync with Jamf Pro, enabling updates made in Asset Panda to be pushed back to Jamf, keeping device data aligned across both systems.

**Highlights:**

* Sync updates from Asset Panda to Jamf Pro for supported device fields.
* Writable fields depend on:
  * What the Jamf Pro API allows us to update
  * How the external entity and field mappings are configured in your system
* Only fields permitted by Jamf and properly mapped in Asset Panda are available for write-back.
* Validations ensure only supported and correctly configured fields are updated.
* Clear integration logs with descriptive success and failure messages.

On successful updates, changes reflect in both Asset Panda and Jamf, reducing duplicate data entry and maintaining system consistency.

&#x20;

#### **Jamf Integration Enhancement – Additional Computer Attributes (Pro)** <a href="#jamf-integration-enhancement-additional-computer-attributes-pro" id="jamf-integration-enhancement-additional-computer-attributes-pro"></a>

Jamf Pro users can now select additional **Jamf Computer attributes** when configuring the **Computers external entity** in the Jamf integration. These fields can be mapped using the standard mapping UI and will sync during both full and incremental syncs.

**Newly Available Fields**

* Is Apple Silicon
* System Integrity Protection
* Gatekeeper
* XProtect Version
* Institutional Recovery Key
* Architecture Type
* Boot ROM
* Active Directory Status
* Master Password Set
* Disk Encryption Configuration
* Available RAM Slots
* Reported IP Address
* Applecare ID
* Battery Capacity
* Last Check-In (lastContactTime)

&#x20;

#### **Google Workspace Two-Way Sync** <a href="#google-workspace-two-way-sync" id="google-workspace-two-way-sync"></a>

We’re introducing 2-way sync with Google Workspace, enabling updates made in Asset Panda to be pushed back to Google Workspace, keeping user and device data consistent across both systems.

**Highlights:**

* Sync updates from Asset Panda to Google Workspace for supported user and device fields.
* Writable fields depend on:
  * What the Google Workspace Admin SDK APIs permit us to update
  * How the external entity and field mappings are configured in your tenant
* Only Google-editable and properly mapped fields are available for write-back.
* Validations ensure only supported fields are updated, preventing unauthorized or restricted changes.
* Clear integration logs with descriptive success and failure messages.

On successful updates, changes reflect in both Asset Panda and Google Workspace, eliminating manual updates and reducing double entry across platforms.

&#x20;

#### **Google Workspace Integration Enhancement – Additional Fields & Org Unit Entity** <a href="#google-workspace-integration-enhancement-additional-fields-and-org-unit-entity" id="google-workspace-integration-enhancement-additional-fields-and-org-unit-entity"></a>

Google Workspace users can now access additional fields across multiple external entities, including Mobile, ChromeOS, and Users, along with support for a new external entity: **Organizational Units (Org Units).**

These fields can be configured and mapped using the standard mapping UI and will sync during both full and incremental syncs.

**Newly Available Fields**

**Mobile**

* OS

**ChromeOS**

* Annotated Asset ID
* Annotated Location
* Auto Update Expiration

**User**

* Employee Number
* Cost Center
* Department
* Office Phone Number
* Employee Type
* Manager Email
* Job Title
* Home Address
* Secondary Email
* Home Phone Number
* Primary Email
* Office Address

**Org Unit (New External Entity)**

* Org Unit ID
* Name
* Description
* Org Unit Path
* Parent Org Unit ID
* Parent Org Unit Path


# February 2026 Release Notes

#### Pull From - Updates <a href="#pull-from-updates" id="pull-from-updates"></a>

User can now edit "Pull From" data types field settings after initial saving of the field. You can now fully customize the behavior of these fields, including the ability to:

* Edit Field Names: Easily rename fields including the field name and additional fields.
* Switch Data Sources: Easily swap the source collection or link your data to a different field in any other collection.
* Manage Field Selection: Change your primary data field and customize your view by adding or removing additional fields.
* Refine with Filters: Apply specific rules to your source data to ensure only the most relevant records are pulled through.
* Centralized Field Settings: Manage the configuration for all pulled fields directly from the primary field’s settings menu.

This will also allow users to update field within the Categories collection too.


# January 2026 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Web <a href="#core-application-updates" id="core-application-updates"></a>

#### People/User List Update <a href="#check_mark-people-user-list-v2" id="check_mark-people-user-list-v2"></a>

We’ve overhauled user management to provide better visibility, streamlined workflows, and more robust import capabilities across Global, Module, and People levels.

1. **Global User Management**
   1. Status Tracking: A new Status column (Active, Invited, Deactivated) is now available. You can now Filter, Search, and Sort the global list by user status.
   2. Global Import (Add): Bulk add users to specific modules. Rows are automatically skipped if the user already exists in that module to prevent duplicates.
   3. Global Import (Update): Bulk update First Name, Last Name, and Roles. This requires Email, Account, and Module to identify the correct record.
2. **Module-Level Enhancements**
   1. UI & Bulk Actions: The Module list now matches the Global UI. Admins can now Resend Invites or perform actions in bulk to save time.
   2. Module Import (Add/Update): Support for "No Template" or "Existing Template" flows to add or update user details. Email remains the unique identifier and cannot be modified.
   3. Advanced Discovery: Expanded Filter, Sort, and Search options now include Email, Role, Status, and Last Login Date.
3. **People Collection & User Linking**
   1. People Import (Add/Update & Link): When importing People records, you can map a column to Linked User.
      1. The system matches the email to existing module users.
      2. Unmatched emails are skipped and logged as "No user found," while blank emails are imported as unlinked records.
   2. "Current User" Smart Filter: A new primary filter option that dynamically displays records linked to the logged-in user. This logic also applies to Record Limit Permissions and Custom Roles.

#### Reservations and Reservation Calendar <a href="#check_mark-reservations-calendar-v1" id="check_mark-reservations-calendar-v1"></a>

1. Reservations will allow users to block a specific timeframe of an asset to allow for check out at the start date to that user/location or other collections pulled into the reservation collection.
2. Users can reserve multiple items at once and see on a calendar all reservations created per collection. Calendar will be a new tool added to the global menu.


# 2025 Release Notes

Asset Panda introduces updates that refine workflows, strengthen integrations, and enhance data accessibility. A structured interface simplifies navigation, allowing for more efficient task execution. Reporting enhancements provide greater flexibility with advanced filtering and customization, delivering deeper insights. Expanded integration support connects external systems more effectively, ensuring seamless data exchange. Stability and reliability remain a priority, with continuous improvements tailored to evolving business needs.


# December 2025 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Web <a href="#core-application-updates" id="core-application-updates"></a>

#### Reporting Updates <a href="#check_mark-reporting-v3" id="check_mark-reporting-v3"></a>

Summation is available on collection tables and reporting page.

* Supported column types - Numeric, Currency, Percentage, Formula – Math, Formula – Duration
* All values within a column can be automatically summed and displayed in an aggregated top row
* Collection group by - Summations can be applied within grouped data views
* Configurable options - Users can choose to display either sum or count for applicable columns
* Reports and collections can be exported with the summation row in PDF, Excel, or CSV formats
* Option to export only the summation row independently is available
* Summation and count is included for saved views&#x20;

#### Language Translation <a href="#check_mark-language-translation-in-app-v3" id="check_mark-language-translation-in-app-v3"></a>

New languages added! We’ve added support for Turkish, Polish, Indonesian (Bahasa Indonesia), Vietnamese, and Thai in Asset Panda Pro. You can switch your language preference under your User Profile.

*(Please note: This translates the app interface only; custom data remains as is.)*

***

### Integrations <a href="#integrations" id="integrations"></a>

#### SFTP Imports <a href="#sftp-imports" id="sftp-imports"></a>

Asset Panda now supports importing and updating records directly from files hosted on an SFTP server. This makes it easier to manage large or recurring data updates without manual uploads.

Users can connect to an SFTP server, select files, map file columns to Asset Panda fields, and apply duplicate-check rules to update existing records. Import configurations can be saved as templates and reused for future imports, with validation and clear error messaging to guide setup and execution.

#### Microsoft Active Directory (On-Prem) Updates <a href="#microsoft-active-directory-on-prem-automation-logs-in-web-app" id="microsoft-active-directory-on-prem-automation-logs-in-web-app"></a>

Sync activity for the Microsoft Active Directory On-Prem integration is now visible directly in the Asset Panda web app.

After a sync completes, users can view a summary showing how many records were loaded, failed, or skipped, along with key details like the integration name, trigger source, and sync date and time. If issues occur, users can direct to the local log file for full technical details. The experience is consistent with automation logs available for other integrations.

#### Microsoft Intune: Two-Way Sync <a href="#microsoft-intune-two-way-sync" id="microsoft-intune-two-way-sync"></a>

The Microsoft Intune integration now supports two-way sync, allowing updates made in Asset Panda to be pushed back to Intune.

Users can map supported, Intune-editable device fields and keep information consistent across both platforms. Validations ensure only eligible fields (Ownership, Managed Device Name, Notes) are updated, and detailed integration logs clearly indicate successful updates or errors. Changes are reflected in both systems without requiring manual updates.

#### Google Calendar Updates <a href="#google-calendar-integration" id="google-calendar-integration"></a>

Admins can now enable or disable Google Calendar syncing at the module level, with disabled modules automatically pausing existing syncs. Users can manage their own Google Calendar connection from their profile, including connecting, disconnecting, and viewing connection status. Users can also choose which module calendars sync to Google Calendar, while Asset Panda events continue to appear on the dashboard regardless of Google sync settings.

#### Hexnode UEM <a href="#hexnode-uem-integration" id="hexnode-uem-integration"></a>

Asset Panda now integrates with Hexnode UEM, enabling visibility into devices, applications, and policies managed in Hexnode.

The integration imports device and hardware inventory, installed applications, and device policies, along with organizational and group structures. This helps teams maintain accurate, centralized device data while continuing to manage endpoints in Hexnode.


# November 2025 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Web <a href="#core-application-updates" id="core-application-updates"></a>

&#x20;

#### Attachments Data Type <a href="#attachments-data-type" id="attachments-data-type"></a>

The attachments data type will now allow for multiple files instead of just one per field.

Limitation: Forms/tables in forms will still have the existing mechanism of single attachment. That will be handled in later phase to support multiple attachments in forms.

#### Attachments Gallery <a href="#attachments-gallery" id="attachments-gallery"></a>

At the global level, users can see all the upload files inside their Asset Panda organization depending on which records they have access to view. Users can export single or multiple files at once.

At the record level, inside the record details page, user will see all files linked to a record via the attachments field.

#### People/User List <a href="#people-user-list" id="people-user-list"></a>

Users can now like a People collection record to a user from the module user list. This will allow a limit to \<Current user> filter and update permissions in custom roles where a logged in user can see only assets assigned to themselves.

#### Global User List <a href="#global-user-list" id="global-user-list"></a>

For a quick and easy flow to offboard a user added to multiple accounts and modules, the global user list will give an overview of all the users added inside an organization. From here user can be deactivated from the organization with just one action.

Other actions inside resending user invite if the user is still in `Invited` status, changing roles per module, changing name. Additional features include the ability to search, filter, and sort on user’s email, first name, last name, and status.

#### Module User List Redesign <a href="#module-user-list-redesign" id="module-user-list-redesign"></a>

User list at the module level has been redesigned to match global user list. The layout design matches a collection list view. Actions include users in `Invited` status can be resent invite, changing roles, changing name, and deactivate. Additionally users can search, filter, and sort on user’s email, first name, last name, and status.

#### Dashboard Fixes <a href="#dashboard-fixes" id="dashboard-fixes"></a>

* Dashboard widget’s visibility based on role and permissions.
* Dashboard ‘set as default’ bug fix.

#### ID and Auto-Increment Field Support for Barcode Generator and Scanning <a href="#id-and-auto-increment-field-support-for-barcode-generator-and-scanning" id="id-and-auto-increment-field-support-for-barcode-generator-and-scanning"></a>

* Users can generate barcode for the values in ID column or any auto-increment field values.
* Users can scan and search field values using barcodes across ID or any auto-increment column.

#### Language Translation <a href="#v2-language-translation-in-app" id="v2-language-translation-in-app"></a>

* New languages added! We’ve added support for Korean, Hindi, Italian, Russian, Arabic, Bengali, and Urdu in Asset Panda Pro.
* You can switch your language preference under your **User Profile**.&#x20;

*(Please note: This translates the app interface only; custom data remains as is)*


# October 2025 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Web  <a href="#add-a-new-account" id="add-a-new-account"></a>

#### **Editable Field Data Types** <a href="#unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders" id="unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders"></a>

The data type of existing fields can be modified after saving a new field. For example, a Text field can be converted to a Number field. Changing the data type will erase all existing values in that field for current records. Note that Pull from another collection data type field cannot be edited once saved.

&#x20;

***

### Integrations &#x20;

#### **Record-Level Tickets Section** <a href="#webhooks" id="webhooks"></a>

A new Tickets tab on each record consolidates ticket information from multiple platforms, including Zendesk, with Jira support coming soon. Users can expand each platform category to view ticket details such as Ticket ID, Status, Subject, Assignee, Requester, and Date.

#### Asset Panda In-App Console for Zendesk <a href="#asset-panda-in-app-console-for-zendesk" id="asset-panda-in-app-console-for-zendesk"></a>

The Asset Panda app is now accessible directly inside the [Zendesk interface](/integrations-store/ticket-management/zendesk-integration). This integration allows logging in, searching, and linking Asset Panda records without leaving Zendesk. Two-way linking enables multiple records to be connected to a ticket and vice versa. Linked ticket information is visible in Asset Panda, including clickable Zendesk Ticket IDs.

#### Microsoft Active Directory On-Prem

The configuration page now shows the latest installer and scheduler version numbers and their last update dates. Version details are dynamically fetched and automatically refreshed when new releases become available, helping maintain up-to-date setups.


# September 2025 Release Notes

## Asset Panda Pro Web <a href="#add-a-new-account" id="add-a-new-account"></a>

### **Depreciation Reporting** <a href="#unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders" id="unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders"></a>

Introducing comprehensive depreciation reporting capabilities that provide financial tracking and compliance support.

The depreciation reporting feature includes the following capabilities:

* **Layout from Saved View**: Report layout, including visible columns and filtered records, is carried forward exactly from the locked saved view. All filters, groupings, and column configurations selected in the saved view are reflected in the generated report.
* **Report Generation**: Reports can only be generated from locked saved views of collections where depreciation is enabled, ensuring accurate and consistent reporting. Users specify custom date ranges, and for each asset, depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation are calculated as per the selected range, factoring in cost, salvage value, useful life, and in-service/retirement dates.
* **Calculation Handling**: The system prorates calculations for assets not in service for the entire period and for assets retired or disposed of within the range. Depreciation expense is calculated only for periods when the asset is active, with proration handled for assets acquired or retired during the reporting range.
* **Include or Exclude Fully Depreciated Assets:** Accumulated depreciation is calculated up to the end date of the report, but never exceeds the depreciable base (cost minus salvage value). Edge cases, such as assets with zero useful life, non-depreciable assets, and fully depreciated assets, are handled via toggles ("hide fully depreciated" and "exclude non-depreciables"). The system prevents negative values and ensures no asset accumulates depreciation beyond its allowable amount.
* **Report Layout**: Each row displays asset details such as ID, name, acquisition cost, salvage value, placed-in-service date, useful life, depreciation expense for the range, accumulated depreciation, and net book value. Grouping and filtering as per the saved view are retained for precise analytical and presentation needs.
* **Save and Share Capabilities**: Generated reports can be saved with a custom name and description. All saved reports are available on a dedicated listing page for easy access and management. Reports can be shared directly with other users, with all saved reports accessible to admins by default for oversight and compliance.
* **Export Options**: Export reports in PDF, Excel, or CSV formats. Exported files include the applied filters and context for maximum clarity.
* **Security and Access control**: User role-based access ensures only authorized users can generate, save, view, export, or share reports. All report actions, including generation, saving, export, deletion, and sharing, are logged for a complete activity trail.&#x20;
*

### Date Fields - Default to Today <a href="#date-fields-default-to-today" id="date-fields-default-to-today"></a>

Date Only and Date & Time fields now include a **Default to today** checkbox in field settings to streamline data entry. When enabled, the option automatically populates the field with the user's current date or date and time when a new record is created, saving you time and ensuring accurate, up-to-the-minute data capture.&#x20;

### **Edit Data Type of a Field** <a href="#edit-data-type-of-a-field" id="edit-data-type-of-a-field"></a>

Control over data has been introduced through the ability to edit and change the data type of existing fields. You can now easily adjust a field's format (for example, changing a Text field to a Number field) to ensure your data is always organized and accurate. The new functionality provides greater flexibility as your asset management needs evolve.&#x20;

### **Maps - Address Enhancement** <a href="#maps-address-enhancement" id="maps-address-enhancement"></a>

Address fields integrate with a map interface, facilitating more accurate and intuitive location selection. Now, you can easily pinpoint and select the precise location for any address directly on a map, ensuring greater accuracy for your records. The update provides a more intuitive and visual way to manage your location-based data.&#x20;

### **Mobile - Push Notifications** <a href="#mobile-push-notifications" id="mobile-push-notifications"></a>

The in-app notification system has been enhanced to bring you real-time push notifications directly to your mobile device. Now, you can stay instantly updated on critical activities and assignments, even when you're not actively using the app. The feature ensures you never miss an important alert, helping you stay connected and productive on the go.&#x20;

***

### Integrations &#x20;

#### **Webhooks** <a href="#webhooks" id="webhooks"></a>

The webhook system enables automated data updates triggered by specific events and integration within automation workflows, providing the following capabilities:

* **Trigger-Based Events**: Sends data automatically when records are created, updated, deleted, or when forms are submitted.
* **Custom Webhook URLs**: Supports adding and managing multiple webhook endpoints within an agent or automation setup.
* **Automation Integration:** Enables adding webhooks as actions within automation workflows.
* **Standard JSON Format:** Sends structured JSON payloads compatible with external systems.
*

#### **Apple Business Manager - Device Integration** <a href="#apple-business-manager-device-integration" id="apple-business-manager-device-integration"></a>

Support for Apple Business Manager (ABM) device integration has been added to Asset Panda Pro with the following enhancements:

* **Seamless Device Sync**: Devices can now be retrieved from ABM using the API and sync.
* **Streamlined Management**: The integration ensures a way to bring Apple-managed devices directly into Asset Panda Pro for tracking and management.

**Limitations**:

* Delta sync and filtering are not supported. The limitation stems from the ABM API itself, not the integration.
* All device records are fetched during each sync.&#x20;

#### **Jamf Actions for Device Management** <a href="#actions-for-device-management-jamf" id="actions-for-device-management-jamf"></a>

Automations in Asset Panda Pro provide device management actions for Jamf Pro-managed devices. These actions are triggered based on specific system events and are accessible through the Automation interface.

* **Supported Actions**: Lock and Erase operations on Jamf Pro-managed devices.
* **Trigger Conditions:** Actions execute when records are updated, forms are submitted, or statuses change.
* **Integration**: The Automation interface includes a Device Management action type.
* **Supported Triggers**: Compatible with record update and form submission triggers.


# August 2025 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Pro Web <a href="#add-a-new-account" id="add-a-new-account"></a>

#### Reporting <a href="#unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders" id="unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders"></a>

Access reports from form submissions to drive efficient data workflows. Leverage robust capabilities to manage and analyze form data effectively.

#### **Share and Control Reports**

* Sharing reports with specific roles enables admins to grant view access, ensuring controlled collaboration
* Configuring custom roles with view, edit, create, or delete permissions tailors access, maintaining precise control
* Enforcing permissions dynamically adapts to role changes, safeguarding report content
* Restricting collaborators to view-only access for shared reports prevents unauthorized edits, preserving data integrity.

#### **Organize and Manage Reports**

* Grouping report data by any field displays record counts and aggregate values, enabling clear insights
* Supporting up to three levels of grouping organizes complex data, aligning with collection standards
* Deleting multiple reports in bulk with select-all and confirmation options accelerates management, restricted to permitted reports for control.

&#x20;

***

### Integrations&#x20;

Extend Asset Panda's power with seamless connections. Integrate with key systems for optimized asset management.&#x20;

#### **QuickBooks Online Integration**  <a href="#quickbooks-online-integration" id="quickbooks-online-integration"></a>

Integrate QuickBooks Online to streamline accounting processes. Automate depreciation data transfer, which provides:

* Automatic synchronization of depreciation to QuickBooks Online as journal entries
* Mapping capabilities for depreciation date, amount, and accounts
* Grouping options by individual assets, collection level, or other specified fields.&#x20;

#### **ServiceNow - Inbound** <a href="#servicenow-inbound" id="servicenow-inbound"></a>

Integrate ServiceNow data to manage assets more efficiently. Directly import assets, users, and incidents from ServiceNow into Asset Panda, offering:

* Seamlessly fetch assets, users, and incidents
* Assign ServiceNow data to any target collection within Asset Panda
* Dynamic field selection with dropdown menus displaying relevant ServiceNow fields
* Consistent data assured via unique identifier mapping
* Flexible field mapping for additional data import
* Consistent integration workflows aligned with other Asset Panda integrations
* Simple agent setup to fetch ServiceNow data based on saved mappings.

#### &#x20;**ServiceNow - Outbound**

Integrating ServiceNow-outbound with Asset Panda ensures a two-way data flow and maintains data consistency between systems by automatically updating ServiceNow tickets when changes occur in Asset Panda.

{% hint style="info" %}
***Note**: The specific fields that can be updated from Asset Panda depend on the limitations of the ServiceNow API.*&#x20;
{% endhint %}

#### Calendars <a href="#calendars" id="calendars"></a>

Synchronize maintenance schedules, warranty expirations, and other critical dates with user calendars. Generate a read-only (.ics) link from Asset Panda dashboards for calendar integration, which offers:

* Subscription options for Google, Outlook, and Apple Calendar
* Easy sharing with one-click link generation
* Convenient setup through the Calendar Sync integration in the Integration Store
* Simple configuration and information view.

{% hint style="info" %}
***Note**: Update frequency is governed by the settings and capabilities of your chosen calendar application*&#x20;
{% endhint %}


# July 2025 Release Notes

### Asset Panda Pro Web <a href="#add-a-new-account" id="add-a-new-account"></a>

#### Optimize Reports for Enhanced Analysis <a href="#unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders" id="unify-collections-in-forms-to-streamline-workflows-and-optimize-work-orders"></a>

Access saved reports from form submissions to drive efficient data workflows. Leverage robust reporting capabilities to manage and analyze form data effectively.

**Generate and Customize Reports**

* Generating reports from selected form submission data incorporates form and collection fields, delivering comprehensive insights.
* Filtering and sorting submission data focuses analysis on critical information, enhancing decision-making.
* Hiding or showing specific columns tailors views, ensuring clarity and precision.
* Grouping submission data by key fields organizes complex datasets, enabling actionable insights.

**Save and Manage Reports**

* Exporting reports enables efficient sharing, accelerating collaboration.
* Saving customized report views with names, optional descriptions, associated forms, filters, visible columns, and sort settings ensures quick reuse, boosting productivity.
* Managing saved reports on a Reports Listing Page organizes data access, enhancing efficiency.

&#x20;

<figure><img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/R8gyggLZlwACkd9priL9/image-20250620-132744.png" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

&#x20;

***

### Integrations&#x20;

#### Integrating Microsoft Teams with Asset Panda <a href="#integrating-microsoft-teams-with-asset-panda" id="integrating-microsoft-teams-with-asset-panda"></a>

Connect Microsoft Teams to Asset Panda for real-time updates. Stay in sync by routing notifications through Webhook URLs to selected channels. Matching triggers to existing email and Slack options ensures familiar workflows. Sending instant messages drives collaboration, keeping everyone informed for sharper decisions.&#x20;

#### [Okta Integration](/integrations-store/identity-and-access-management-iam/okta-integration) <a href="#okta-integration" id="okta-integration"></a>

Connect Okta to Asset Panda to automatically sync user records and enable secure logins for effortless management.

* **Field Mapping:** You can keep directories aligned by mapping fields like ID, name, email, and department to a dedicated collection, ensuring accurate data transfer.
* **Unique Identifiers:** Furthermore, choosing unique identifiers prevents duplicate records, so directories stay clean.
* **Advanced Filters:** Additionally, applying advanced filters before loading refines data quality, building a reliable foundation.
* **Delta Sync:** You can now utilize delta sync for efficient updates, keeping user records up to date.
* **Okta Logins:** Moreover, enabling Okta-based logins grants secure access, aligning with team needs.
* **Consistency with Other Integrations:** Finally, providing consistency with Azure AD and Google Workspace integrations offers a familiar experience.

#### Microsoft Active Directory On-Premises Integration

Connect Microsoft Active Directory on-premises to Asset Panda for seamless employee directory sync.

* **Installation Files:** You can download installation files directly from the web app, making setup straightforward.
* **Desktop Application:** Furthermore, using the desktop application connects to your AD environment, facilitating agent installation.
* **Import AD Users:** Additionally, importing AD users into the People collection populates records efficiently.
* **Configure Logins:** You can now configure AD users for login access, enabling secure authentication.
* **Workflows:** Finally, enabling one or both workflows eases user management, ensuring flexibility.


# June 2025 Release Notes

## Asset Panda Web  <a href="#add-a-new-account" id="add-a-new-account"></a>

### **Get Instant Alerts When Your Tasks are Complete**

Asset Panda now sends notifications when data tasks are complete, eliminating the need to check the status manually. Notifications are sent only for actions you initiate, ensuring relevant updates.

**Notification types and actions:** Click any notification to go directly to the relevant action.

* **Import completion** - Click to view the updated collection
* **Export completion** - Link provided to download your completed file
* **Manually triggered automations** - Click to see the detailed activity log
* **Failed operations** - Click to retry the action

All notifications are automatically marked as read when clicked.

**Notification management:** Receive push notifications on mobile devices and access organized notifications through the structured modal. Mark notifications as read or unread and delete them when needed.

**History and storage:** Notifications are automatically stored for one year, creating a comprehensive activity history for reference and auditing purposes.

&#x20;

## **Improved Dashboard Experience with Enhanced Access Control**

Your Asset Panda dashboard gets a sleek new look with smarter permission controls, delivering a cleaner, more organized workspace, adapting to your team's unique needs and workflows.

The updated interface uses consistent design patterns while enhanced permissions give administrators complete control over dashboards, widgets, and user access.

* Administrators now control all aspects of dashboard functionality, from accessing and editing dashboards to managing widgets and user permissions.
* Lock and unlock saved views to protect critical data configurations while maintaining flexibility for team collaboration when appropriate.
* Widget display restrictions prevent widgets from one module from appearing in another module's admin or user view, maintaining clean and relevant workspaces.
* Automatic sharing permissions for administrators streamline collaboration and eliminate access bottlenecks that slow down decision-making.
* Complete control over saved view management allows administrators to customize which team members can view, edit, and interact with specific data configurations.&#x20;

### Improved Asset Forecasting with Collection Depreciation Control

Transform asset forecasting from single-record limitations into powerful collection-wide intelligence. This expanded depreciation system provides the visibility necessary for accurate cost predictions and loss forecasting across entire asset portfolios, surpassing the previous restriction of viewing depreciation one record at a time.

Control depreciation settings at the collection level while maintaining individual record flexibility. Calculate depreciation per record with individual types, then view and manage results through enhanced listing displays and comprehensive, detailed views.

**Enhanced Depreciation Capabilities:**

* **Collection Level Control** - Turn depreciation on or off for entire collections with simple toggle functionality from account management admin tools.
* **Individual Record Calculations** - Calculate depreciation per record with individual depreciation types.
* **Enhanced Listing Views** - View, search, filter, show/hide, group by, and export depreciation data directly from records listing with dedicated depreciation columns.
* **Detailed Visualization** - Access table and chart views showing complete calculated depreciation of individual records with current value. Export the complete depreciation table in Excel, CSV, or PDF format. Export charts in PDF format.
* **Cross-Platform Field Access** - Use depreciation fields across dashboard widgets, automations, forms, and other platform features.
* **Custom Role Permissions** - Limit depreciation access through resource permissions for custom roles. Collaborators have view-only access.

&#x20;

***

Integrations \
&#x20;
------

### Streamlined IT workflows with Automated Microsoft Intune Device Actions

Automate critical device management tasks directly within Asset Panda without switching platforms. Execute Remote Lock, Wipe, Retire, and Delete commands on Intune-managed devices automatically through existing automation workflows, reducing manual intervention and accelerating IT response times.

Trigger device actions automatically based on record updates, form submissions, or status changes through the new Device Management action type.

**Device Management Automation Capabilities:**

* **Remote device actions** - Execute Remote Lock, Wipe, Retire, and Delete commands on Intune-managed devices.
* **Trigger-based automation** - Activate device actions through record updates, form submissions, and status changes.
* **Direct device control** - Manage Intune devices without leaving the Asset Panda platform.
* **Integrated workflow** - Perform device management directly within Asset Panda automations.

Device management actions execute automatically when automation conditions are met, creating responsive IT workflows that maintain security and compliance without manual oversight.

&#x20;

### Efficient IT Operations with Automated Google Device Actions <a href="#efficient-it-operations-with-automated-google-device-actions" id="efficient-it-operations-with-automated-google-device-actions"></a>

Streamline device security operations by automating essential commands directly within Asset Panda. Execute Wipe and Delete actions for Google-managed devices and Deprovision and Disable commands for Chrome OS devices automatically through existing workflows, eliminating manual processes and reducing response times.

Configure device actions to trigger based on record updates, form submissions, or status changes through the new Device Management action type.

**Google device management automation capabilities:**

* **Google device actions** - Execute Wipe and Delete commands on Google-managed devices.
* **Chrome OS controls** - Perform Deprovision and Disable actions specifically for Chrome OS devices.
* **Automated response** - Trigger device actions through record updates, form submissions, and status changes.
* **Unified operations** - Control Google devices without switching between platforms.
* **Workflow integration** - Embed device management into existing Asset Panda processes.

Automated device management maintains security protocols while reducing manual oversight requirements for IT teams managing Google device ecosystems.

&#x20;

### Enhanced IT Security with Automated Jamf Pro Device Actions <a href="#enhanced-it-security-with-automated-jamf-device-actions" id="enhanced-it-security-with-automated-jamf-device-actions"></a>

Accelerate device management operations by automating critical security commands within Asset Panda workflows. Remote Lock, Wipe, Retire, and Delete actions for Jamf Pro managed devices integrate seamlessly into automation processes, reducing manual tasks and improving incident response efficiency.

Device actions activate automatically when triggered by record updates, form submissions, or status changes via the new Device Management action type.

**Jamf Pro device management automation capabilities:**

* **Comprehensive device commands** - Execute Remote Lock, Wipe, Retire, and Delete actions on Jamf Pro managed devices.
* **Condition-based triggers** - Automate device actions through record updates, form submissions, and status changes.
* **Single platform control** - Manage Jamf Pro devices directly within the Asset Panda interface.
* **Security automation** - Maintain device security protocols through automated workflows.

Jamf Pro device management automation ensures rapid security response while minimizing manual intervention across Apple device deployments.


# May 2025 Release Notes

## Asset Panda Web &#x20;

### **Color Coding for single select and multiple select fields**

Color-coded options can now be applied to [single select](/settings/account-management/fields) and [multiple-select](/settings/account-management/fields) fields. This visual enhancement improves recognition and speeds up data interpretation in both the listing view and record detail view.

* Assign distinct colors to each selectable option
* View color indicators in record details and listings&#x20;

### **Targeted Barcode Field Selection**

[Barcode generation](/tools/barcode-generator) now allows selection of a specific barcode-type field, improving control and reducing unnecessary output.

* Select a specific field for barcode generation
* Avoid generating barcodes for all barcode-type fields by default
* Improve precision in asset labeling workflows

### **Automation Enhancement – Pull from Another Collection**

Field mapping has been enhanced in [automations](/settings/account-management/automations) involving "Pull from Another Collection" fields. This streamlines setup and improves accuracy when automating record updates or creation.

* Automatically map additional fields from the selected collection
* Available for both "Update Field Value" and "Create Record" actions
* Reduce manual configuration and mapping errors&#x20;

### **Multi-Record Table Submission**

Forms can now process multiple records in a single submission using a [table](broken://pages/Cy2UhYBTSCn4bK6I3POM) input. This simplifies bulk entry and update workflows by eliminating repetitive submissions.

* Create or update up to 15 records in one submission
* Enter unique values per row directly within the form table
* Improve efficiency in high-volume data operations
* Not yet compatible with record linking or consumable transfers across collections&#x20;

### **Form Submission Logs**

[Form submission](/settings/account-management/forms/form-submission-logs) tracking has been centralized for greater visibility and auditing. Logs provide structured access to both record-based and form-based histories.

* View all form submissions associated with a specific record
* Access all submissions completed using a specific form
* Search, filter, sort, and export submission logs
* Currently limited to ID field visibility; collection fields are not yet supported&#x20;

### **Formula Field UI Upgrade**

The [formula field](/settings/account-management/fields) editor has been improved to allow direct entry of field names. This update offers more flexibility in creating formulas for both text and numeric operations.

* Type fields directly into the formula editor
* Build dynamic expressions with text and mathematical logic
* Streamline the formula-building process&#x20;

### **Email Field Value Merge in Notifications**

Email notifications can now include dynamic field values from triggered records. This enables the automatic sending of personalized and relevant messages.

* Insert specific field values into email content
* Tailor messages per triggered record without manual formatting
* Improve clarity and engagement in automation notifications

&#x20;

### **Locked Admin-Controlled Saved Views**

Saved views can now be locked to preserve administrative control. This ensures consistency across shared views and prevents unintended changes by non-admin users.

* Lock saved views at the time of creation
* Allow only administrators to modify locked views
* Enable collaborators and custom roles to duplicate but not alter the original
* Locked status cannot be changed after creation

&#x20;

***

## Integrations   <a href="#integrations" id="integrations"></a>

### [**Jira Integration**](/integrations-store/ticket-management/jira-integration)

The Jira integration enables synchronization of issue tracking data with Asset Panda. This supports unified workflows across IT and asset management teams.

* Import Jira tickets with full field mapping
* Use delta sync to process only modified records after the initial load
* Search, filter, and paginate tickets for streamlined navigation&#x20;

### [**Freshservice Integration**](/integrations-store/ticket-management/freshservice-integration)

Freshservice integration consolidates IT service management data within Asset Panda, providing visibility across support tickets, services, procurement, and asset records.

* Import tickets, services, contracts, purchase orders, and asset cloud data
* Apply delta sync to capture only changed records after the initial import
* Use basic filters, search, and pagination to manage records efficiently

### &#x20;[**Cisco Meraki Integration** ](/integrations-store/device-management/cisco-meraki-integration)

Cisco Meraki integration brings network infrastructure data into Asset Panda, giving IT teams real-time insight into network configurations and device inventory.

* Import networks, administrators, clients, and organization devices
* Include switches and security appliances in asset tracking
* Sync changes using delta sync for optimized performance
* Access large data sets with filtering, search, and pagination

### &#x20;[**Kandji Integration**](/integrations-store/device-management/kandji-iru-integration)&#x20;

The Kandji integration provides a centralized view of Apple devices enrolled in Kandji. This improves inventory tracking and compliance monitoring.

* Import device records with hardware details, enrollment status, and compliance data
* Use filters to refine device views
* Keep data current with delta sync for modified records only

### &#x20;[**SFTP Reporting Integration**](/integrations-store/data-sync/sftp-reports-integration)

SFTP support is now available for scheduled data exports. This feature enables secure, automated delivery of reports to internal servers.

* Export saved views and collections to an external SFTP server
* Authenticate using a password or SSH key
* Choose export formats including CSV, Excel, and PDF
* Schedule exports at specific times and intervals

### &#x20;[**Slack Integration**](/integrations-store/collaboration/slack-integration)

Slack is now available as a delivery channel for automation notifications, improving real-time collaboration and responsiveness.

* Send automation alerts as direct messages to Slack users
* Post updates to public or private Slack channels
* Extend any automation previously configured for email delivery to Slack


# March 2025 Release Notes

## Asset Panda Web&#x20;

### [**Account Management**](/settings/account-management)

The redesigned Account Management page in Settings provides a streamlined interface for a quick overview and access to essential settings. You can now:

* Rearrange the order of accounts, modules, collections, fields, and forms.
* Show or hide collections or fields to customize visibility.
* Deactivate automations and forms when they are no longer needed.\
  &#x20;

You can view all fields within a collection, rearrange them, and create new ones. Changes apply to everyone with module access, and new sessions will retain the updated settings. Reordering is as simple as dragging and dropping rows.

&#x20;

* **Show or Hide Collections or Fields:** Control the visibility of collections and fields based on your preferences. Hidden collections or fields remain stored in the system and can be re-enabled anytime.
* **Deactivate Automations and Forms:** Disable automations and forms that are not required without deleting them. This ensures that workflows remain flexible while preserving previously configured settings.

&#x20;

### [**Automation - Send Email**](/settings/account-management/automations)

The **Send notification** action has been redesigned to support dynamic email values. You can send emails based on:

* An email field in the collection.
* User roles.
* Additional configurable options.

The email body now supports a **rich text editor**, allowing you to format content and include hyperlinks.

&#x20;

### [**Automation - Update Field Value**](/settings/account-management/automations)

You can now configure an automation action to update field values. This allows linked collection records to update dynamically based on the trigger record value.

&#x20;

***

## Integrations <a href="#integrations" id="integrations"></a>

&#x20;

### [**Microsoft Intune – Filter Devices by ‘Groups’ Before Loading**](/integrations-store/device-management/microsoft-intune-integration)

You can now filter devices by groups before loading them into the system. Only active devices will be loaded if no filters are applied and All Devices is selected.

&#x20;

### [**Zendesk – Delta Sync**](/integrations-store/ticket-management/zendesk-integration)

After an initial full sync, subsequent updates will run as Delta Syncs, aligning with Asset Panda Pro integrations. You can trigger a full sync manually by updating the mapping page.

&#x20;

### [**Zendesk – Filtering by Organization and Status Field**](/integrations-store/ticket-management/zendesk-integration)

You can now filter Zendesk tickets by selecting:

* One or more organizations.
* Specific status values before importing into Asset Panda.

If no filters are applied, all tickets will be imported. Otherwise, only the matching tickets will be loaded.

<br>


# January 2025 Release Notes

## Asset Panda Web

### Simplify and Optimize Asset Validation with Audits

Audits help organizations efficiently validate their assets by ensuring accurate records, addressing compliance needs, and providing real-time updates. Empowering businesses to maintain accountability and trust, audits enable organizations to verify the physical presence and status of assets through a combination of tools and processes:

* Barcode scanning and manual verification ensure data accuracy and reduce errors.
* Historical data maintains compliance and serves as a reliable reference.&#x20;
* Permission controls safeguard sensitive information.

Organizations face numerous challenges in managing and tracking assets effectively. Audits address these obstacles by:

* Ensuring compliance with financial and operational standards.
* Reducing discrepancies in asset records to prevent mismanagement or loss.
* Supporting customizable parameters to meet industry-specific requirements.&#x20;

The auditing process is designed to save time while improving accuracy with real-time updates during audits to instantly reflect findings in the system. These elements enhance operational efficiency, ensure accountability, and empower organizations to maintain accurate asset records. &#x20;

***

## Asset Panda Mobile App  <a href="#january-mobile-app" id="january-mobile-app"></a>

### Enhanced Flexibility for Asset Validation with Audits in the Asset Panda Mobile App

Audits in the Asset Panda mobile app leverage your mobile device camera to ensure accurate and flexible asset management with real-time data syncing. This capability empowers you to efficiently manage assets in dynamic environments, reducing errors and improving accountability. &#x20;

***

{% hint style="info" %}
For more information about adding the Audits Feature to your platform, contact **<support@assetpanda.com>**.&#x20;
{% endhint %}


# Get started


# Log into or out of the app

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit the app](https://assetpanda.app/login)

Asset Panda provides secure access with email authentication and Single Sign-On (SSO) options.&#x20;

## Log into the application

1. Enter your email address, and then click **Continue**. The system redirects to the organization's identity provider if single sign-on (SSO) is enabled.&#x20;
2. If the organization uses an identity provider, complete the steps necessary for the provider.
3. If no identity provider is used, enter a password to complete the login.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
To reset a forgotten password, click **Forgot password**. For assistance, click **Contact support** to contact them directly.
{% endhint %}

## Log out of the application

1. Click the profile icon <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FVkmTqo4J3lmCQAbFViRJ%2FProfile.png?alt=media&amp;token=590275f6-59ba-4ae9-ae9d-8c9994f5d75d" alt="Profile icon" data-size="line">.
2. Select **Log out**.


# App navigation

## <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> Home icon

While on any page in the application, you can click the Home icon above the page to access the module pane to select a collection, saved view, or form for viewing. You can also use this pane to create a new module or form.&#x20;

***

## Left navigation pane

The navigation pane provides access to major areas of the application:

* ![Account Switcher icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FCrGy468nqlYwjN1XrWlQ%2FAccount%20Switcher.png?alt=media\&token=975c9561-3fa6-414d-b4d4-4cf7a3716dfd) **Account Switcher**: Enables you to select the account and module to display in the application. When you select the module, the primary collection for that module is displayed.
* ![Dashboard icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FbckQplT4Q3DIw4MzRybV%2FDashboards.jpg?alt=media\&token=b21a911a-287b-4131-9d0f-29ccd9c4cda4) [Dashboard](/dashboard): Displays a customized overview of asset data.
* ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) [Tools](/tools): Provides access to tools for use within the application.
* ![Calendar icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FDjTI9Zv57W6GTUKtuP6I%2FCalendar2.png?alt=media\&token=42aec6b3-06b4-4c23-bc18-e08cfad6251a) [Calendar](/calendar-reservations): Provides an overview of activities by date.
* ![Reports icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FElw4TarNoCtta8wqB1Wl%2FReports.png?alt=media\&token=46ec9e46-db79-458b-9278-7b40a206f99f) [Reports](/reports): Provides access to data reports.
* ![Settings icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media\&token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c) [Settings](/settings): Enables you to manage objects in the account, including collections, forms, automations, users, and integrations.
* <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media&amp;token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd" alt="URSA icon" data-size="line"> [URSA](/ursa): Access the URSA AI-enabled process helper.

***

## Search field

A search bar in the top-right enables quick access to specific accounts or settings.

***

## Page-level toolbar

The toolbar on collection pages provides access to actions that can be performed on the page:

* <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i>: Filter the displayed records based on a selected criteria.&#x20;
* ![Sort icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F3b0im2zKDXRVX1jXtygJ%2FSort%20by.png?alt=media\&token=e8ca3268-4c4e-4fb2-975c-0ef31647c36f): Sort the displayed records based on selected criteria.
* ![Group records icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FO2r5RgG9nr3PdOkMgRBG%2FGroup%20by.png?alt=media\&token=87d2deb5-fcf2-4019-b0b7-d167c319295c): Group the displayed records based on the selected criteria.&#x20;
* ![Manage fields icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FLnMn2wsO7Q3ARYB32TUW%2FManage%20Fields.png?alt=media\&token=2b62f5fd-c745-47eb-8d46-30bd5527895e): Manage the fields displayed in the collection.
* ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png): Enable other collection actions, such as exporting the data or summarizing data rows.
* **Add** button: Enables you to add records or create asset kits.

See [View a collection](/settings/account-management/collections).

***

## Asset list icons

In asset lists, the following icons are displayed to indicate various scenarios:

* <i class="fa-link" style="color:blue;">:link:</i>: Indicates that the field is pulled from another collection.
* ![Kit icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2Fikf8GAPzrBkmqiUzVGHp%2FKit.png?alt=media\&token=63a2e6cf-9c94-43a2-bc57-3a98dac11fc7): The asset item is a kit.
* <i class="fa-file">:file:</i>: The item is an individual, serialized asset.
* ![Consumable assets icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FXCmOUCDyYe5KTNpWeawP%2FSerialized%20Category.png?alt=media\&token=1d5e920a-66d9-4e26-8bef-e95bd7ab3c60): The category contains consumable assets.
* <i class="fa-location-dot" style="color:$primary;">:location-dot:</i>: Indicates a linked map location. Click the link to view the location in a map view.


# Popular Pages for New Admins


# Manage your profile

## Update user details

You can modify many personal settings associated with your organization, such as your profile picture, displayed language, and time zone.&#x20;

1. Log in to your Asset Panda Pro account at [assetpanda.app](https://assetpanda.app/).
2. Click your avatar in the upper-right corner and select **Manage profile**. The **User profile** page is displayed.
3. To update your password:
   1. Click **Update password**.
   2. For **Confirm current password**, enter your current password.
   3. For **New password** and **Confirm password**, enter a new password that meets the following requirement:
      * Minimum of 8 characters
      * At least one lowercase letter (a-z)
      * At least one uppercase letter (A-Z)
      * At least one number (0-9)
      * At least one special symbol
   4. Click **Save**.
4. To change your profile image:
   1. Click **Browse** under **Profile picture**.
   2. Select an image file no longer than 100MB, then select **Open**. The Edit Profile Picture window is displayed.
   3. Drag the slider bar to zoom in or out in the profile image.
   4. Click **Save**.
5. Edit the **First name** or **Last name**.
6. To switch the Asset Panda Pro interface into your preferred language, select the **Language**. The following languages are supported:

{% columns %}
{% column %}

* Arabic
* Bengali
* Chinese (Simplified)
* Chinese (Traditional)
* Dutch
* English
* French
* German
  {% endcolumn %}

{% column %}

* Hindi
* Indonesian (Bahasa Indonesia)
* Italian
* Japanese
* Korean
* Polish
  {% endcolumn %}

{% column %}

* Portuguese
* Russian
* Spanish
* Thai
* Turkish
* Urdu
* Vietnamese
  {% endcolumn %}
  {% endcolumns %}

{% hint style="info" %}

* The system utilizes the Google Translation API to manage the localized interface options.
* The translation applies to hard-coded fields and system-level interface elements (buttons, menus, system labels).
* Custom fields, record field values, and user-entered data is not translated and remains in the language in which it was entered.
  {% endhint %}

8. Select the **Time zone** that reflects your location.
9. Click **Save changes**.

***

## Add calendar integrations

If Google calendar integrations are enabled for your organization, you can add dashboard calendars to your personal email account.

***

## Grant Support login access

Asset Panda team members may need to access your Asset Panda Pro organization to assist you with support, implementation, or training. For security reasons, this access requires your explicit consent. To help the Asset Panda team support you directly, you can grant temporary login access to your account:

1. Log in to your Asset Panda Pro account at [assetpanda.app](https://assetpanda.app/).
2. Click your avatar in the upper-right corner and select **Manage profile**.
3. Turn on **Grant account login access**, then choose an **End date** and **Time zone** for when the access should expire.
4. At the top of the page, click **Save changes**.


# Set up the organization

The organization is at the highest level of the Asset Panda Pro hierarchy. The organization has a unique sub-domain and holds users, permissions, and accounts. Every Asset Panda Pro account will have an organization. Access to the data in any account and module within the organization is granted with the Organization Admin permission role.

Within the organization, you can have a single account or multiple accounts:

* **Single Account**

  For simpler operations or smaller teams, you can use a single account. You can use collections, categories, or other organizational tools to group data for different departments or locations within one environment. This setup reduces administrative overhead and is typically sufficient when assets or resources need to be shared or moved frequently within the same environment.
* **Subsidiary Accounts**

  In a corporate environment with multiple divisions or companies operating under one parent corporation, you can assign each subsidiary to its own separate account. This setup enables each entity to manage its own data, assets, and users, while still reporting to the parent corporate organization for oversight.&#x20;
* **Managed Service Provider (MSP) Accounts**

  A Managed Service Provider (MSP) oversees the IT or asset needs of various **external** clients. Under this model, you can provide each client with its own account beneath the MSP’s parent account. The MSP retains the ability to switch between the child accounts for management, support, and reporting. This setup is effective for service providers who need to offer separate, secure environments for multiple customers, all under a single administrative umbrella.

See [Accounts and modules](/settings/account-management/accounts-and-modules).

## Set up supporting elements

Within the organization accounts, you can set up the following elements to support your asset tracking:

* **Modules** organize different workflows within your account. See [Accounts and modules](/settings/account-management/accounts-and-modules).
* **Collections** organize your assets and link people, locations, and categories to create meaningful connections across your resources. See [Collections](/settings/account-management/collections).&#x20;
* **Categories** enable you to group related records based on specific criteria, such as the type of asset. See [Categories](/settings/account-management/collections/categories). You can also use categories to [track consumable assets](/settings/account-management/collections/track-consumable-assets).
* **Forms** enable end users to [create](/settings/account-management/forms/forms-that-create-records) or [update](/settings/account-management/forms/forms-that-update-records) records in a collection.&#x20;
* You can specify the **fields** that are managed in collections, categories, and forms. See [Fields](/settings/account-management/fields).
* **Automations** streamline workflows by executing predefined actions based on specific conditions. See [Automations](/settings/account-management/automations).
* **User roles** determine their access to data within an organization. See [Users](/settings/users).
* **Integrations** provide connections to third-party applications to optimize your asset, device, and user management processes. By leveraging integrations, you can streamline operations, improve data accuracy, and enhance overall efficiency within your organization. See [Integrations store](/integrations-store).

### Automated account builder

If Ursa<sup>AI</sup> is enabled in your organization, you can use the Account Builder to set up your Asset Panda Pro account by generating a complete organizational structure based on a description of your business. See [Account Builder](/ursa/ursa-account-builder).


# Maintain records

When your organization is set up with the structure it needs to operate, you can add records to each collection to manage your assets.

You can add records manually or you can import data from external spreadsheets to populate each collection.

## View record details

You can select records in collections to review and edit record data quickly. You can also view full record details for a more thorough review of the record.

1. Select the record to view. The record details pane is displayed.
2. Review or [edit](#edit-a-record) the record details.
3. To view the full details for the record, select **View full details**. The following tabs are displayed:
   * **Record details**: Displays all configured field values for the record.
   * **Activity**: Displays the activity stream associated with the record.
   * **Tickets**: Displays tickets associated with this record. See [Ticketing](/settings/account-management/ticketing).
   * **Attachments**: Displays the files attached to fields within this record.
   * **Relationships**: Displays links between this record and other records in the organization:

     * **Linked to this record**: Shows every record that has been pulled into the current one (for example, vendors linked to a laptop).
     * **Record linked to another record**: Shows every place where the current record is referenced (for example, assets currently using this vendor).

     You can click links in the tab to navigate to the details for the selected record.

***

## Add a record

{% hint style="info" %}
To import multiple records from an external spreadsheet, see [Import data from a spreadsheet](/tools/import/import-data-from-a-spreadsheet).
{% endhint %}

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection to which you want to add a record.
3. Click **Add**. The Create new record pane is displayed.
4. Enter and select values for the available fields.
5. Click **Save**.&#x20;

***

## Duplicate a record

You can create single or multiple copies of a selected record to speed record creation.

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to duplicate a record.
3. Click the record to edit. The details pane is displayed for the record.
4. To create a single duplicate:
   1. Click **Actions** <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Single Duplicate**. The Duplicating records page is displayed.
   2. Click **Duplicate**. The new record is added to the collection, without unique information.
5. To create multiple duplicate records:
   1. Click **Actions** <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Multiple Duplicate**. The Duplicate multiple records page is displayed.&#x20;
   2. Enter the number of duplicate records to create.
   3. Select the check boxes for each field whose value you want to duplicate in the new record.
   4. Click **Continue**. A summary of the new records is displayed.
   5. Click **Duplicate**. The new record is added to the collection, without unique information.
6. Select each newly created record. The details pane is displayed.
7. Enter and select new values for the available fields.
8. Click **Save**.&#x20;

***

## Edit a record

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to edit a record.
3. Click the record to edit. The details pane is displayed for the record.
4. Enter and select new values for the available fields.
5. Click **Save**.&#x20;

***

## Bulk update records

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to edit a record.
3. Click the check box for each record to edit.&#x20;
4. Click **Bulk Update** <i class="fa-arrows-rotate-reverse">:arrows-rotate-reverse:</i>**.** The Bulk update window is displayed.
5. Select the check box for each field to be updated for the selected records.

{% hint style="info" %}
Unique fields, system fields, and fields associated with depreciation cannot be edited in a bulk update.
{% endhint %}

6. Click **Continue**.
7. Enter the new field values for the selected records.
8. Click **Save**.&#x20;

***

## Lock a record

You can lock records to prevent them from being edited.

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to lock a record.
3. Select the check box for the record to lock.
4. Click **More** <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> and then select **Lock**. A confirmation message is displayed.
5. Click **Lock**. The lock <i class="fa-lock">:lock:</i> icon is displayed for the record to indicate it cannot be edited.

***

## Unlock a record

You can unlock records to enable them to be edited.

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to unlock a record.
3. Select the check box for the locked record.
4. Click **More** <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> and then select **Unlock**. A confirmation message is displayed.
5. Click **Unlock**.&#x20;

***

## Archive a record

You can archive records to remove them from active collections without deleting them. This action preserves all data, relationships, and history for future reference or restoration.

{% hint style="info" %}
Archived records are displayed in the appropriate <i class="fa-box-archive">:box-archive:</i> **Archived** collection in the module pane.
{% endhint %}

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to archive a record.
3. Select the check box for the record to archive.
4. Click **More** <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> and then select **Archive**.&#x20;

***

## Restore an archived record&#x20;

You can archive records to move an archived record back to the active collection with all data, relationships, and history intact.&#x20;

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Under **Archived** in the module pane, select the collection for which you want to restore an archived record.
3. Select the check box for the record to restore.
4. Click **More** <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> and then select **Unarchive**.&#x20;

***

## Delete a record

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to edit a record.
3. Select the check box for the record to delete.
4. Click **More** <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> , and then select **Delete**. A confirmation message is displayed.
5. Click **Delete**. If required, the **Reason to Delete** window is displayed.
6. If required, enter the reason you are deleting the record, then click **Save**.


# Create records using email

You can configure collections to enable records to be created using data shared in an email. This enables appropriate email senders to be able to create records in a collection without having to log into the application to add them manually.

You can identify the users who can create records using the domain associated with their email. You can also determine whether records are created based on the email fields or on fields contained in the email body.

## &#x20;Enable email record creation

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Collections** tile. The list of collections is displayed.
3. For the record you want to support with email creation, select **Manage** under **Email record create** and then click the **Manage** link. The **Email record creation** page is displayed.
4. To copy the email where emails should be sent to create records, click <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FP1YtLUf1iq9MXXfJXQGy%2Fimage.png?alt=media&amp;token=0776d198-fac6-4f83-92ff-aa791ee7d1e2" alt="" data-size="line"> next to **Email to create records**. You can then share the email with the appropriate users.
5. For **Allow emails from the following domains**, enter the domains (for example, @assetpanda.com) from which data will be accepted to create new records.
6. For **Send errors to email**, enter the email address where errors during record creation should be sent.
7. Specify how to process email data to create records:
   * To map email fields to create records automatically:
     1. For **Mapping type**, select **Map email to fields**.
     2. Map the email **Body**, **Subject**, **From**, **Sent at**, and **Attachment** to fields in the collection. Leave fields unmapped to ignore them when creating records.&#x20;
     3. To specify default values for unmapped fields, click **Map field**, select the appropriate collection field, and then enter its default value.
   * To create records using text in the email body:
     1. For **Mapping type**, select **Add fields in email body**.
     2. When creating emails, add the fields exactly as they are displayed in the application (case-sensitive). For example:\ <kbd>Email: <panda@assetpanda.com></kbd>\ <kbd>Status: Available</kbd>\ <kbd>Location: Dallas</kbd>
8. Click **Save**.

***

## Create collection records

1. Create an email from an allowed domain (for example, @assetpanda.com).
2. For **To**, enter the email specified in **Email to create records**.
3. Based on how you configured the record creation, specify the subject and body of the email.

When the email is received by the **Email to create records**, the record creation request is processed. Any issues with the record creation are sent to the email specified in **Send errors to email**.


# Export record data

You can export the data associated with selected records, or the entire collection, to a PDF, Excel, or CSV file to share the data with others.

## Export individual records

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to export data.
3. Select the check box for each record to be exported into a single file.
4. Click **More** <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> , select **Export**, and then select the output format (PDF, Excel, or CSV). A popup indicates when the report export has finished.
5. Click **Download Link** in the popup to download the exported report.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also click **Notifications** <i class="fa-bell">:bell:</i> and click **Download** in the export notification to download the file.
{% endhint %}

***

## Export a collection

You can export the data for an entire collection to be shared externally.

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to export data.
3. To display a summary row with totals for numeric fields, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Row Summary**. The summary (<i class="fa-sigma">:sigma:</i>) row is displayed above the records.
4. In the header, click **Export** <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>. The export menu is displayed.
5. Perform one of the following steps:

   * To export the collection data, select the output format (PDF, Excel, or CSV).&#x20;
   * To export only the summation row with totals for numeric data fields, select **Export summary** for the output format (PDF, Excel, or CSV).

   A popup indicates when the report export has finished.
6. Click **Download Link** in the popup to download the exported report.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also click **Notifications** <i class="fa-bell">:bell:</i> and click **Download** in the export notification to download the file.
{% endhint %}


# Kits

Kits enable you to create groups of serialized and/or non-serialized assets to manage them as a single unit. Kits are useful when you track or issue items, such as tool sets, device bundles, or onboarding packages.&#x20;

## Kit templates

Kit templates define the standard structure of a kit. You use them to build and reuse consistent kit formats across your teams. When you create templates, you specify the type and quantity of items to include and select individual assets or reference categories (for example, "3 monitors" or "2 barcode scanners").

To create a kit template, configure the layout with the Kits property type. This allows you to control how kits behave and which assets they contain.

## Non-template kits

Non-template kits support flexible asset grouping. You can use this approach if the combination of assets changes often or if you need to build a one-time bundle. You can manually add assets to a kit record by using the Kits property. This gives you the freedom to create kits based on current needs without predefined rules.&#x20;

## Visibility <a href="#visibility-in-listings" id="visibility-in-listings"></a>

In asset lists, the first column shows a mix of individual assets and kits. Each record is clearly labeled as a serialized asset, a bulk asset, or a kit. This makes it easy to identify grouped items and understand how assets relate to each other.

## Create a kit

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to create asset kits. The list of assets in the collection is displayed.
3. Select the check box for each asset to add to the kit.
4. Click **More** <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> , and then select **Create kit**. The kit details pane is displayed, with the selected assets listed.
5. If necessary, adjust the assets included in the kit:
   * To add additional assets to the kit, click **Add**, select the assets, and then click **Add to kit**.
   * To remove selected assets from the kit, click <i class="fa-xmark">:xmark:</i>.&#x20;
6. If any of the selected assets have a specified **Category** value, specify whether to save the kit as a template:
   1. To save the created kit as a template, select **Save this kit as template**.
   2. Enter the **Kit template name** to configure the template. This name is applied to the **Category name** field for the kit.
7. Enter the **Name** of the kit.
8. Specify the remaining details for the kit, and then click **Save**. The selected assets are moved into the kit, which is displayed as <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2Fikf8GAPzrBkmqiUzVGHp%2FKit.png?alt=media&amp;token=63a2e6cf-9c94-43a2-bc57-3a98dac11fc7" alt="Kit icon" data-size="line"> in the list.

***

## Delete a kit

When you delete a kit, you can choose whether to retain the assets in the kit.

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * From the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="" data-size="line">, select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection containing the appropriate assets.&#x20;
3. Select the check box for the kit to delete.
4. Click **Delete**. The **Deleting kit** page is displayed.
5. Perform one of the following tasks:
   * To keep the child assets and delete only the container kit, click **Keep kit content**.
   * To delte the kit and all child assets, click **Delete all**.


# Depreciation

Depreciation is the practice of allocating the cost of an asset over its useful life. This reduces the assets' value on the organization's balance sheet each year for financial reporting.

The **Depreciation** feature enables you to track the depreciation for assets. It supports multiple depreciation methods and enables automatic calculation of depreciation values based on asset data. It can be used for quick estimates or as a saved calculation within asset records when the required fields are populated.

You can configure whether the depreciation is summarized in monthly, quarterly, or yearly totals, and whether mid-cycle adjustments are allowed.

{% hint style="info" %}
For more information on this feature, contact <support@assetpanda.com>.
{% endhint %}

## Depreciation types

The following depreciation methods are supported:

* **Straight-Line**: The simplest method of calculating the depreciation expense. When enabled, the depreciation expense for the asset is applied evenly across the useful life of the asset.
* **Units of Production**: Depreciates assets based on the number of hours they are used or the number of units produced by using the asset over its useful life. This method is useful for organizations whose asset output fluctuates due to demand.
* **Sum of Years**: Depreciates assets earlier in life, but less aggressively than the Declining balance method. Annual depreciation is based on the number of years of the asset's useful life.
* **Declining Balance**: Depreciates assets earlier in life rather than evenly over their useful life. This method is more aggressive than the Sum of Years method.
* **Double Declining Balance**: Applies a larger expense amount in the earlier years than in the later years of an asset’s useful life. This method is more aggressive than the Declining Balance and Sum of Years methods.

There are no prerequisites for using the basic version of depreciation, which allows entering values directly to estimate results.&#x20;

***

## Depreciation fields

When **Depreciation** is enabled for a collection, the following fields are added automatically to enable you to save depreciation values to records and enable automated calculations.

<table><thead><tr><th width="185.6015625" valign="top">Field Name</th><th width="161.37890625" valign="top">Field Type</th><th valign="top">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Depreciation type</strong></td><td valign="top">Single select list</td><td valign="top">Method applied to calculate the depreciation of the asset</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Asset cost</strong></td><td valign="top">Currency</td><td valign="top">Price originally paid for the asset</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Date placed in service</strong></td><td valign="top">Date &#x26; Time</td><td valign="top"><p>Date the asset began its use and began deteriorating. This date determines the start of the depreciation table.</p><p>You can only edit the <strong>Date placed in service</strong> if the month is in the future or no depreciation rows have been posted. When the specified month is reached, the field is locked from edits to prevent historical data corruption.</p></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Salvage value</strong></td><td valign="top">Currency</td><td valign="top"><p>Value of the asset at its end of life. </p><p>This value must be lower than the <strong>Asset cost</strong>.</p></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Useful life (months)</strong></td><td valign="top">Numeric (0 decimals)</td><td valign="top">Number of months from the <strong>Date placed in service</strong> until the asset reaches its end of life</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Current month</strong> (read-only)</td><td valign="top">Text</td><td valign="top">Current month </td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Current book value</strong> (read-only)</td><td valign="top">Currency</td><td valign="top">Current calculated value for the asset, including any previous depreciation over time</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Depreciation expense</strong> (read-only)</td><td valign="top">Currency</td><td valign="top">Calculated monthly reduction in the depreciated asset's value based on the selected <strong>Depreciation type</strong> </td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Accumulated depreciation</strong> (read-only)</td><td valign="top">Currency</td><td valign="top">Total amount of depreciation assumed for the asset from its <strong>Date placed in service</strong></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Annual Rate</strong></td><td valign="top">Numeric (Percentage)</td><td valign="top">Annual rate of depreciation estimated for the asset. The value will be converted to monthly values for calculations. <br>This value is used when using the <strong>Declining balance</strong> depreciation type.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Total Estimated Units</strong></td><td valign="top">Numeric</td><td valign="top">Estimated number of units that will be produced by the asset over its useful life</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Units Produced</strong></td><td valign="top">Numeric</td><td valign="top">Number of units produced to date by the asset</td></tr></tbody></table>

***

## Enable and manage Depreciation

You enable depreciation at the collection level. You can then specify the depreciation data for assets in the collection.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Collections** tile. The list of collections is displayed.
3. Select **Depreciation**. The [Depreciation fields](#depreciation-fields) are added to the collection.
4. Click **Manage** **> Manage Depreciation**.
5. Select whether you want to summarize depreciation values on a **Monthly**, **Quarterly**, or **Yearly** bases.
6. For the selected selected **Depreciation calculation frequency**, select whether you want to start the depreciation calculation based on the **Calendar** start (January-December) or whether you want to apply it based on the **Fiscal** start. If you selected the **Fiscal** start type, the fiscal periods are listed for review.
7. To allow mid-cycle adjustments to be applied to assets, select **Yes** under **Allow mid-cycle adjustments**.
8. Click **Save**.&#x20;

***

## Configure depreciation for assets

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection for which you want to update depreciation information.
2. To specify depreciation data manually:
   1. Select the asset for which you want to apply depreciation. The asset details pane is displayed.
   2. Specify the following [Depreciation fields](#depreciation-fields):
      * [Depreciation type](#depreciation-types)
      * **Asset cost**
      * **Date placed in service**
      * **Salvage value**
      * **Useful life (months)**
      * **Annual Rate** (used with the Declining balance method)
      * **Total Estimated Units** (used with the Declining balance method)
      * **Units Produced** (used with the Declining balance method)
   3. Click **Save**. The asset's depreciation is calculated automatically.
   4. Repeat steps a-c for each asset.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also import depreciation data from a spreadsheet to update multiple assets in a single process. See [Import](/tools/import).
{% endhint %}

***

## View depreciation information

After you [enable Depreciation](#enable-depreciation) and enter values in the [Depreciation fields](#depreciation-fields) for assets, you can view the depreciation schedule for the asset.

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection for which you want to review depreciation information.
2. Select the asset for which you want to review depreciation. The asset details pane is displayed.
3. Click **View full details**. The asset's details page is displayed.
4. Select the **Depreciation** tab. The table of depreciation for the asset is displayed.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Depreciation** tab is displayed only if depreciation data exists for the asset.
{% endhint %}

5. To view the data in chart form, click **Chart** above the table.

***

## Edit the depreciation type

You change the depreciation type used to calculate the depreciation values for the selected asset.

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection for which you want to review depreciation information.
2. Select the asset for which you want to edit the depreciation details. The asset details pane is displayed.
3. For **Depreciation type**, select the appropriate type. Adjust the remaining [Depreciation fields](#depreciation-fields) as needed.
4. Click **Save**. The **Change depreciation type?** window is displayed.
5. Select an option to specify how to apply the change:
   * To apply the change in depreciation for the current month onward, select **Apply from current month onward** and then click **Apply change**.
   * To recalculate the entire schedule form the **Date placed in service** date, select **Recalculate entire schedule from the start** and then click **Recalculate from start**.&#x20;

{% hint style="warning" %}

* If you recalculate the entire schedule, there is no way to reverse the changes. You should export the depreciation table before completing this step to avoid losing the historical data.
* If you change the depreciation type and edit the **Useful life**, **Salvage value**, or **Asset cost** fields at the same time, the system automatically runs a full recalculation from the start to ensure all values align correctly.
* Units of Production notes:
  * If you are editing to or from the Units for Production depreciation type, you must select **Recalculate entire schedule from the start**. You cannot select **Apply from current month onward**.
  * If you move away from the Units of Production depreciation type, the **Units Produced** and **Total Estimated Units** data is permanently removed.
  * If you move away from the Units of Production depreciation type, the [Depreciation fields](#depreciation-fields) specific to the depreciation type remain visible in the collection.
    {% endhint %}

***

## Schedule a mid-cycle adjustment

{% hint style="info" %}
Mid-cycle adjustments are supported for the Straight Line, Declining Balance, Double Declining Balance, and Sum of Years [depreciation types](#depreciation-types). They are not supported for the Units of Production.
{% endhint %}

A mid-cycle adjustment is a change made to an asset's cost, salvage value, or useful life after it has already started depreciating. This change creates a break in the schedule where new values apply from that point forward.&#x20;

You can use mid-cycle adjustments to reflect financial changes without losing your historical data. This supports scenarios where assets are upgraded, retired early, or have other changes in estimated life.

### Create a mid-cycle adjustment

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection for which you want to review depreciation information.
2. Select the asset for which you want to apply a mid-cycle adjustment. The asset details pane is displayed.
3. Click **Adjust depreciation** and then select **Mid-cycle adjustment**. The **Mid-cycle Adjustment** window is displayed.
4. Select the **Mid-cycle adjustment start date** from which the updated depreciation should be applied.

{% hint style="info" %}

* The start date must be after the **Date placed in service** and after any previous adjustment dates.
* The adjustment will start on the first day of the selected time period, regardless of the date selected.
  {% endhint %}

5. Update the **Useful life**, **Salvage value**, or **Asset cost** of the asset.
6. Click **Save adjustment**. The system recalculates the future rows in the depreciation table.

{% hint style="info" %}
After you save a future adjustment, the **Useful life**, **Salvage value**, or **Asset cost** fields can no longer be edited through the interface, APIs, or automations. You must [edit the mid-cycle adjustment](#edit-a-mid-cycle-adjustment) to edit these values.
{% endhint %}

#### **Carry-Forward calculation**

When a mid-cycle adjustment is applied, instead of restarting from day one, the system takes the **Remaining Book Value** of the asset at the time of the adjustment and then depreciates it over the **Remaining Useful Life**.&#x20;

#### Depreciation table

If an asset's value reaches $0.00 (common in with the Double Declining Balance type), a mid-cycle adjustment applied to the $0 periods may not display a label in the depreciation table, though the calculation remains accurate.

If your table only shows a limited range (for example, 24 months), look for an inline message at the bottom of the table that indicates when a scheduled adjustment is set to begin.

### Edit a mid-cycle adjustment

{% hint style="info" %}
You can only edit the latest (last) mid-cycle adjustment.
{% endhint %}

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection for which you want to review depreciation information.

2. Select the asset for which you want to edit a mid-cycle adjustment. The asset details pane is displayed.

3. Click **Adjust depreciation** and then select **Edit mid-cycle adjustment**. The **Edit mid-cycle adjustment** window is displayed.

4. Select the **Mid-cycle adjustment start date** from which the updated depreciation should be applied.

   <div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="info" class="hint hint-info"><ul><li>The start date must be after the <strong>Date placed in service</strong> and after any previous adjustment dates.</li><li>The adjustment will start on the first day of the selected start period, regardless of the date selected.</li></ul></div>

5. Update the **Useful life**, **Salvage value**, or **Asset cost** of the asset.

6. Click **Save adjustment**. The system recalculates the future rows in the depreciation table.

### Cancel a mid-cycle adjustment

You can cancel all adjustments that are set to begin in a future month.

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection for which you want to review depreciation information.
2. Select the asset for which you want to cancel future mid-cycle adjustments. The asset details pane is displayed.
3. Click **Adjust depreciation** and then select **Cancel mid-cycle adjustment**. A confirmation message is displayed.
4. Click **Confirm**. All pending adjustments in the future are removed and the full depreciation schedule is recalculated.

***

## Stop Depreciation

If an asset is retired, sold, or no longer in use before its useful life ends, you can stop calculating the depreciation for the asset. You can stop the depreciation in the current month or select a future month to schedule the stop action.

{% hint style="info" %}

* You cannot stop calculating depreciation for an asset that has reached its **Depreciation stop date**.
* When depreciation is stopped, you can no longer edit the [Depreciation fields](#depreciation-fields) for the record.&#x20;
  {% endhint %}

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection for which you want to review depreciation information.
2. Select the asset for which you want to stop calculating depreciation. The asset details pane is displayed.
3. Click **Adjust depreciation** and then select **Stop Depreciation**. The **Stop depreciation** window is displayed.
4. Enter the **Depreciation stop date**.

{% hint style="info" %}

* The **Depreciation stop date** must be after any existing mid-cycle adjustments.
* The stop will be applied at the end of the selected month, regardless of the date selected.
* If you specify a date in a future month, you can cancel the depreciation stop prior to the selected stop month.
  {% endhint %}

5. Click **Save adjustment**. The depreciation table will end at the selected stop month. The **Current book value** and and **Current accumulated depreciation** will remain constant from that date forward.


# Audits

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Audits in the app](https://assetpanda.app/tools/audits)

Audits in Asset Panda help you maintain accurate and up-to-date asset records while ensuring accountability across various departments. The process provides a structured approach to identify, validate, and update asset information, making it easier to address discrepancies and streamline asset management activities.

In the web application, you can perform the following tasks:

* Perform audits with barcode scanning and manual verification tools to validate asset details.
* Automate recurring audit schedules (daily, weekly, monthly, or quarterly).
* Archive completed audit data for compliance and reporting, enabling comprehensive trend analysis.

The mobile application extends auditing capabilities to dynamic and remote environments. With the app, you can perform the following tasks:

* Use your device’s camera to scan barcodes and verify asset information.
* Perform audits offline with automatic syncing when connectivity is restored.
* Receive notifications and alerts for scheduled audits, ensuring timely completion of tasks.

This approach makes audits vital for finance, education, and construction industries, ensuring accurate asset tracking for compliance, resource planning, and operational efficiency. By addressing the entire lifecycle of asset validation, audits empower you to mitigate risks, reduce errors, and maintain trust in operational data.

## Open and closed audits

The **Audits** page contains separate sections for **Open Audits** and **Closed Audits**:

* **Open Audits**: Audits in progress that allow you to update records and track ongoing work.
* **Closed Audits**: Completed audits that no longer require modifications and serve as a reference for records.

***

## Track audit progress <a href="#audit-progress" id="audit-progress"></a>

Each audit displays the following progress indicators to help you monitor completion:

* The completion percentage, which shows how much of the audit has been finished
* The number of audited records versus the total number of records in the audit
* Start and end dates of the audit (if available)

***

## Create an audit  <a href="#add-a-new-account" id="add-a-new-account"></a>

#### Setup

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media&amp;token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32" alt="Tools icon" data-size="line"> **Tools** > **Audits**.
2. Click **Add**. The **Audit setup** page is displayed.
3. Enter the **Audit Name** and an optional **Description** to summarize the audit's purpose.
4. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and **Collection** that contains the data to be audited.
5. Click **Save & continue**. Data for the selected collection is displayed in the **Record selection** step.

#### Record Selection <a href="#record-selection" id="record-selection"></a>

1. To filter the records displayed for audit:
   1. Click <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i> **Filter records to audit**. The **Filter by** page is displayed.
   2. Select the **Field name** to filter the records.
   3. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
   4. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field.
   5. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps b-d.
   6. If multiple conditions are specified, select an option to determine whether **All** or **Any** of the conditions must be met to enable the record to be displayed.
2. To display the fields available for audit:
   1. Click ![Customize table view icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FLnMn2wsO7Q3ARYB32TUW%2FManage%20Fields.png?alt=media\&token=2b62f5fd-c745-47eb-8d46-30bd5527895e) **Customize table view**.
   2. To hide columns, select **Hide field** ![Hide field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88). To display hidden fields, click **Show field** ![Show field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsJ301q8nf1ayiNLnBrRr%2FField%20Hidden.png?alt=media\&token=d2d34e91-a2b3-4ae6-a62b-e5d223a60d3a). \
      For example, you can include fields such as **ID, Date Added, Last Updated, Added By, and Last Updated By**. Hiding **Last Updated By** prevents your users from seeing who made the last update in the audit results. The selected table settings determine what your users can view when accessing audit data.
3. To allow records that meet the filter criteria to be added to the audit after it starts, click **More Options** and select **Dynamic update audit list**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If this option is not selected, the list remains only includes records that match the filter criteria when the audit is created.
{% endhint %}

4. Click **Save & Continue**. The **Schedule** tab is displayed.&#x20;

#### Schedule <a href="#schedule" id="schedule"></a>

1. To start the audit on a future date, enter a **Start Date.**

{% hint style="info" %}
If you leave **Start Date** empty, the audit will start as soon as it is saved.
{% endhint %}

2. To end the audit on a specific date, enter the **End Date**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}

* If you leave **End Date** empty, the audit will close when users mark it as completed.
* If you select **Allow audit to continue after the end date**, the audit is kept running indefinitely and the user must mark the audit completed.
  {% endhint %}

3. Select the **Time Zone** to determine the start and end times of the audit.\
   \
   For example, scheduling an audit to start on **January 1, 2025, at 12:00 AM ET (Eastern Time)** makes it available at that exact moment in New York (ET), with access worldwide based on each user's local time zone. The audit remains active until the specified end time in the selected time zone, regardless of where users are located.
4. Click **Save & Continue**. The **Share** tab is displayed.

#### Share

{% hint style="info" %}

* **Organization**, **Account**, and **Module admins** have full access to audits within their assigned modules by default.
* **Collaborators and Custom Roles** can view and perform audits only when an admin shares a specific audit with a user role or email. They cannot create, edit, or delete audits.
  {% endhint %}

1. To share the audit with users in a specific role, select the role from the **Share by role** drop-down list. Repeat this step to share with multiple roles.
2. To share the audit with individual users, enter a name in the **Share with user** field. Repeat this step to share with multiple users.
3. Click **Save & continue**. The **Advanced** tab is displayed.

#### **Advanced (optional settings)** <a href="#advanced-settings" id="advanced-settings"></a>

1. Select options to control manual editing:
   * To enable users to mark assets as audited manually without scanning a barcode or entering the unique identifier, select **Allow manual audit**.
   * To enable users to reset audited records to be listed as unaudited, select **Users can change audited records to not audited**. \
     Data updated by a form or manually during the previous audit are not reversed.
   * To enable users to audit multiple records at one time, select **Users can bulk audit assets** manually.\
     When this option is enabled, record data cannot be updated using a for
2. To require a signature before finalizing the audit, select **Users need to provide a signature before closing the audit**.
3. To allow auditors to add new records during the audit, select **Allow users to add records** and then select the form to be used to create records.

{% hint style="info" %}
The form to create records must also be shared with the auditors.
{% endhint %}

4. To allow auditors to update records during the audit, select **Allow users to update records** and then select the form to be used to create records.

{% hint style="info" %}
The form to update records must also be shared with the auditors.
{% endhint %}

5. Click **Save & exit**. The audit setup is complete. Starting the audit initiates tracking of the selected records.<br>

***

## Share an audit

You can share an audit with other users to enable them to perform the audit.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media&amp;token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32" alt="Tools icon" data-size="line"> **Tools** > **Audits**. The list of audits is displayed.
2. Click **Share** <i class="fa-share-nodes" style="color:blue;">:share-nodes:</i> next to the audit to share. The **Share** pane is displayed.
3. To share the audit with users of a specific role, select the **Module** and **Role**. Click **Add role** to share the audit with multiple roles.
4. To share the audit with specific users, select the user from the available list. Repeat the step to share with multiple users.
5. Click **Share**.

***

## Perform an audit in the web application

You can perform an audit from the web application or [from the mobile app](/mobile-app/mobile-audits).

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media&amp;token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32" alt="Tools icon" data-size="line"> **Tools** > **Audits**. The list of audits is displayed.
2. Click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> next to the audit and then select **Perform**. The records associated with the audit are displayed.
3. To filter the list of records based on their audit status, select an option (**Full list**, **Audited**, **Not audited**, **Newly created**, **Outside list**) from the list above the records.
4. Click a record row. The audit pane is displayed for the record.
5. Enter **Audit notes**.
6. To mark the record as audited, click **Mark as audited**.

{% hint style="info" %}

* To be able to mark records as audited without scanning their barcode, an admin must have configured the **Advanced** settings of the audit to **Allow manual edit**.
* If the audit is configured to allow users to bulk audit assets, you can select the check box for each record to mark as audited and then click **Mark audited** above the list.
  {% endhint %}

6. Click **Save notes**.
7. When all records are marked as audited, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> above the records and select **Mark audit as complete**. A confirmation message is displayed.
8. Click **Done**.

{% hint style="info" %}
After an audit is closed, it is displayed in the Closed list. Admins can reopen the audit by clicking <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> next to the audit and then selecting **Reopen**.&#x20;
{% endhint %}


# Notifications

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Notifications in the app](https://assetpanda.app/notifications)

You can receive instant, relevant alerts when key tasks are completed. You can also receive updates for actions you start, such as import, export, manual automation, and failures. For exports, the you can download exported files from the notification.

{% hint style="info" %}
Asset Panda keeps a one-year notification history for audit and reference.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

## View notifications <a href="#view-notifications" id="view-notifications"></a>

See recent alerts and keep track of your tasks.

1. Click <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqV5VLsvuyRHT8ZXpaeZY%2FNotification.png?alt=media&amp;token=0fd804e2-04fa-4744-8e30-326e6b532f09" alt="Notifications" data-size="line">. The Notifications list is displayed.
2. Review recent alerts in the notifications list.
3. For completed exports, click Download to download the exported data file.
4. Select a notification to perform an associated task:&#x20;
   * Imports: View the updated collection.
   * Exports: Download the completed file.
   * Automations: See the activity log.
   * Failures: Retry the operation.
5. To mark a notification as read, click <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FHxyDjXMMQzLLSEcMnySV%2FUnread%20notification.png?alt=media&amp;token=63ce43d3-f596-4a19-ae8d-a894b7cce610" alt="Mark notification as read" data-size="line">. You can also click **Mark all as read** to mark all notifications as read.
6. To hide read notifications, select **Show only unread**.


# Dashboard

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit the Dashboard in the app](https://assetpanda.app/dashboard)

The Asset Panda Pro Dashboard provides a customizable interface to visualize and manage record data. Dashboards consist of customizable widgets that display different types of data with specific formatting.

Dashboards contain widgets, which contain different types of charts and data configured based on available collections.&#x20;

***

## View a dashboard

When multiple dashboards are configured in an account, you can select the dashboard that is displayed.

1. Select ![Dashboard icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FbckQplT4Q3DIw4MzRybV%2FDashboards.jpg?alt=media\&token=b21a911a-287b-4131-9d0f-29ccd9c4cda4) **Dashboard**. The default dashboard is displayed.
2. From the drop-down list above the dashboard, select the dashboard to view.

{% hint style="info" %}
To make the displayed dashboard the default that is displayed when you access the Dashboard view, select **Set as default**.
{% endhint %}

3. To view a widget in a larger window, select ![More actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the widget header and select **Expand**. You can also click **Download** in the expanded view to save a PDF of the widget view.
4. To view data associated with a chart element, click the chart element. The record data associated with the chart is displayed in a new tab.&#x20;
5. In calendar views, use the following options to adjust the calendar view:
   * Select the month and year from the drop-down list above the calendar to change the calendar.
   * In the upper-right corner of the calendar, select an option from the drop-down list to display the calendar by **Day**, **Week**, or **Month**. You can also select whether to display the **Calendar** or the **List** of events.
   * If more events can be displayed for a date, click **+ more** to display more information in the day view of the calendar.

{% hint style="info" %}
When you interact with a date in a calendar, the calendar picker automatically highlights the selected date. If the number of events in a list view exceeds the initial visible area, a loading indicator appears while additional records load.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

***

## Export dashboard data

1. [View a dashboard](#view-a-dashboard).
2. To export the full dashboard:
   1. Click **Export** <i class="fa-arrow-up-from-bracket">:arrow-up-from-bracket:</i> and then edit the file name and its download location.
   2. Click **Save**. The dashboard contents are saved to a PDF file in the specified location.
3. To export a widget's contents:
   1. Click ![More actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the widget header and then select **Export**.
   2. Edit the file name and its download location and then click **Save**. The widget contents are saved to a PDF file in the specified location.

***

## Add a dashboard

1. Select ![Dashboard icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FbckQplT4Q3DIw4MzRybV%2FDashboards.jpg?alt=media\&token=b21a911a-287b-4131-9d0f-29ccd9c4cda4) **Dashboard** and then click **Manage** <i class="fa-gear">:gear:</i>. The **Dashboard management** page is displayed.
2. Click **Add**. The **New dashboard** page is displayed.
3. Select the **Account** for which you want to add a dashboard.
4. Enter the **Dashboard name**.
5. Optionally, enter a **Description** to explain the purpose or content of the dashboard.
6. Select **Create**. The empty dashboard is displayed.
7. [Add widgets](#add-a-widget) to the dashboard.

***

## Add a widget

1. [View a dashboard](#view-a-dashboard).
2. Click **Add Widget**. The **Widgets** page is displayed.
3. &#x20;Select the widget type you want to add:
   * **Chart**: Display a graphic representation of data.
   * **Calendar**: Display date-based records from any module in a calendar format.&#x20;
   * **List view:** Display a view of a collection or saved view.
4. Click **Add**. The **Widget setup** page is displayed.
5. Configure the widget:
   * [Add a chart](#add-a-chart)
   * [Add a calendar](#add-a-calendar)
   * [Add a list view](#add-a-list-view)
6. Click **Add**. The widget is displayed at the bottom of the dashboard.
7. Select ![Rearrange icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) in the widget header and then drag the widget to the appropriate location in the dashboard.

### Add a chart

1. Select the **Chart type** for the widget to compare data or variables to identify patterns, trends, and differences:
   * **Bar**:  Display bars that represent a count of objects or the summary of a selected metric for a specific field.
   * **Line**: Display lines that represent a count of objects or the summary of a selected metric for a specific field.
   * **Pie**: Display the ratio of a values for a selected field. Pie elements can represent a count of objects or a sum of field values.
   * **Table**: Display an itemized summary of values for a selected field.
   * **Count**: Display the count of records for the selected collection or sum of field values for a selected collection field.
2. Enter the **Chart name**.
3. Enter a **Chart description** to provide more explanation for the chart.
4. Select the **Module** for which you want to display data in the widget.
5. Select a **Data source** to specify the collection or saved view for which you want to display data.
6. For bar and line charts:
   1. Select the **X-axis** field to be displayed as data elements in the chart.
   2. For **Y-axis**, select whether the bars or line points reflect a **Count** of objects for the selected X-axis field or the summarized results of a selected **Field**.
   3. If the Y-axis reflects a field, select the **Field** and then select how to summarize the data (for example, **Sum**).
7. For pie charts:
   1. Select the Field to be displayed in the chart.
   2. Select whether the selected field's data should be displayed as a **Count** of values or **Sum** of values in the pie chart.
   3. To display the total count or sum of field values, select **Show total value**.
   4. To show each value's percentage of the total instead of the individual count or sum, select **Show percentage**.
8. For tables:
   1. Select the field to be itemized in the widget.
   2. Under **Aggregate**, select whether to display the **Count** of objects for each field value or the **Sum** of values for the selected field.
   3. To include a total row in the data table, select **Show total value**.
9. For counts:
   1. Under **Aggregate**, select whether to display the **Count** of objects in the selected **Data source** or whether to display the **Sum** of a selected field.
   2. If displaying a **Sum** in the widget, select the **Field** to be summarized in the widget.
10. Click **Add**.

### Add a calendar

The calendar widget supports Month, Week, and Day views, helping you track upcoming deadlines, events, or scheduled tasks. You can open record details directly from the widget, switch between views seamlessly, and configure multiple calendar widgets as needed.

1. Enter the **Calendar name** (for example, **Upcoming Maintenance**).
2. Enter a **Calendar description** to provide more explanation for the calendar.
3. Select the **Module** for which you want to display data.
4. Select a **Data source** to specify the collection or saved view for which you want to display data. The data source must contain at least one date field.
5. Select the **Date field** to determine the record's date assignment in the calendar (for example, Service Date).
6. Optionally, select a **Display** **field** to define the label shown for each calendar event (for example, Asset Name).
7. Click **Add**.

### Add a list view

1. Enter the **List name**.
2. Enter a **Calendar description** to provide more explanation for the calendar.
3. Select the **Module** for which you want to display data.
4. Select a **Data source** to specify the collection or saved view for which you want to display data.
5. Click **Next**. The list of fields associated with the collection or saved view is displayed.
6. To hide fields in the list, select **Hide field** ![Hide field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88). To reinstate a hidden field, select **Show field** ![Show field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsJ301q8nf1ayiNLnBrRr%2FField%20Hidden.png?alt=media\&token=d2d34e91-a2b3-4ae6-a62b-e5d223a60d3a).

{% hint style="info" %}
Select **Hide field** ![Hide field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88) above the field list to hide all fields. To reinstate all hidden fields, select **Show field** ![Show field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsJ301q8nf1ayiNLnBrRr%2FField%20Hidden.png?alt=media\&token=d2d34e91-a2b3-4ae6-a62b-e5d223a60d3a) above the list.
{% endhint %}

7. To rearrange fields in the list, select **Rearrange** ![Rearrange icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and then drag the field row to the appropriate location in the list.
8. Click **Add**.

***

## Edit a widget

1. [View a dashboard](#view-a-dashboard).
2. Click ![More actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the widget header and then select **Edit**.
3. Edit the widget details. See [Add a widget](#add-a-widget).
4. After changes are made, click **Save**.

***

## Delete a widget

1. [View a dashboard](#view-a-dashboard).
2. Click ![More actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the widget header and then select **Delete**. A confirmation message is displayed.
3. Click **Delete**.

***

## Edit dashboard details

You can edit the name or description of a dashboard. You can then edit the widgets on the dashboard.

1. Select ![Dashboard icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FbckQplT4Q3DIw4MzRybV%2FDashboards.jpg?alt=media\&token=b21a911a-287b-4131-9d0f-29ccd9c4cda4) **Dashboard** and then click **Manage** <i class="fa-gear">:gear:</i>. The **Dashboard management** page is displayed.
2. To edit the dashboard's name or description:
   1. Select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) for the dashboard to edit and then select **Edit**.
   2. Edit the **Dashboard name** or **Description**.
   3. Click **Save**.
3. To show or hide the dashboard, select the toggle in the dashboard row.
4. To make a dashboard the default, select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) for the dashboard and then select **Set as default**. The <i class="fa-star" style="color:orange;">:star:</i> icon is displayed for the default dashboard.
5. When multiple dashboards are configured, select **Rearrange** ![Rearrange icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) next to a dashboard and drag it to the appropriate location in the list.

***

## Search for a dashboard

When multiple dashboards exist, you can search to locate specific dashboards by name or description.&#x20;

1. Select ![Dashboard icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FbckQplT4Q3DIw4MzRybV%2FDashboards.jpg?alt=media\&token=b21a911a-287b-4131-9d0f-29ccd9c4cda4) **Dashboard** and then click **Manage** <i class="fa-gear">:gear:</i>. The **Dashboard management** page is displayed.
2. In the **Search** field above the list, enter part or all of the dashboard name or description.
3. In the drop-down list next to the **Search** field, select an option to limit the search to the **Current page** of dashboards or select **Global** to search all dashboards.
4. Press **Enter**. Dashboards with a name or description that contains the search text is displayed.

***

## Share a dashboard

1. Select ![Dashboard icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FbckQplT4Q3DIw4MzRybV%2FDashboards.jpg?alt=media\&token=b21a911a-287b-4131-9d0f-29ccd9c4cda4) **Dashboard** and then click **Manage** <i class="fa-gear">:gear:</i>. The **Dashboard management** page is displayed.
2. Click **Share** <i class="fa-share-nodes" style="color:blue;">:share-nodes:</i> next to the dashboard to share. The **Share** pane is displayed.
3. To share the dashboard with users of a specific role, select the **Module** and **Role**. Click **Add role** to share the dashboard with multiple roles.
4. To share the dashboard with specific users, select the user from the available list. Repeat the step to share with multiple users.
5. Click **Share**.


# Tools


# Activity Stream

The Activity Stream tracks the latest actions that have occurred in the Asset Panda Pro environment and who made each change. The latest 100 changes are displayed, but you can filter the list based on a specific account, module, or collection. This allows you to audit tasks performed over time.&#x20;

The following activity views are displayed:

* [Latest changes](https://assetpanda.app/tools/latest-logs): Displays the last 100 actions that occurred in the environment
* [Configuration logs](https://assetpanda.app/tools/config-logs): Displays the list of configuration changes in the environment
* [Import logs](https://assetpanda.app/tools/import-logs): Display details of imports completed in the environment
* [Record logs](https://assetpanda.app/tools/record-logs): Displays the history of additions, deletions, and modifications to each asset record. Where available, you can click **View details** to view more information about the record activity.
* [User activity](https://assetpanda.app/tools/user-activity): Displays the login history for all users in your accessible modules for security reviews and user monitoring
* [Form logs](https://assetpanda.app/tools/form-logs): Displays information on each form submission. You can click **View details** to view the records updated by the form.
* [Reservation logs](https://assetpanda.app/tools/reservation-logs): Displays information on all reservation actions (create, edit, cancel, check out/in, delete)
* [Automation logs](https://assetpanda.app/tools/automation-logs): Displays information on each time an automation was triggered, including the status of the automation and the number of records modified by the automation
* [Offline sync log](https://assetpanda.app/tools/offline-sync-log): Displays actions with offline timestamps to help understand sync failures due to field configurations or schema changes
* [AI logs](https://assetpanda.app/tools/ai-chat-logs): Displays information about changes processed by Ursa tasks. See [View chat logs](/ursa/ursa-administrator-tasks#view-chat-logs).

## Filter the Activity Stream

1. In the navigation pane, select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Activity stream**.
2. Click **Filter** <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i>. The **Filter by** page is displayed.
3. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and/or **Collection** for which you want to review changes. You can combine selections to further filter the activity stream.
4. To filter the list based on specific records:
   1. Select the **Field name** to filter the collection records.
   2. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
   3. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field.
   4. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps a-c.
   5. If multiple conditions are specified, select an option to determine whether **All** or **Any** of the conditions must be met to enable the record's changes to be displayed.
5. Click **Apply**.


# Import

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Import in the app](https://assetpanda.app/tools/import)

You can import data from an external spreadsheet to add or update records in your system. This process enables you to handle large data sets while ensuring that the data is accurate and consistent.

## Review import history

&#x20;In the navigation pane, you can select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Import** > **Import History** to review the import processes that have been completed. The list indicates the number of records added and updated as well as the number of errors that occurred during the import.

When errors exist in the import, you can click **Download error CSV** <i class="fa-arrow-down-to-bracket">:arrow-down-to-bracket:</i> to download the list of errors and  update the external spreadsheet.

***

## Manage import templates

When you import data, you can choose to save the import settings as a template that can be used for future imports. This saves the time required to configure future imports.

### Create an import template

While importing data, select **New template** and then enter the template name in **Select template**. The import settings are saved to the template. See [Import data from a spreadsheet](/tools/import/import-data-from-a-spreadsheet).

### Edit import template settings

1. In the navigation pane, select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Import** > **Import template**.

2. Click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) for the template row and then select **Edit**. The **Import settings** page is displayed.

3. To modify the template name, enter a new **Template name**.

4. Click **Continue**. The **Update import settings** page is displayed.

5. Under **Check for duplicates to update based on these fields**, select the fields that can be used to identify unique records to be updated.

   <div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="info" class="hint hint-info"><ul><li>Selecting multiple fields to identify unique records may slow the import performance. </li><li>If the identifier matches more than one record, the row will fail.</li></ul></div>

6. Under **Field(s) to update**, select the fields to update for each matching record.

   <div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="info" class="hint hint-info"><ul><li>Only the fields you select will be modified. Other fields remain unchanged. </li><li>System fields, email fields (on user records), and auto-increment fields cannot be updated via import.</li></ul></div>

7. Select **Save.**&#x20;

### Apply import settings

After you have saved an import template, you can apply it for a data import.

{% hint style="info" %}
You cannot modify the import settings in this process.
{% endhint %}

1. &#x20;In the navigation pane, select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Import** > **Import template**.
2. Click **Import** in the appropriate template row. The **Import settings** page is displayed.
3. Review the import settings. Click **Continue** and **Save & continue** while reviewing the settings. The **Upload a File** page is displayed.
4. Complete the remaining steps to import data. See [Import data from a spreadsheet](/tools/import/import-data-from-a-spreadsheet).

***

## Import data

You can initiate a data import from the **Import history** and **Import template** pages.

1. &#x20;In the navigation pane, select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Import** > **Import history** or ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Import** > **Import template**.
2. Click **Import.** The **Import settings** page is displayed.
3. Complete the steps to import data. See [Import data from a spreadsheet](/tools/import/import-data-from-a-spreadsheet).


# Import data from a spreadsheet

You can import data from an external spreadsheet to add or update records in your system. This process enables you to handle large data sets while ensuring that the data is accurate and consistent

## **Ensure data consistency**

Before you import asset data, complete the following tasks to ensure data consistency:

* Ensure that the spreadsheet includes all required collection fields.
* For all fields in the spreadsheet
  * Ensure the data structures match the required formats.
  * Ensure the field types are set properly (for example, numbers for numeric fields and text for text fields).
* For the **Attachments** field, you can import attachment files using their file URL. You can list multiple files, separated by commas, in the spreadsheet cell.
* Add any new custom fields to the collection that exist in the spreadsheet.
* Populate any supporting collection data (for example, employees, departments, or categories). For example, if your spreadsheet includes **Assigned To**, ensure that the listed employees already exist in the system.&#x20;
* Review the spreadsheet and remove any invalid or incomplete values to avoid errors.

For additional notes on formatting the external spreadsheet to ensure a successful import, see [Import spreadsheet notes](/tools/import/import-spreadsheet-notes).

***

## Import data <a href="#importing-new-data" id="importing-new-data"></a>

1. Prepare the Excel spreadsheet that contains the data to be imported. See [Ensure data consistency](#ensure-data-consistency).
2. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
3. Select the collection for which you want to import data (for example, **Assets**).
4. Click the drop-down arrow next to **Add** and then select **Import spreadsheet**. The **Import Settings** page is displayed.
5. Select whether to **Create Records** or **Update Records**.
6. If you chose to create records, click **Continue**. The **Update a File** page is displayed.
7. If you chose to update records:
   1. Select a **Template** option:
      * **No template**:  Import data without using a template.
      * **New template**: Create a new template using the steps of this import.
      * **Existing template**: Use the settings from a previously saved import template during this import.

   2. If you are using a template, enter the name of the import template.

   3. Click **Continue**. The **Update import settings** page is displayed.

   4. Under **Check for duplicates to update based on these fields**, select the fields that can be used to identify unique records to be updated.

      <div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="info" class="hint hint-info"><ul><li>Selecting multiple fields to identify unique records may slow the import performance. </li><li>If the identifier matches more than one record, the row will fail.</li></ul></div>

   5. Under **Field(s) to update**, select the fields to update for each matching record.

      <div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="info" class="hint hint-info"><ul><li>Only the fields you select will be modified. Other fields remain unchanged. </li><li>System fields, email fields (on user records), and auto-increment fields cannot be updated via import.</li></ul></div>

   6. Select **Save & continue.** The **Update a File** page is displayed.
8. Click in the main area of the page and then select the CSV (.csv) or Excel (.xlsx) file to upload.

{% hint style="info" %}
To download an Excel template for new record data, click **Download Excel template**. You can then edit the template file in Excel before selecting the file in this step.
{% endhint %}

9. If the import file contains multiple worksheets, select the worksheet in the file to import, then click **Confirm**. The **Select header row** page is displayed.
10. Select the row that includes the header information, and then click **Next**. The **Map Columns** page is displayed.
11. Map each spreadsheet column to the appropriate field under **Asset Panda Fields**. Fields with the same name are mapped by default.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
You can click **Suggest mappings** to have the application recommend mappings based on column names.
{% endhint %}

12. Click **Next**. The **Review & Finalize** page is displayed. Rows with issues are highlighted in red.
13. Use one of the following methods to correct rows with issues:
    * To correct individual cells, double-click the cell and update the value.
    * To find and replace values in cells:
      1. Click **Find and replace**.
      2. Select an option to specify whether to update values in all columns or in a specific column.
      3. Enter the incorrect **Find** value to be replaced or select **All empty cells** to replace the value for any cell that is missing data.
      4. To make the text search case-sensitive (a≠A), select **Case Sensitive**.
      5. To only update cells that contain only the **Find** value, select **Exactly match the entire cell**.
      6. For **Replace with**, enter the correct text to be added to the selected cells.
      7. Click **Replace all**.
    * To delete all rows with errors, select **Delete all rows with errors**.
    * To download the error file and correct issues in the spreadsheet externally, select **Export** and then select an export option.

{% hint style="info" %}
If some rows have formatting issues, the system will still import the remaining valid rows. You can download an error file afterward to review and fix any rows that failed.
{% endhint %}

14. Click **Import**. The data is imported and records created or updated as selected.

{% hint style="info" %}
A message is displayed if errors exist in the import process. You can click **Export** to download the error file with highlighted issues. You can then fix the errors in the spreadsheet and reimport the corrected file.
{% endhint %}


# Import spreadsheet notes

This topic explains how to format your spreadsheet data so it imports correctly into Asset Panda Pro. Before importing, confirm that the values in your spreadsheet match the formats described here for each field type. Most import errors are caused by formatting mismatches.

***

## Formatting notes

* **Supported file types:** CSV (.csv) and Excel (.xlsx)
* **Header row:** Your spreadsheet must include a header row with column names that match the field names in your collection. You can choose which row (1–10) contains your headers during the import process.
* **Required fields:** Any field marked as required in your collection must be included in your spreadsheet and have a value in every row.
* **System fields:** System-generated fields (such as Created Date or Modified Date) cannot be updated through imports.

***

## Date & Time fields

Date fields are one of the most common sources of data import errors. To avoid issues, your spreadsheet dates must match the **Date format** configured for the field in your collection.

To check your field's date format, access the field's settings and review the **Date format** setting.

### Supported date formats

| Asset Panda Pro Date format | Spreadsheet Format                         | Example                                      |
| --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------- |
| MM-DD-YYYY                  | <p>MM/DD/YYYY<br>MM/D/YYYY<br>M/D/YYYY</p> | <p>03/15/2024<br>02/5/2025<br>3/15/2026</p>  |
| MM-DD-YYYY                  | <p>MM-DD-YYYY<br>MM-D-YYYY<br>M-D-YYYY</p> | <p>03-15-2024<br>02-5-2025<br>3-15-2026</p>  |
| DD-MM-YYYY                  | <p>DD/MM/YYYY<br>D/MM/YYYY<br>D/M/YYYY</p> | <p>15/03/2024<br>5/02/2025<br>15/3/2026</p>  |
| DD-MM-YYYY                  | <p>DD-MM-YYYY<br>D-MM-YYYY<br>D-M-YYYY</p> | <p>15-03/-2024<br>5-02-2025<br>15-3-2026</p> |

{% hint style="info" %}

* If your spreadsheet does not support a listed date format, you can format the cells at Text in the spreadsheet and enter the date in a supported format.
* If your field expects MM-DD-YYYY but your spreadsheet has DD-MM-YYYY, the values may be swapped. For example, 03/05/2024 could be read as May 3rd instead of March 5th during the import.
  {% endhint %}

### Input types

Based on the date field's **Input type**, you may need to provide a date, a time, or both:

* **Date only**: Enter only the date in the format configured on the field. For example:  `03/15/2024`
* **Date & Time**: You **must** enter both the date and the time (in 12-hour format with AM/PM). For example: `03/15/2024 02:30:00 PM`
* **Time only**: Enter the time in 12-hour format (with AM/PM) or 24-hour format. For example:  `02:30:00 PM` or `14:30:00`

{% hint style="info" %}
The import uses the timezone from your user profile to process dates. Make sure your profile timezone is set correctly before importing, especially if your spreadsheet contains times.
{% endhint %}

***

## Currency fields

Currency values should be entered as numbers. You can optionally include a currency symbol at the beginning.

#### Accepted formats

| Format             | Example                        | Valid? |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------ | ------ |
| Plain number       | `1234.56`                      | Yes    |
| With symbol        | `$1,234.56` / `£100` / `€0.99` | Yes    |
| Negative value     | `-$50.25`                      | Yes    |
| Text currency code | `USD 100`                      | **No** |
| Trailing text      | `1,234.56 USD`                 | **No** |

#### Currency rules

* **Currency symbols only**: You can use symbols, such as  `$`, `£`, `€`, `¥`, or `₹`. Text codes (for example, USD or GBP) are not supported.
* **Thousands separators**:  Commas can be used to groups of three digits (for example, `1,234,567`). Spaces or periods are not supported.
* **Decimal separators**: Period (.) is the only supported decimal separator.

***

## Phone number fields

Phone numbers can be entered in several common formats.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you are using the native CSV import (not OneSchema), phone numbers are accepted in any format.
{% endhint %}

| Format             | Example         |
| ------------------ | --------------- |
| Digits only        | `5551234567`    |
| With dashes        | `555-123-4567`  |
| With dots          | `555.123.4567`  |
| With parentheses   | `(555)123-4567` |
| With plus sign     | `+5551234567`   |
| With country codes | `+15551234567`  |

{% hint style="warning" %}
You should avoid spaces between digit groups (for example, `555 123 4567`) or full contry codes with spaces (for example, `+1 555 123 4567`).
{% endhint %}

***

## Pull From fields (Parent/Child Relationships)

Pull From fields link records in your collection to records in another collection or category. Issues can occur when importing into these fields.

### Pull From field types

When you configure a **Pull from another collection** field, two types of fields are created:

* **Primary (parent) field**: The main lookup field that contains the value the system uses to find the matching record in the related collection.
* **Secondary (child) fields**: The additional fields that automatically populate with data from the matched record. You do not need to enter these values manually because they are populated after the primary field finds a match.

### Import rules for Pull From fields

* **The primary (parent) field is required when importing secondary data.** \
  If you include any secondary (child) fields in your spreadsheet, the primary field must also exist and be filled. The system needs the primary field to identify the related record to look up.
* **You can import the primary field by itself.**\
  If you include only the primary field in your spreadsheet (and exclude the secondary fields), the system will look up the matching record and automatically populate all secondary fields after the import.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
This approach is recommended for most imports.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

* **If you include secondary fields, their values narrow the search.** When both primary and secondary fields are included in the spreadsheet, the import searches for a record in the related collection that matches ALL of the values exactly before updating the record.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can leave secondary field cells blank to avoid having to include them as matches.
{% endhint %}

* **The import lookup must find exactly one matching record. Otherwise, an error is logged:**
  * No match is found: *"pull from collection value does not match with any record"*
  * More than one match is found: *"pull from collection value match with more than one record"*

{% hint style="info" %}
Exact matches are required, so ensure that capitalization, spacing, and punctuation is formatted accurately.
{% endhint %}

* **For category references, the value must match the category name exactly.** \
  If the primary field refers to a category and the value in your spreadsheet does not match any Category value, an error is logged: *"Mapped value does not exist"*

***

## Field types

| Field Type               | How to Format                                                                                                                                                | Example                        |
| ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------ |
| **Text**                 | Any text value (up to 256 characters)                                                                                                                        | `Laptop Model X`               |
| **Long Text**            | Any text value (unlimited length)                                                                                                                            | `Detailed description here...` |
| **Numeric**              | Plain numbers (decimals allowed)                                                                                                                             | `1234.56` or `-42`             |
| **Percent**              | Number with optional % symbol                                                                                                                                | `75` or `75%`                  |
| **Currency**             | Number with optional currency symbol. See [Currency fields](#currency-fields).                                                                               | `$1,234.56`                    |
| **Date & Time**          | See [Date & Time fields](#date-and-time-fields).                                                                                                             | `03/15/2024 02:30:00 PM`       |
| **Email**                | Standard email address                                                                                                                                       | `user@example.com`             |
| **Phone**                | See [Phone number fields](#phone-number-fields).                                                                                                             | `555-123-4567`                 |
| **URL**                  | Full web address                                                                                                                                             | `https://www.example.com`      |
| **Address**              | <p>Single line of text, with commas between street, city, and state (no comma after state)<br><br>Separate columns are not supported for city/state/zip.</p> | `123 Main St, City, ST 12345`  |
| **GPS Coordinates**      | <p>Latitude and longitude separated by a comma (for example, <code>33.4484,-112.0740</code>) <br>Latitude: -90 to 90</p><p>Longitude: -180 to 180.</p>       | `33.4484,-112.0740`            |
| **Single Select List**   | <p>Text that exactly matches one of the predefined options.<br><br>New options are not created during import.</p>                                            | `Active`                       |
| **Multiple Select List** | <p>Options separated by the pipe character (do not use commas). <br><br>Spaces around the pipe are trimmed automatically.</p>                                | `Option A\|Option B\|Option C` |
| **IP Address**           | Standard IPv4 or IPv6 format                                                                                                                                 | `192.168.1.1`                  |
| **Auto-Increment**       | Cannot be updated via import (auto-generated)                                                                                                                | —                              |
| **Link to User**         | Email address of an existing, active user. The email search is not case sensitive.                                                                           | `john@company.com`             |

***

## Common import errors

| Error Message                                                            | What It Means                                                                                   | How to Fix                                                                                                                        |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| *"Invalid date format. Please use the format \[format] for this column"* | The date in your spreadsheet doesn't match the format configured on the field.                  | Check the field's **Date format** setting and adjust your spreadsheet to match.                                                   |
| *"Primary field: \[name] is not mapped"*                                 | You included a secondary (child) Pull From field but didn't map the primary (parent) field.     | Add the primary field column to your spreadsheet, or remove the secondary field columns.                                          |
| *"pull from collection value does not match with any record"*            | The value you entered for a Pull From field doesn't match any record in the related collection. | Verify the value exists in the related collection. Check for typos, extra spaces, or capitalization differences.                  |
| *"pull from collection value match with more than one record"*           | Multiple records in the related collection match your Pull From value.                          | Add more specific secondary field values to narrow the search, or make the primary field values unique in the related collection. |
| *"Mapped value does not exist"*                                          | A category reference value doesn't match any existing category.                                 | Check that the category name is spelled exactly as it appears in the system.                                                      |
| *"Multiple records found matching field"*                                | During an update import, the identifier field matched more than one existing record.            | Use a more unique identifier field, or clean up duplicate values in your collection.                                              |
| *"No records matching duplicate field(s) found"*                         | During an update import, no existing record was found matching the identifier field value.      | Verify the identifier value exists in the collection. It must be an exact match.                                                  |
| *"No user found"*                                                        | A Link to User field value doesn't match any active user's email address.                       | Check that the email address belongs to an active (non-deleted) user in the module.                                               |


# Attachments

Global, Record Level, Multiple, Forms, Tables, Gallery

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Attachments in the app](https://assetpanda.app/tools/attachments)

When the Attachments feature is enabled, users can upload, manage, and view files associated with records across the platform. Attachments can be accessed globally, at the individual record level, or for specific fields, with permissions and visibility enforced based on user roles and access to records.

## Supported attachment file types

For field-based attachments, you can specify the type of files that can be uploaded:

* Image: jpg, jpeg, gif, png, heic, heif, webp, avif
* Document: doc, docx, pdf, xls, xlsx, txt, zip, csv
* Video: mp4, qt, asx, mov, swf, asf, wmv, swt, 3gp, mn, viv, 3g2, mpg, vivo, dvx, vob, mpeg, fly&#x20;
* Audio: mp3, wav, wma, ogg, aac, 3gp, m4a

From the **Attachments** tab for the record, you can attach files of any type to the record.

***

## View attachments (Global view)

The Attachments view displays all files across the organization that the user has permission to access based on their role:

* Organization admin: All files across all accounts and modules in the organization.
* Account/Module admin: Files tied to their scope
* Collaborator: Files in assigned modules
* Custom Role: Files per record access limits
* Multi-role: Union of all accessible records

Users can filter the list based on a specific account, module, collection, or field value. They can preview some file types and can download or delete files.&#x20;

1. In the navigation pane, select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Attachments**.&#x20;
2. To filter the list of attachments:
   1. Click **Filter** <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i>. The **Filter by** page is displayed.
   2. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and/or **Collection** for which you want to review attachments.&#x20;
   3. To filter the list based on specific records:
      1. Select the **Field name** to filter the collection records.
      2. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
      3. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field.
      4. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps i-iii.
      5. If multiple conditions are specified, select whether **All** or **Any** of the conditions must be met to display the attachment.
   4. Click **Apply**.
3. To sort the attachments in the list:
   1. Click **Sort by** ![Sort by icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F3b0im2zKDXRVX1jXtygJ%2FSort%20by.png?alt=media\&token=e8ca3268-4c4e-4fb2-975c-0ef31647c36f). The **Sort by** pane is displayed.
   2. Select the **Sorting field**. You can sort by file type, date added, or file name.
   3. For **Value**, select whether to display attachments in ascending or descending order.
   4. To specify multiple sort levels, click **Add more** and then repeat steps a-c.
   5. Click **Apply**.
4. To download an attachment, select the check box in the upper-left corner of the attachment and then click **Download**.&#x20;
5. To delete an attachment, select the check box in the upper-left corner of the attachment, click **Delete**, and then click **Delete** in the confirmation message.

{% hint style="info" %}

* You can delete an attachment only if you have edit access on all records linked to the attachment.
* Attachments deleted from one record remain in others unless they are unlinked everywhere.
  {% endhint %}

***

## View attachments (record view)

You can view the attachments associated with an individual asset record.

1. Navigate to the collection that contains the record. See [Manage collections](/settings/account-management/collections).
2. Click the record to be reviewed. The details pane is displayed.
3. Click **View full details**.
4. Select the **Attachments** tab. All attachments associated with the record are displayed.

***

## Configure attachment fields

You can configure collection fields to support the upload of an attachment, such as an asset image.&#x20;

1. Navigate to the collection or form that will contain the field. See [Manage collection](/settings/account-management/collections) or [Manage forms](/settings/account-management/forms).
2. When [adding the collection or form field](/settings/account-management/fields#adding-new-fields), select **Attachment** for **Data type**.
3. To control the number of attachments that can be uploaded for a record, enter the **Maximum attachments allowed**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
If this field is not specified, there is no limit to the number of attachments that can be uploaded.
{% endhint %}

3. For **File type allowed**, select the types of files that can be uploaded for the record.
4. If image files are enabled and should be used as the record image, select **Set this attachment as the default record image**.
5. Click **Save**.

***

## Upload an attachment (Global view)

You can upload attachments to enable files to be attached to records at a later date.

1. In the navigation pane, select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Attachments**.&#x20;
2. Select **Upload**  <i class="fa-arrow-up-from-bracket">:arrow-up-from-bracket:</i>.
3. Select the file to upload as an attachment.
4. Click **Open**.

***

## Add attachments to a record

{% hint style="info" %}
Only users with Organization admin, Account admin, Module admin, or a custom role that supports the creation of attachments can add attachments to records.
{% endhint %}

### Add from a field

1. Navigate to the collection that contains the field. See [Manage collections](/settings/account-management/collections).
2. Click the record to be updated. The details pane is displayed.
3. For the attachment field:
   1. To upload a new attachment file, select **Upload** and then select the file to upload.
   2. To attach an existing file that was previously uploaded, select **Gallery**, select the file to attach, then click **Attach**.
4. Click **Save**. The attachment is saved to the record. Images are displayed visually and other file types are displayed as links.

{% hint style="info" %}
When multiple files are supported and uploaded, "Multiple" is displayed for the field. You can view the full details for the record to see the list of files.
{% endhint %}

### Add from the record details view

You can use the full details view of a record to review its attachments and add new attachments.

1. Navigate to the collection that contains the record. See [Manage collections](/settings/account-management/collections).
2. Click the record to be updated. The details pane is displayed.
3. Click **View full details**.
4. Select the **Attachments** tab. All attachments associated with the record are displayed.
5. To upload a new attachment file, select **Upload** and then select the file to upload.
6. To attach an existing file that was previously uploaded, select **Gallery**, select the file to attach, then click **Attach**.
7. To delete an attachment, select it, click <i class="fa-trash" style="color:$danger;">:trash:</i>, and then click **Delete**.&#x20;
8. Click **Save changes**.


# Barcode Generator

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit the Barcode generator in the app](https://assetpanda.app/tools/barcode-generator)

You can use barcodes to store unique values that can be printed and attached to each asset.&#x20;

When activated in your Asset Panda Pro environment, the Barcode Generator enables you to generate barcodes using fields or auto-incremented values. You can design and save barcode templates that match your physical labels and label sheets.

You can print individual labels, groups of labels, or full sheets based on your business needs. The barcodes can be scanned in the mobile app for faster searching, asset tracking, auditing, and updates.&#x20;

{% embed url="<https://files.gitbook.com/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FUu4cjnyQbKvxlmR8IplS%2Fuploads%2FZ2jxrdvTegAFVSnOELA9%2FQS_-_Barcode_Generation.mp4?alt=media&token=93515714-c955-4872-a431-33400c1f3029>" %}

{% hint style="info" %}
For more information on accessing this feature, contact <support@assetpanda.com>. &#x20;
{% endhint %}

***

## Prepare your data

For best results, your collection should have at least one field with data that is unique for each asset:

* **Barcode** field
* **ID** field&#x20;
* **Numeric** **auto-increment** field (often used as an asset number)
* **Text** field
* **Numeric** field

### Create a dedicated Barcode field

We recommend adding a dedicated **Barcode** field to any collection where you plan to use barcodes. This improves mobile barcode scanning performance by ensuring each asset's barcode is unique. It also makes it clear which value is used for physical labels.

1. Go to the appropriate collection page. For example, click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the **Assets** collection.
2. Perform one of the following tasks:

   * Hover over a column heading, select ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png), and then select **Add field to left** or **Add field to right**.

     ***Tip:** For example, you could add the field to the left of the first column so it is easily accessible.*
   * After the last column in the page, select  <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/ebvke6chrkB0bcUZRrDH/field-plus-icon.png" alt="" data-size="line">.

   The **New field** pane is displayed.
3. Enter the **Field name** (for example, Asset Barcode or Equipment Tag).
4. For **Data type**, select **Barcode**.
5. Keep **Set as unique field** selected so each record has its own barcode.
6. Select **Save**. The field is added to the collection.

#### Update a Barcode field

After you create a dedicated Barcode field, you can enter individual values for assets.

1. Go to the appropriate collection page.
2. Select the asset row. The asset details are displayed.
3. Add the unique value to the **Barcode** field.
4. Select **Save**.

### Use ID or auto‑increment fields

If you already rely on a system **ID** or **auto‑increment** field (such as an asset number), you can use that field's values instead of a separate **Barcode** field. In this setup, the barcode encodes the value from that field. Scanning the barcode on mobile searches the specified field and opens the matching record.

You can also use a **Barcode** field in some collections and use ID or auto‑increment fields in others.

***

## Design barcode templates

The Barcode Generator enables you to build barcode templates for different needs. For example:

* Large barcodes for warehouse environments
* Small labels with text for office equipment
* Templates with or without logos or images

You can design sheets to arrange labels on the page based on your label stock (for example, Avery‑style sheets). You can define the appearance of each label, including elements such as the barcode, text, fields, and images. You can save these layouts as templates to reuse for future print jobs.

1. In the web navigation, select <i class="fa-wrench">:wrench:</i> **Tools** > <i class="fa-qrcode-read">:qrcode-read:</i> **Barcode generator**.
2. Click **Add**. The **Barcode setup** page is displayed.
3. Select how barcodes will be generated for this template:
   * **Generate from Field**: Use values from an existing collection field (Barcode, ID, or auto‑increment) in each label.
   * **Auto‑generate**: Create a sequence of barcodes based on a starting value.
4. For field-generated labels, select the **Account**, **Module**, and **Collection** to associate with the barcode template. Fields for the selected collection are available to the label.
5. Select **Continue**. The **Barcode generator** page is displayed.

### Design the label sheet

The **Sheet** tab controls how labels are arranged on each page so they align with your label stock.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
***Tips:***&#x20;

* *Whenever possible, you should start from a **preconfigured label type** that matches your label stock.*
* *When designing label sheets, always test print on plain paper and compare against your label sheet before printing on labels.*
  {% endhint %}

#### **Use a Preconfigured Label Type (Recommended)**

1. For **Label type**, select a known template (for example, an Avery‑style layout). The system automatically sets the page configuration to ensure labels align correctly:
   * **Page** size (Letter, A4)
   * Number of **rows** and **columns**
   * **Margins** (top/bottom and left/right)
   * **Row** and **column gutters** (space between labels)
2. To change the measurement units displayed for settings, select a different option for **Measurement unit**.

#### **Define a Custom Label Sheet**

If your label stock isn’t covered by a preconfigured label type, you can configure a custom sheet manually.

1. For **Label type**, select **Custom**.
2. Enter the details of the label sheet:

   * **Measurement unit** (inches or millimeters)
   * Sheet **Height** and **Length** (width)
     * Lette&#x72;**: Height** = 11 inches, **Length** = 8.5 inches
     * A4: **Height** = 297 mm, **Length** = 210 mm
   * **Rows** on the sheet
   * **Columns** on the sheet
   * **Row gutter** (vertical space between label rows)
   * **Column gutter** (horizontal space between label columns)
   * **Margins (top/bottom)**
   * **Margins (left/right)**

   The system calculates the label size based on the specified settings.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
***Tips:***&#x20;

* *Use the dimensions from your label package or manufacturer specifications, if available.*
* *If specifications are not available, measure margins and gutters carefully.*
* *To change the label size, adjust the label page details.*
* *You can select **Reset sheet design** to discard the settings and revert to the default sheet settings.*
  {% endhint %}

***

### Design the label layout

The **Label** tab controls the appearance of each label, which can include the barcode and additional images, text strings, or field values. The layout is used for all labels on the sheet for a print job.

#### **Configure the barcode**

1. Select the barcode on the label.
2. Select a **Barcode type**:
   * Code 128
   * Code 128 with data: Displays the field value below the code.
   * QR code
3. For field-generated labels, select the **Field** to be used for the barcode.
4. For auto-generated labels, enter the **Start Value** for the label numbering and identify the number of **Leading zeros** to be displayed for each label.
5. To include static text before the field or auto-generated value, enter the **Prefix** text.

#### **Add an image**

You can add an image, such as a company logo or safety icon, to every label:

1. Select **Image** above the label view. An image block is added to the label.
2. In the field settings, click **Upload** to select the image to be added.
3. Select an option to fit the image within the bounding box:
   * **Fill**: Fill the bounding box (may crop the image)
   * **Fit**: Fit the image inside the bounding box while maintaining the aspect ratio

#### **Add static text**

&#x20;You can add text to each label, such a a title above the barcode and a note below it.

1. Select **Text** above the label view. A text block is added to the label.
2. Edit the **Text** to display in the label.
3. Edit the **Font**, **Font size**, **Color**, and font styles (**Bold** or **Italic**).&#x20;

#### **Add dynamic field values**

For field-generated labels, you can add field values, such as the asset name or serial number, to each label. You can add multiple fields to meet your needs.

1. Select **Field** above the label view. A field block is added to the label.\
   **Note**: If a field is empty for a specific record, that area is blank on the record’s label.
2. Edit the **Collection field** to display in the field block.
3. Edit the **Font**, **Font size**, **Color**, and font styles (**Bold** or **Italic**).&#x20;

#### **Adjust the label appearance**

1. To adjust the size of each barcode block:
   * Drag the corners of the barcode on the canvas
   * Select the block and then enter the appropriate **width** and **height** measurements. Values represent a percentage of the label dimensions.&#x20;
2. To adjust the location of blocks on the barcode, select the block in the label and then drag it to the appropriate location within the label.
3. To remove a barcode block, select it within the label and then click <i class="fa-trash">:trash:</i> above the block settings.

### **Preview the label sheet**

**Note**: The preview uses sample data to show layout only; it doesn’t display actual data.

1. Select the **Preview** tab.
2. Review the sample sheet to confirm that the barcode and any text or images are readable.

### **Save the barcode template**

1. Click **Save**. The **Save template** page is displayed.
2. Enter the **Template name** and then click **Save**. The template is displayed in the barcode template list.

***

## Generate barcodes

You can generate sheet of barcodes for selected records. You can also generate a single barcode when one becomes unreadable on an asset.

### Generate field-based collection barcodes

{% hint style="info" %}
***Tip:** Generating barcodes is limited to visible records. Selecting many records at once generates barcodes only for the records that are currently loaded. To include more records, scroll down to load additional records before selecting them.*&#x20;
{% endhint %}

1. Go to the appropriate collection page. For example, click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the **Assets** collection.
2. Select the records for which you want to generate barcodes.\
   ***Note**: For large collections, scroll down to load all records before selecting and generating barcodes.*&#x20;
3. Click **Barcode** <i class="fa-qrcode-read">:qrcode-read:</i>. The **Generate Barcodes** page is displayed.
4. If barcode templates do not exist for the collection:
   1. Click **Create a template**. The Barcode generator page is displayed.
   2. Click **Add** to create the template. See [#design-barcode-sheets-and-labels](#design-barcode-sheets-and-labels "mention").
   3. Select the new barcode template and click **Generate** to return to the associated collection and repeat this procedure.
5. If barcode templates exist for the collection:
   1. Select the appropriate **Barcode template**.
   2. If you’re using a partially-used label sheet, enter the number of the label from which you want to start printing. The preview indicates the labels that will be used on the label sheet.
   3. Click **Generate**. A popup indicates when the label export has finished.
6. Click **Download Link** to download the generated label print job in PDF format. You can open the PDF file to print it.

### Generate auto-generated barcodes

You can generate sequences of barcodes that are not tied to existing records; for example, to pre-print asset tags.

1. In the web navigation, select <i class="fa-wrench">:wrench:</i> **Tools** > <i class="fa-qrcode-read">:qrcode-read:</i> **Barcode generator**.
2. Create or select an **Auto generate** template.
3. Click **Generate**. The **Generate Barcodes** page is displayed.
4. For **How many barcodes?**, enter the number of bar codes that you want to create.
5. For **Row start position**, enter the number of the row where you want printing to begin. For example, to begin printing four rows down, enter **4**.\
   **Note**: This is not the individual label number displayed in the **Barcode print generation preview**.
6. For **Column start position**, enter the number of the row where you want printing to begin. For example, for the right-most column in a three-column sheet, enter **3**.
7. Click **Generate**. A popup indicates when the label export has finished.
8. Click **Download Link** to download the generated label print job in PDF format. You can open the PDF file to print it.

***

## Print barcodes

1. Open the generated PDF (or other output) in your browser or PDF viewer.
2. In the print dialog:
   * Set scale to **100%** or **Actual size**.
   * Avoid **Fit to page** if it shifts alignment.
3. Print a **test page** on plain paper.
4. Hold the test page against your label sheet to confirm everything lines up.
5. When alignment is verified, print on your label sheets.

***

## Scan barcodes in the mobile app

1. You can scan barcodes in the mobile app to quickly make audits, check‑outs, and day‑to‑day updates.
2. Attach or apply labels to your physical assets.
3. Open the **Asset Panda mobile app**.
4. Navigate to the relevant module/collection.
5. Use the **Scan** (barcode) option.
6. Scan a barcode. The app searches the appropriate field (Barcode, ID, or auto‑increment) and then opens the appropriate record so you can view or update it.


# Calendar (Reservations)

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit the Calendar in the app](https://assetpanda.app/calendar)

You can create calendars for collections to track reservations and other events associated with **Date** or **Date & time** fields in the collection. You can select the date fields to be displayed and a separate field to control the data displayed for events in the calendar.

You can configure access to reservation functionality separately for each collection, and you can limit which users can reserve, check out, and check in assets.

## **Reservations** <a href="#id-1.-overview" id="id-1.-overview"></a>

When Reservations are enabled for a collection, forms are added to enable users to reserve, check out, and check in assets within the collection over defined time periods. The reservations can be viewed and managed from the Calendar view.

### Enable Reservations for a collection

To allow users to reserve and check out assets, you must enable the Reservations feature for the collection.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
2. Click **Manage** in the **Collections** tile.
3. Select the **Reservations** toggle. Reservation-related forms are added to the module.
   * **Reserve - <*****Collection*****>**: Specifies information to create a new reservation.&#x20;
   * **Check Out - <*****Collection*****>**: Specifies information collected when an asset is picked up.&#x20;
   * **Check In - <*****Collection*****>**: Specifies information collected when an asset is dropped off.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Once Reservations is enabled within a collection, admins have access to the functionality by default. You can define whether users with custom roles and permissions have access to the functionality. See [Create a custom role](/settings/roles-and-permissions#create-custom-permissions).
{% endhint %}

4. To configure the reservation settings:
   1. Click **Manage** next to the **Reservations** toggle.
   2. To enable reservations to be added on dates in the past, select **Past reservations**.
   3. Click **Save Settings**.

### Configure Reservation fields

When the Reservations feature enabled for a collection, the following fields are used:

* **Reservation Name**: The name or identifier of the reservation.
* **Reserved For**: The user for which the asset is reserved.
* **Reservation Start**: The date and time when the reservation starts.
* **Reservation End**: The date and time when the reservation starts.
* **Reservation Status**: Tracks the flow of the asset through the following statuses:

  * `Reserved`
  * `Checked Out`
  * `Checked In`
  * `Overdue` based on dates and statuses

  In the calendar view, these values can be color-coded to make them easier to distinguish.

### Configure Reservations forms

You can configure the forms to control the options available when reserving assets.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
2. Click **Manage** in the **Collections** tile.
3. Click **Manage** next to the **Reservations** toggle, and then select the form to configure (**Reserve**, **Check Out**, or **Check In**).
4. Configure the Reserve form:
   1. To default the reservation identifier to a specific field, select the **Reservation** **field** to contain the reservation information.
   2. To add additional fields required for the reservation (for example, location, project code, reason for use), click **Add** and configure the form field. See [Form build](/settings/account-management/forms/forms-that-create-records#form-build).
   3. Select **2. Record selection**.
   4. To filter the records available for reservations:
      1. Click **Filter** <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i>. The **Filter by** page is displayed.
      2. Select the **Field name** to filter the collection records.
      3. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
      4. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field.
      5. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps ii-iv.
      6. If multiple conditions are specified, select an option to determine whether **All** or **Any** of the conditions must be met to enable the record's changes to be displayed.
      7. Click **Apply**.
   5. To specify the fields to display for records, click **Manage fields** ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FLnMn2wsO7Q3ARYB32TUW%2FManage%20Fields.png?alt=media\&token=2b62f5fd-c745-47eb-8d46-30bd5527895e) and then click **Hide field** ![Hide field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88) to hide a field.
   6. Click **Save changes**.&#x20;
5. Configure the Check Out or Check In form:
   1. To add additional fields required for checking out or checking in the record, click **Add** and configure the form field. See [Form build](/settings/account-management/forms/forms-that-create-records#form-build).
   2. Click **Save changes**.&#x20;

***

## **Create a collection calendar** <a href="#id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships" id="id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships"></a>

You can create a custom calendar to track events associated with a configured Date field.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FDjTI9Zv57W6GTUKtuP6I%2FCalendar2.png?alt=media&amp;token=42aec6b3-06b4-4c23-bc18-e08cfad6251a" alt="Calendar icon" data-size="line"> **Calendar**.
2. Click **Add calendar**. The **Add calendar** page is displayed.
3. Select **Collection**.
4. Enter the **Calendar name**.
5. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and **Collection** you want to associate with the calendar.
6. Select the **Date field** for which you want to display events in the calendar.
7. Select the **Display field** that you want to display in the calendar for the event.
8. Click **Add calendar**.

***

## **Create a reservations calendar** <a href="#id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships" id="id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships"></a>

You can create a reservations calendar to track when assets are reserved by users.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FDjTI9Zv57W6GTUKtuP6I%2FCalendar2.png?alt=media&amp;token=42aec6b3-06b4-4c23-bc18-e08cfad6251a" alt="Calendar icon" data-size="line"> **Calendar**.
2. Click **Add calendar**. The **Add calendar** page is displayed.
3. Select **Reservations**.
4. Enter the **Calendar name**. For best results, name the calendar in a way that identifies the collection whose assets are being reserved.&#x20;
5. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and **Collection** you want to associate with the calendar.
6. For **Reservations made by**, select whether to display reservation events for all users or the current user only.
7. Click **Add calendar**.

***

## View a calendar

You can adjust the collection or reservations calendar view to make it easier to location activities.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FDjTI9Zv57W6GTUKtuP6I%2FCalendar2.png?alt=media&amp;token=42aec6b3-06b4-4c23-bc18-e08cfad6251a" alt="Calendar icon" data-size="line"> **Calendar**.
2. Click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i> to expand **Collection** or **Reservations** and then select the calendar for the appropriate collection. The month calendar is displayed along with the calendar navigation pane (left side) and events pane (right side).
3. Use the following options to adjust the view:
   * To change the month displayed, click the Month Year drop-down above the calendar navigation pane and then select the month. Click <i class="fa-arrow-up">:arrow-up:</i> and <i class="fa-arrow-down">:arrow-down:</i> in the drop-down view to move between years on the calendar.
   * To change between day, week, and month views on the calendar, select the appropriate option from the drop-down list.
   * In the month view, if additional reservations are hidden from view, click the **more** link to display the day view with all reservations visible.
   * To collapse the calendar navigation pane or events pane, click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F5Czwg90yqSdOH7hhCWgE%2FCollapse%20Pane.png?alt=media\&token=1bb29d37-3ede-467d-9b5d-16f7e01d7c03). Click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F5Czwg90yqSdOH7hhCWgE%2FCollapse%20Pane.png?alt=media\&token=1bb29d37-3ede-467d-9b5d-16f7e01d7c03) again to show the pane. &#x20;
   * To filter the calendar based on a search value, enter it in the Search field and then press **Enter**.&#x20;
   * To filter the calendar view using a more complex filter, click <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i> and then enter the filter criteria.
   * To change between the calendar view and a list view, select **Calendar** or **List** in the header.

{% hint style="info" %}
The list view only displays current collection activities or reservations.
{% endhint %}

4. To view the details of a reservation, click the reservation in the calendar. The **Reservation details** pane is displayed. You can click **View full details** to view all reservation, checkout, and check-in details for the reservation.
5. To view the details for a product in the reservation, click the product under **Reserved assets**. The product details are displayed in a new tab.

***

## Configure the List view

1. [View the calendar](#view-a-calendar).
2. Select **List** from the list in the header.&#x20;
3. Click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FLnMn2wsO7Q3ARYB32TUW%2FManage%20Fields.png?alt=media\&token=2b62f5fd-c745-47eb-8d46-30bd5527895e) to adjust the fields in the list. You can click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and drag to rearrange fields, and you can click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88) to hide fields from view.
4. Click **Save Layout**. The list layout is applied to the Reservations view for all users.

***

## View reservations (record view)

You can view the reservations associated with a record.

1. Navigate to the collection that contains the record. See [Manage collections](/settings/account-management/collections).
2. Click the record to be reviewed. The details pane is displayed.
3. Click **View full details**.
4. Select **More > Reservations**. All reservations associated with the record are displayed.

***

## Reserve an asset

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FDjTI9Zv57W6GTUKtuP6I%2FCalendar2.png?alt=media&amp;token=42aec6b3-06b4-4c23-bc18-e08cfad6251a" alt="Calendar icon" data-size="line"> **Calendar**.
2. Click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i> to expand **Reservations** and then select the reservation calendar for the appropriate collection.
3. Click **Reserve**. The Reserve form is displayed.
4. For **Reservation field**, select the field that identifies the reservation.
5. For **Reserve for**, select the user associated with the reservation.
6. For **Reservation start date** and **Reservation end date**, select the beginning and ending dates of the reservation.
7. Click **Continue**. The **Reservation** page is displayed.
8. Select the check box for each asset, kit, or consumable to include in the reservation.

{% hint style="info" %}
When kits are selected, the system blocks individual kit items from being double-reserved.
{% endhint %}

9. Click **Continue**. The **Summary** page is displayed.
10. If you selected to reserve consumable items, enter the number to reserve in the **Reserved** field.
11. To edit any reservation details, click **Edit** <i class="fa-pen-line" style="color:$primary;">:pen-line:</i>.
12. Click **Reserve**. The reservation is added and can be displayed when you [view the calendar](#view-a-calendar).

***

## Check out an asset

When an asset is reserved, you can check it out to signify the physical pickup of the asset.

1. &#x20;[View the reservations calendar](#view-a-calendar) for the asset you want to check out.
2. In the calendar, click the reservation for which you want to check out assets. The **Reservation details** pane is displayed.
3. If you reserved consumable items, enter the number to check out in the **Reserved** field.
4. Click **Check out**. The Check Out form is displayed.
5. Complete any fields required in the form and then click **Continue**. The Summary page lists all assets associated with the reservation.
6. To remove an asset from the checkout process, click <i class="fa-trash" style="color:red;">:trash:</i> next to the asset.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you remove an asset, you can click **Include** to reinstate it.
{% endhint %}

6. Click **Checkout**. The checkout is displayed in the calendar.

***

## Check in an asset

When an asset is checked out, you can check it in to signify the physical return of the asset.

1. &#x20;[View the reservations calendar](#view-a-calendar) for the asset you want to check in.
2. In the calendar, click the checkout event for which you want to check in assets. The **Reservation details** pane is displayed.
3. If you checked out consumable items, enter the number to check in in the **Reserved** field.
4. Click **Check in**. The Check In form is displayed.
5. Complete any fields required in the form and then click **Continue**. The Summary page lists all assets associated with the reservation.
6. To remove an asset from the check-in process, click <i class="fa-trash" style="color:red;">:trash:</i> next to the asset.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you remove an asset, you can click **Include** to reinstate it.
{% endhint %}

6. Click **Check in**. The check-in is displayed in the calendar.

***

## Edit a calendar

{% hint style="info" %}
Administrator users can edit or delete any calendar in the module. Non-admin users can only edit or delete calendars they created.
{% endhint %}

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FDjTI9Zv57W6GTUKtuP6I%2FCalendar2.png?alt=media&amp;token=42aec6b3-06b4-4c23-bc18-e08cfad6251a" alt="Calendar icon" data-size="line"> **Calendar**.
2. Click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i> to expand **Collection** or **Reservations** and then locate the calendar for the appropriate collection.&#x20;
3. Hover over the calendar name, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>, and then select **Edit**.
4. Edit the details of the calendar. See [Create a collection calendar](#id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships) or [Create a reservations calendar](#id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships-1).
5. Click **Save**.

***

## Delete a calendar

{% hint style="info" %}
Administrator users can edit or delete any calendar in the module. Non-admin users can only edit or delete calendars they created.
{% endhint %}

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FDjTI9Zv57W6GTUKtuP6I%2FCalendar2.png?alt=media&amp;token=42aec6b3-06b4-4c23-bc18-e08cfad6251a" alt="Calendar icon" data-size="line"> **Calendar**.
2. Click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i> to expand **Collection** or **Reservations** and then locate the calendar for the appropriate collection.&#x20;
3. Hover over the calendar name, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>, and then select **Delete**. A confirmation message is displayed.
4. Click **Delete**.


# Reports

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Reports in the app](https://assetpanda.app/reports)

Asset Panda Pro offers robust reporting capabilities designed to meet a variety of organizational needs.&#x20;

* Dashboards provide real-time updates, serving as the pulse point of your assets.&#x20;
* Saved views enable you to filter, sort, group, and export asset data for quick analysis and sharing.&#x20;
* Automations further streamline reporting by enabling administrators to schedule reports at regular intervals, ensuring timely delivery to stakeholders.

With these flexible tools, your organization gains enhanced visibility, optimized asset utilization, and actionable insights to support informed decision-making.

Reports view

The Reports page displays reports saved throughout the application for quick viewing and sharing with others. The following report pages are accessible:

* **Forms**: When you view a form submission log, you can choose to save the report to be shared with others. Those reports are saved in the Forms list.
* **Depreciation**: When you enable Depreciation in an collection, their associated reports are displayed in the Depreciation list.

***

## Export a report

You can export a report to an external PDF, Excel, or CSV file to share the report data with others.

1. Select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FElw4TarNoCtta8wqB1Wl%2FReports.png?alt=media&amp;token=46ec9e46-db79-458b-9278-7b40a206f99f" alt="Reports icon" data-size="line"> **Reports** and then select the category of reports you want to export.
2. Select the report you want to export.
3. Select <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> **Export** and then select the output format (PDF, Excel, or CSV). A popup indicates when the report export has finished.
4. Click **Download Link** to download the exported report.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also click **Notifications** <i class="fa-bell">:bell:</i> and click **Download** in the notification to download the file.
{% endhint %}

***

## Share a report

Organization, account, and module admins have full access to reports. You can choose to share reports with Collaborator users or users with a custom role.

1. Select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FElw4TarNoCtta8wqB1Wl%2FReports.png?alt=media&amp;token=46ec9e46-db79-458b-9278-7b40a206f99f" alt="Reports icon" data-size="line"> **Reports** and then select the category of reports you want to share.
2. Select the check box for the report you want to share.
3. In the right-most column of the report row, click **Share**. The **Share** pane is displayed.
4. To **Share by role**, select the role with which you want to share the report.
5. To **Share with user**, select the active user with whom you want to share the report.

***

## Delete a report

1. Select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FElw4TarNoCtta8wqB1Wl%2FReports.png?alt=media&amp;token=46ec9e46-db79-458b-9278-7b40a206f99f" alt="Reports icon" data-size="line"> **Reports** and then select the category of reports you want to review.
2. Select the check box for the report you want to delete.
3. Click **Delete**. A confirmation message is displayed.
4. Click **Delete**.


# Settings


# Account Management

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Account Management in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/account-management)

Account Management enables you to manage accounts, modules, collections, and system configurations. Customization options are available for visibility, organization, and automation settings, ensuring flexibility and ease of use.

## **Accounts and modules** <a href="#managing-accounts-and-modules" id="managing-accounts-and-modules"></a>

You can use accounts and modules to structure data and user access more efficiently. Accounts and modules can be added, modified, and organized in a hierarchical format.

Changes to accounts and modules apply to all users with module access and persist across sessions.

See [Accounts and modules](/settings/account-management).

## **Collections and fields** <a href="#collections-and-fields" id="collections-and-fields"></a>

Collections and fields define how data is stored and accessed within a module. You can customize the collections and fields in your organization to improve data management and visibility. You can also show or hide collections or fields to control visibility while keeping data stored safely.

See [Collections](/settings/account-management/collections) and [Fields](/settings/account-management/fields).

## **Automations and forms** <a href="#automations-and-forms" id="automations-and-forms"></a>

Automations and forms streamline workflows and data entry processes. Enabling or disabling specific actions helps you manage operations efficiently while retaining previously configured settings.

See [Automations](/settings/account-management/automations) and [Forms](/settings/account-management/forms).

## **Account Management customization** <a href="#navigation-and-customization" id="navigation-and-customization"></a>

You can customize the display of accounts, modules, forms, collections, and fields to ensure an organized and intuitive system configuration.

{% embed url="<https://files.gitbook.com/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FUu4cjnyQbKvxlmR8IplS%2Fuploads%2FZ6TRqegupfloAAhL0dbl%2FAccount_Managment.mp4?alt=media&token=106ca325-7697-46ac-b254-579959b23f78>" %}


# Accounts and modules

## Accounts

Accounts occupy the first sublevel in the organization, and reflect separate entities for larger company divisions or client accounts. Accounts are often used for subsidiaries within an organization or for customer accounts within an Managed Service Provider (MSP). Accounts hold users, permissions, and modules. For smaller organizations, a single account can be used.

See [Org Setup Use Cases](broken://pages/zYBdqbBTlTzgxRukGjkU) for information about determining the number of accounts you need.

## Modules

Modules help you organize different workflows within your account, ensuring a structured approach to managing assets, employees, maintenance, and other key processes. Each module serves as a dedicated space for a specific use case. For example, you can manage separate modules for facilities management and IT equipment tracking. The flexibility of modules enables you to streamline operations, improve clarity, and ensure that users only interact with the information relevant to their roles.

***

## Add an account and module

1. Perform one of the following tasks:

   * In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**, and then click **Add Account**.&#x20;
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="" data-size="line">, click **Add account**, and then click **Manual setup**.

   The **New account** page is displayed.
2. Enter the **Name** of the account.
3. Optionally, enter the **Email**, **First name**, and **Last name** of the user who will be the administrator for the account.
4. Click **Continue**. The **Create a new module** page is displayed.&#x20;
5. Enter the **Module name**.&#x20;
6. Enter the **Main collection name** that will be used to store information for your assets. The new module also includes default collections such as **Location**, **People**, and **Categories**.&#x20;
7. Click **Create**. The main collection page for the new account and module is displayed.

### **Add a module**

You can add modules to an existing account.

1. Perform one of the following tasks:

   * In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**. Click **Add module** for the appropriate account.&#x20;
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="" data-size="line">, select the appropriate account, and then click **Add module**.

   The **Create a new module** page is displayed.
2. Enter the **Module name**.&#x20;
3. Enter the **Main collection name** that will be used to store information for your assets. The new module also includes default collections such as **Location**, **People**, and **Categories**.&#x20;
4. Click **Create**. The main collection page for the new module is displayed.
5. [Invite users to the module](/settings/users#invite-users-to-a-module).

***

## **Edit an account or module name** <a href="#edit-module" id="edit-module"></a>

You can modify an existing account or module to update its name.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Locate the account or module you want to edit.
3. Click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and select **Edit**. The **Edit account** or **Edit module** page is displayed.
4. Enter the new **Account name** or **Module name**.
5. Click **Save**.&#x20;

***

## Duplicate an account or module

If your organization needs to support multiple accounts or modules with similar configurations (modules, fields, forms), you can duplicate existing accounts/modules to streamline the creation of your organization structure.&#x20;

* When you duplicate an account, all modules, collections, fields, and forms are copied.
* When you duplicate a module, all collections and forms are copied.

{% hint style="info" %}
Records, automations, and saved views are not copied to the duplicated accounts or modules.
{% endhint %}

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Locate the account or module you want to duplicate.
3. Click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and select **Duplicate**. The **Duplicating account** or **Duplicating module** page is displayed.
4. Specify the name of the new account or module.
5. When duplicating a module, for **Duplicate to account**, select the account that will contain the new module.
6. Click **Duplicate**. The account/module is added to the organization/account.

***

## **Delete a module**

Modules that are no longer needed can be deleted.

{% hint style="danger" %}
Deleting a module is a permanent action that removes all data within the module. Only administrators with the required permissions can delete modules, ensuring controlled access to this action.&#x20;

Additionally, you must retain at least one module in the account; it is not possible to delete all modules.
{% endhint %}

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Locate the module you want to delete.
3. Click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and select **Delete**. The **Deleting module** page is displayed.
4. Enter the module name to confirm the deletion, and then click **Delete**.

***

## Order accounts and modules <a href="#account-management" id="account-management"></a>

The first listed **Account** and **Module** become the default landing module for all users when entering Asset Panda unless they are restricted by user permissions. If restrictions exist, user land on the first module they can access.

Accounts and modules can be reordered to manage their display for users. &#x20;

1. In the navigation pane, select <i class="fa-gear-complex">:gear-complex:</i> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
2. To expand an account to display its modules, click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i>.
3. Select ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and drag the account or module to the appropriate location in the list.&#x20;
4. Click **Save Layout**.


# Collections

Collections organize your assets and link people, locations, and categories to create meaningful connections across your resources. You can create, rename, or delete custom collections to keep your data structured, while standard collections remain protected from deletion. You can add custom fields to existing collections, create new collections, and create links between collections to establish new connections.&#x20;

## Collection types

Collections organize data to support workflows. Two types of collections are supported:&#x20;

* **Dynamic collections** support real-time tasks and manage active, task-oriented data that needs frequent updates. Dynamic collections adapt in real time, reflecting the latest information based on user actions and selections within the workflow. \
  For example, a dynamic collection might track equipment assignments, where each item (laptop or phone) is assigned to a person and updated as it is checked out or returned. Similarly, users can manage inventory tracking, or maintenance schedules, ensuring they stay current as tasks progress.&#x20;
* **Supporting collections** don’t drive tasks but enable smooth workflows by storing the stable data on which dynamic collections rely. They include reference points like locations, client profiles, and room information, which dynamic collections reference to asset tracking. \
  For example, an employee directory in a supporting collection helps users quickly assign resources to individuals by offering an easy selection list during the assignment.&#x20;

Together, dynamic and supporting collections keep workflows efficient. Dynamic collections manage live tasks while supporting collections offer the background information essential for the assignment of assets. Users determine whether a collection is dynamic or supporting based on the collection's role in their workflow.

The following table describes collection types based on example workflows:&#x20;

| Example                    | Dynamic Collection                                                                                               | Supporting Collection                                                                                  |
| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Equipment Assignment**   | Tracks the assignment status of items such as laptops and phones, updating as items are checked out or returned. | Lists employees, providing a reference for assigning equipment to individuals.                         |
| **Maintenance Scheduling** | Manages maintenance records for vehicles or machines, showing completed and upcoming service dates.              | Provides details on locations, such as the buildings and rooms where maintenance activities may occur. |

***

## Standard collections

Every Asset Panda Pro module contains a starter set of collections for **People**, **Locations**, **Categories**, and **Assets** being tracked.

{% hint style="info" %}

* These collections cannot be deleted.

* The **Assets**, **People**, and **Location** collections can be renamed based on your business needs.
  {% endhint %}

* **Assets**: This collection contains all tracked assets.&#x20;

* **People**: This collection can be used as an employee directory for the module. Users can assign assets that are pulled from this collection. Users can add whatever information they would like to capture about an employee. Eventually, the People collection will also combine employee records and users who have access to the module within one area. &#x20;

* **Location:** This collection is not required but is available. By using the text combination formula data type, users can combine the hierarchy of their locations into one table. &#x20;

* **Categories**: Categories is a customized collection that groups related assets and includes customizable fields that can be linked and filtered according to your needs. See [Manage categories](/settings/account-management/collections/categories).\
  This collection cannot be renamed or deleted.&#x20;

Users can add custom fields to these collections, create new collections, and create links between collections.&#x20;

***

## Create a collection

There is no limit to the number of collections that you create within a module.

You can create a collection manually or you can import data to create a new collection. Before importing data, you must create a spreadsheet that includes the fields and records to include in the collection and then save the spreadsheet with the collection name as the file name.

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. To create a new collection manually:
   1. Click **Create** and then select **Collection.** The **New collection** page is displayed.
   2. Click **Create** under **New empty collection**.
   3. Enter the **Collection name**.
   4. Click **Create**. The collection is added to the module.
   5. Add fields to the collection to gather record data. See [Fields](/settings/account-management/fields).
3. To create a new collection based on pre-configured data:
   1. Click **Create** and then select **Collection.** The **New collection** page is displayed.
   2. Click **Import** under **Import from Excel**. The Create Collection from Spreadsheet page is displayed.
   3. Click **Browse** to select the spreadsheet to import. The collection will be named based on the selected file.
   4. Click **Create Collection**. The collection is built with fields based on the spreadsheet data and displayed in the application.
4. To limit the records displayed, [filter the collection](#delete-collection).
5. To save the field and filter selection to a custom view, click **Save view**. See [Saved views](/settings/account-management/saved-views).

***

## Create linked collections

You can create links between collections by pulling fields from other collections into the current collection. This enables you to support parent-child collection situations such as the following:

* **Room locations**: Campus - Building - Room
* **Warehouse Inventory locations**:  Aisle - Shelf - Position - Box
* **Geographic locations**: Country - Region - State - City

1. [Create collections](#create-a-collection) for each of the levels you want to support.
2. In the first child-level collection (for example, Buildings), click <i class="fa-circle-plus">:circle-plus:</i> to add a new field.
3. [Add fields from other collections](/settings/account-management/fields) to the collection. &#x20;
4. When adding records to the collection, select values from the linked collection fields to build links between the records. For example, you can select the building associated with a room to link the building and its associated campus to the room.

{% embed url="<https://files.gitbook.com/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FUu4cjnyQbKvxlmR8IplS%2Fuploads%2Fne7dXtXa0wnaKbnKjd44%2FQS_-_Supporting_and_Dynamic_Collections.mp4?alt=media&token=404a8f57-cec2-4541-8da1-6a300d66eba5>" %}

***

## Rename a collection <a href="#rename-collection" id="rename-collection"></a>

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. In the module pane, hover over the collection to rename, click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) , and then select **Edit**. The **Edit collection** page is displayed.
3. Enter the new **Collection name** and then click **Save**.

***

## Edit a collection

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Collections** tile. The list of collections is displayed.
3. To hide a collection from view, click **Hide collection** ![Hide Collection icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88) in the collection row.
4. To enable depreciation, select **Depreciation**. See [Depreciation](/maintain-records/depreciation).
5. To enable reservations for collection records, select **Reservations**. See [Reservations](https://prohelp.assetpanda.com/settings/account-management/pages/E6bRW1c2eC0Ud4vPRMbz#id-1.-overview).
6. To edit the fields for the collection:
   1. Click **Fields**. The **Fields** page is displayed.
   2. [Edit field settings](/settings/account-management/fields#edit-field-settings).
   3. Click **Save layout**.
7. To edit collection settings:
   1. Click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Edit**.
   2. To edit the collection name, enter the new **Name**.
   3. To require users to provide a reason when deleting a record, select **Require comment when deleting records**.
   4. To hide the **Relationships** tab for collections that don't refer to linked records, clear the **Show record linked to this record** and **Show record linked to another record** check boxes.
   5. Click **Save**.

***

## Filter a collection <a href="#delete-collection" id="delete-collection"></a>

You can apply a filter to limit the records displayed for the collection.

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to filter records.
3. Click <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i>. The **Filter by** pane is displayed.
4. Select the **Field name** to filter the collection records.
5. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values. See [Filter operators](#filter-operators).
6. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you selected **Is any of** or **Is none of** as the Operator, you can enter or select multiple values to be considered by the filter.
{% endhint %}

7. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps 4-6.
8. If multiple conditions are specified, select an option to determine whether **All** or **Any** of the conditions must be met to enable the record to be displayed.
9. Click **Apply**.

### Filter operators

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th valign="top">Data Type</th><th valign="top">Filter Operators</th><th width="224" valign="top">Notes</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top"><ul><li>Text</li><li>Long Text</li><li>Email</li><li>Phone Number</li><li>URL</li><li>Barcode</li></ul></td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Contains</p><p>Does not contain</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top"> </td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Numeric Auto Increment</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Contains</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top">Treated as text since it includes prefix/suffix (for example, ID-01-Type)</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><ul><li>Numeric</li><li>Currency</li><li>Percent</li></ul></td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is greater than</p><p>Is greater than or equal to</p><p>Is less than</p><p>Is less than or equal to</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top"> </td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><ul><li>Date &#x26; Time</li><li>Date only</li></ul></td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is before</p><p>Is after</p><p>Is on or before</p><p>Is on or after</p><p>Is within</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top"><p><strong>Is</strong> and <strong>Is within</strong> open a second menu</p><ul><li>Today</li><li>Yesterday</li><li>Number of days ago</li><li>This week</li><li>This month</li><li>This year</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Time only</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is before</p><p>Is after</p><p>Is on or before</p><p>Is on or after</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top"> </td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><ul><li>Single Select List</li><li>Multi-Select List</li></ul></td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is any of</p><p>Is none of</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top"><p></p><p></p></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Pull From Another Collection</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is any of</p><p>Is none of</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top">Values picked from a drop-down of actual records in the source collection, not typed manually</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Pull From Categories</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is any of</p><p>Is none of</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top">Primary field always supported; additional pulled fields only if they are Single or Multi-Select</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Address</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Contains</p><p>Does not contain</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top">Searches across the full address text</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">GPS Coordinates</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top"> </td></tr><tr><td valign="top">IP Address</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Contains</p><p>Does not contain</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top"> </td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Signature</td><td valign="top"><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top">Only checks whether a signature has been captured</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Attachment</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top">Value is a file category: Image, Document, Video, or Audio</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Formula – Math Calculation</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Is greater than</p><p>Is greater than or equal to</p><p>Is less than</p><p>Is less than or equal to</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p><p>Is equal to</p></td><td valign="top">Behaves as Numeric</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Formula – Text Combination</td><td valign="top"><p>Is equal to</p><p>Is not equal to</p><p>Contains</p><p>Does not contain</p><p>Is empty</p><p>Is not empty</p></td><td valign="top">Behaves as Text</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Formula – Date Calculation</td><td valign="top"><p>Depends on the Output set on the field:</p><ul><li>Output = Date → same as Date &#x26; Time</li><li>Output = Days/Months/Years → same as Numeric</li><li>Output = Time → same as Text</li></ul></td><td valign="top">Operators switch automatically based on configured Output</td></tr></tbody></table>

***

## Delete a collection <a href="#delete-collection" id="delete-collection"></a>

{% hint style="danger" %}
Deleting a collection permanently removes all data within it and cannot be undone.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Hover over the collection to rename, click ![More actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) , and then select **Delete**. The **Deleting collection** page is displayed.
3. Enter the name of collection to confirm its deletion.
4. Click **Yes, Continue**.


# Categories

The **Categories** collection enables you to group related records based on specific criteria, such as the type of asset. For example, you can create categories for cameras, mobile phones, and laptops. You can also customize the data captured for each category. For example, the data you collect for a mobile phone (such as the phone number) would differ greatly from the data you collect for a laptop. You can also require specific fields to have values for some categories, but remain optional for others.&#x20;

When adding new categories, users can select existing category fields or add new ones, ensuring each category record contains relevant information.

Two types of categories can be configured:

* Serialized categories represent assets that are tracked individually, such as cameras.
* Consumables reflect items that are tracked as a group, without individual asset tagging or tracking, such as HDMI cables. With consumable assets, you track the quantity of item on hand and the minimum quantity required for the asset. You can also transfer assets in the category between locations.

## Add a category

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Under **Collections**, select **Categories**.&#x20;
3. Click **Add**. The **Add new category** pane is displayed.&#x20;
4. Enter the **Category name**.
5. Select an option to specify whether the category represents a **Serialized asset** or **Consumable**.
6. For consumable categories, specify the following values:

   * **Quantity on hand**: Enter the number of assets you have.
   * **Minimum Quantity**: Enter the minimum number of assets to maintain. Notifications can be displayed when the quantity falls below the minimum quantity.

   Consumable categories are listed with the ![Consumables icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FXCmOUCDyYe5KTNpWeawP%2FSerialized%20Category.png?alt=media\&token=1d5e920a-66d9-4e26-8bef-e95bd7ab3c60) icon.
7. To add fields to associate with the category.
   1. Select **Add new field**.
   2. Enter the **Field name**.
   3. Select the **Data type** for the field.&#x20;
   4. If the field requires unique data, select **Set as unique field**.
   5. To display explanatory text for the field, select **Add helper** text and then enter the **Helper text**.
   6. Click **Save**.
   7. Repeat steps a-f for each field.
8. For each category field, select whether to **Include** the field or whether the field is **Required** when adding assets to the category.
9. Click **Save.** The category is displayed in the **Categories** list.  &#x20;

{% embed url="<https://files.gitbook.com/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FUu4cjnyQbKvxlmR8IplS%2Fuploads%2FmZ5w6Y4drv40X6cdyBRk%2FCategories_Video(2).mp4?alt=media&token=6207e296-0d07-412c-b72c-500fe1251f37>" %}

***

## Add a category field <a href="#add-new-cat-fields" id="add-new-cat-fields"></a>

As new fields are required, you can add them and then specify the categories for which the field applies.

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select **Categories.**
3. Perform one of the following tasks:

   * Hover over a column heading, select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png), and then select **Add field to left** or **Add field to right**.
   * After the last column in the page, select <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/ebvke6chrkB0bcUZRrDH/field-plus-icon.png" alt="Add field icon" data-size="line">.

   The **New field** pane is displayed.
4. Enter the **Field name**.
5. Select the appropriate **Data type**. See [Field Types](/settings/account-management/fields).
6. To require unique values for the field, select **Set as unique field**.
7. Click **Save**. The field is displayed in the Categories list.
8. Associate the new field with categories:
   1. Select the category to associate with the field. The category's details are displayed.
   2. In the field list, select select whether to **Include** the field or whether the field is **Required** when adding assets to the category.
   3. Click **Save**.
   4. Repeat steps a-c for each category that needs the new field.

***


# Track consumable assets

Consumables are items tracked by total quantity instead of as individual, serialized records. These assets include commonly issued items like headsets or cables, where the quantity in stock matters more than tracking each unit.&#x20;

With consumable assets, you can manage stock levels, update quantities, and transfer items between teams or locations.

## Configure support for consumable assets

1. [Create a category](/settings/account-management/collections/categories#add-a-category) set to **Consumable**.
2. [Create a collection](/settings/account-management/collections#create-a-collection) to store item records (for example, Assets).&#x20;
3. In the collection, add a field (for example, *Asset Type* or *Category*) that pulls data from the **Categories** collection.

***

## Add a consumable asset record

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection that will contain the consumable asset.
2. Click **Add**.
3. When creating the asset, select the consumable category (for example, *Headset* in **Asset Type**).&#x20;
4. Enter values for **Quantity on Hand** and **Minimum Quantity**.
5. Complete any additional fields (such as the location, team, or department to which it is assigned).
6. Click **Save**. The system tracks the asset by quantity within the assigned field (for example, **Assigned To**).

***

### Transfer consumable quantities <a href="#transfer" id="transfer"></a>

1. Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> and then select the collection that contains the consumable asset.
2. Click the consumable asset. Its detail pane is displayed.
3. Click **Transfer** <i class="fa-arrow-right-arrow-left">:arrow-right-arrow-left:</i>. The **Transfer consumable** page is displayed.
4. Select the **Transfer Field** (for example, **Assigned To**).
5. Select the target to receive the assets (for example, John User).

{% hint style="info" %}
You can click **Add new** in the drop-down menu to create a new target to receive the assets.
{% endhint %}

6. Enter the **Amount to transfer**.
7. To create a new record for the transferred asset, select **Create new record**.
8. Review the new values for both origin and destination.For example, if the origin has 12 headsets and you transfer 5 to another record, the source updates to 7 and the destination to 5.
9. If you chose to create a new record:
   1. Click **Continue**.
   2. Enter the details for the new record.
10. Click **Transfer**.


# Saved views

Saved views enable you to save different sets of field and filter selections for a collection so you can change what is displayed for the collection based on your business needs. For example, you can create separate views with separate sets of fields or filters for each Category or Region value.

You can share saved views with other users to enable them to use the view.\
Admins can create saved views that are locked so they cannot be edited by any users.

## **Create a saved view**

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to save a view.
3. Create the customized view of collection data:
   * [Filter the collection](/settings/account-management/collections#delete-collection).
   * After adding fields to the collection, show, hide, or rearrange the fields to fit your needs. See [Fields](/settings/account-management/fields).
4. Click **Save View**.
5. Enter a clear, descriptive name for the saved view. The name should identify the view's purpose.
6. To lock the view so it cannot be edited by users, select Lock save view.

{% hint style="info" %}
Only admins can modify locked views.
{% endhint %}

1. Click **Save**. The view is displayed under **Saved views** in the module pane.

***

## Display a saved view

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Under **Saved views**, select the view to display.

***

## **Edit a saved view**

After you've opened a saved view, you can adjust the fields or filters associated with the view.

1. To edit the name of a saved view:
   1. In the module pane, hover over the view name, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>, and then select **Edit**.
   2. Enter the new **Name** for the view and then click **Save**.
2. To edit the data displayed in the view:
   1. [Display the saved view](#display-a-saved-view).

   2. Edit the customized view of collection data:

      * [Filter the collection](/settings/account-management/collections#delete-collection).
        * Adjust the fields displayed, and their order, to fit your needs. See [Fields](/settings/account-management/fields).

      <div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="info" class="hint hint-info"><p>Remember to apply the changes to the view to verify that the data is displayed as expected.</p></div>

   3. Click **Save view actions** and then select the action to perform:
      * To save the changes to the existing view, select **Save view**.
      * To save the changes as a different saved view, select **Save as new**, enter the new view **Name**, then click **Save**.

***

## Share a saved view

You can share a saved view with other users so they can use the view.

1. [Display the saved view](#display-a-saved-view).
2. Click **Save view actions** and then select **Share**. The **Share** pane is displayed.
3. To share the view with users of specific roles, select the roles under **Share by role**.&#x20;
4. To share the view with a specific user, select the user under **Share with user**.
5. Click **Share**. The saved view is displayed in the **Saved views** list for those users.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If the saved view was locked by the admin, it is linked in the list but cannot be edited.
* If the saved view was not locked by the admin, it is copied to the shared user's list as a separate saved view. This means that it can be edited or deleted by the shared user without affecting the original saved view.
  {% endhint %}

***

## Delete a saved view

You can delete a saved view that is no longer needed.

{% hint style="info" %}

* For locked saved views, when an admin deletes the view, it is deleted for all shared users.
* For unlocked saved views, if you delete a shared view, the saved view is removed from your **Saved views** list, but remains accessible for other users.
  {% endhint %}

1. In the module pane, hover over the view name, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>, and then select **Delete**. A confirmation message is displayed.
2. Click **Yes, delete**.


# Forms

Forms provide a structured way to enable end users to create or update records in a collection. They help maintain accuracy, enforce required fields, and align updates with organizational policies.&#x20;

Forms also enable you to manage asset-related updates without manual intervention. They can support detailed tracking of key events, from assigning assets to employees or locations to documenting maintenance, inspections, and disposal. This helps maintain accurate records, reduces errors, and ensures that asset data remains current and actionable.&#x20;

***

## Form benefits

* **Standardized Data Entry**: Forms capture information consistently, reducing errors and maintaining data integrity.
* **Controlled Updates**: Forms ensure that updates follow predefined structures so that records remain accurate and reliable.
* **Workflow Integration**: Forms operate within existing processes to ensure that updates and new records reflect real-time changes without disruption.
* **Data Compliance**: Required fields and permissions in forms ensure that only authorized modifications occur.

For example, when assets are moved between locations or require repairs, you can use forms to capture all relevant information, providing a reliable record of changes. Whether tracking routine maintenance or documenting the end of an asset’s lifecycle, forms ensure every update is recorded and accessible for future reference.

***

## Form use cases <a href="#use-cases-for-updating-records" id="use-cases-for-updating-records"></a>

You can use forms to update records for the following scenarios:

* [**Assign assets to an employee**](/use-cases/use-case-assign-an-asset-to-a-person)**:** You can record an asset's assignment to an employee, including the employee's name and assignment date.
* [**Unassign assets from an employee**](/use-cases/use-case-unassign-an-asset-from-a-person)**:** When an asset is no longer assigned to an employee, you can update its record to make the asset available for reassignment or other purposes.
* **Transfer locations** You can document the movement of assets between locations to maintain accurate tracking and availability records.
* **Dispose of an asset**: You can log disposal details, such as reasons for disposal and supporting documentation, to maintain a clear asset history.
* **Log Maintenance**: You can track maintenance activities, including servicing and repairs, to ensure assets remain functional and compliant.
* **Log Inspection**: You can record inspection details, including dates, findings, and corrective actions, to uphold compliance and ensure reliability.

***

## Form creation

You can create forms to create or update single records or multiple records. Multiple record forms can use tables under the **Styling** menu to create flexibility and visibility when working with up to 15 asset records.

When building forms, you can capture relevant details and also create new collection fields. All fields used on a form must be included in the corresponding collection.

After forms are built, administrators can share them to define who can access and complete them. Access depends on permissions set in **User Permissions** and the form being shared with the user. Non-administrators cannot view a form unless it is explicitly shared with them.

[Forms that create records](/settings/account-management/forms/forms-that-create-records)

[Forms that update records](/settings/account-management/forms/forms-that-update-records)

***


# Forms that create records

Forms to create new records streamline the process of adding new records in a single step.&#x20;

## Create a form to create records

#### Form setup

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Click **Create** and then select **Form.** The **Form setup** page is displayed.
3. Enter the **Form name** (for example, **Add Asset Form**).
4. Select **Create records**.
5. Select whether the form should support creation of a **Single record** or **Multiple records**.
6. Under **In this collection**, select the collection to which new records to be added.
7. For single-record forms, to pull records from another collection for use in the form:
   1. Select **Pull records from another collection**.
   2. Under **Populate with data from**, select the collection from which the records should be pulled (for example, **People**).
8. To enable email notifications to be sent when the form is submitted, select **Allow receipt of responses after submission & generate PDF**.
9. To enable Ursa to review images to complete aspects of the form, select **Enable Ursa inspection**. See [Ursa Inspection](/ursa/ursa-inspection).
10. Click **Save & continue**. The **Form build** page is displayed.

#### Form build

1. Click the **Form description** to enter text to explain the form's purpose.
2. If another collection's records are pulled into the form, click **+** next to **Add a field from <*****Collection*****>** to select the pulled fields to add to the form. The fields are added to a table at the top of the form.
3. Add fields to the form:
   1. Click **Add**.
   2. Select **Fields**.
   3. To select existing fields, click them in the list. The are added to the form.
   4. To create a new field to be added to the collection:
      1. Select **CREATE NEW FIELD**. The New field page is displayed.
      2. Enter the new **Field name**.
      3. Select the field's **Data type** and then complete any required settings associated with the field. See [Field types](/settings/account-management/fields#field-types).
4. For multi-select fields, to filter values available to be used in the form:
   1. Click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and then select **Filter values**.
   2. Select the values that the user can select when using the form.
   3. Click **Save**.
5. For fields that pull from other collections, to filter the values available for selection:
   1. Click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and then select **Filter values**.
   2. Select the **Field name** associated with the filter.
   3. Select the **Operator** and enter the **Value** to apply to the filter.
   4. Click **Apply**.
6. Add styling elements to the form:
7. Click **Add**.
8. Select **Form styling**.
9. Select the element to add to the form:
   * **Heading**: Adds an **Add Heading** line to the form. You can edit the heading after it is added.
   * **Text**: Adds a Form description line to the form. You can edit the text after it is added.
   * **Table**: For forms to create multiple records, adds a table to the form so multiple fields can be specified. See [Use tables in multiple-record forms](#use-tables-in-multiple-record-forms).
   * **Page**: Adds a page break to the form. You can then add form elements to the new page.
   * **Line**: Adds a divider line to the form.
   * **Submitted by**: Adds the placeholder for the submitter to the form.
   * **Submission date**: Adds the placeholder for the submission date to the form.
   * **Kits**: Adds information pertaining to a selected kit to the form.
   * **Consumable**: If consumable categories exist, adds information pertaining to a selected category to the form.
10. Arrange the form elements on each form page:
    1. Hover over a form element until the Arrange ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) icon is displayed.
    2. Drag ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) to move the element to the appropriate location. You can drag fields to the left or right of other fields to stack them horizontally on the page.
11. To change the text of the **Submit** button, double-click the button and then enter the appropriate button text.
12. To display a message to users who submit the form, select **Thank you message** and then edit the text to be sent to the user.
13. To perform additional tasks after the form is submitted:
    1. Under **After form submission perform these operations**, select an option to **Calculate** or **Replace** a field value.
    2. Select the **Collection field** to be updated.
    3. Perform one of the following tasks:
       * To replace a field value, enter the new value to be applied to the field for the record.
       * To calculate a value, select options to configure the calculation. The calculated value will be applied to the field for the record.
14. Click **Save Changes**.

#### Share

{% hint style="info" %}
**Organization**, **Account**, and **Module admins** have full access to all forms by default.
{% endhint %}

1. Select **Share** above the form view.
2. To share the form with users in a specific role, select the role from the **Select a role** drop-down list. Repeat this step to share with multiple roles.
3. To share the form with individual users, enter a name in the **Select a user** field. Repeat this step to share with multiple users.
4. Click **Save changes**.

#### Preview <a href="#preview" id="preview"></a>

You can verify how the form is displayed across different devices before publishing.

1. Select **Preview** above the form view.
2. Select **Desktop**, **Tablet**, or **Mobile** from the drop-down list.
3. Review the form layout and test the form by simulating submissions.
4. Select **Form build** above the form to adjust the form.
5. Click **Save Changes** to finalize the form.

***

## Use tables in multiple-record forms

When new equipment is purchased in bulk (for example, 10 new laptops), it is more efficient to add the items in a single submission rather than completing the form 10 times.&#x20;

For forms created to create or update multiple records, you can use a table to streamline the creation process within a single form submission. Each row in the table represents an individual record. This format allows users to enter each device's details in a row and submit everything at once, which improves visibility, reduces repetition, and increases accuracy when working with large sets of data.

{% hint style="warning" %}
The current limit is 15 rows per form submission. This limit will increase in upcoming product updates.
{% endhint %}

### Create the form table

1. Create a form to create records for **Multiple records**.
2. When adding form styling elements, add the **Table** element to the form.
3. Inside the table, click **+** to add the relevant input fields. You can also select **CREATE TABLE FIELD** to create new fields to be captured in the table (and added to the collection).

{% hint style="info" %}
Tables in forms can include attachment fields, but default/autofill values are not supported.
{% endhint %}

1. Click **Save Changes**.

### Use the form table

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Under **Forms**, select the form.
3. For each new asset, enter information into a row in the table.
4. Click **Add** or press **Enter** to insert additional rows up to the 15-record limit.
5. To remove unused rows, click <i class="fa-circle-minus" style="color:$danger;">:circle-minus:</i> in the row.&#x20;
6. Click **Submit**. Each completed row is saved as a new record in the selected collection.

***

## &#x20;Edit a form

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Forms** tile. The list of forms is displayed.
3. Click the form to edit.
4. Edit the form settings. See [Create a form to create records](#create-a-form-to-create-records).

***

## &#x20;Delete a form

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Forms** tile. The list of forms is displayed.
3. Click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) next to the form to delete. The **Deleting form(s)** page is displayed.
4. Click **Delete**.


# Forms that update records

## Create a form to update records

#### Form setup

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Click **Create** and then select **Form.** The **Form setup** page is displayed.
3. Enter the **Form name** (for example, **Update Asset Form**).
4. Select **Update records**.
5. Select whether the form should support creation of a **Single record** or **Multiple records**.
6. Under **In this collection**, select the collection for which records will be updated.
7. For single-record forms, to pull records from another collection for use in the form:
   1. Select **Pull records from another collection**.
   2. Under **Populate with data from**, select the collection from which the records should be pulled (for example, **People**).
8. To enable email notifications to be sent when the form is submitted, select **Allow receipt of responses after submission & generate PDF**.
9. To enable Ursa to review images to complete aspects of the form, select **Enable Ursa inspection**. See [Ursa Inspection](/ursa/ursa-inspection).
10. Click **Save & continue**. The **Form build** page is displayed.

#### Form Build

1. Click the **Form description** to enter text to explain the form's purpose.
2. If another collection's records are pulled into the form, click **+** next to **Add a field from <*****Collection*****>** to select the pulled fields to add to the form. The fields are added to a table at the top of the form.
3. Add fields to the form:
   1. Click **Add**.
   2. Select **Fields**.
   3. To select existing fields, click them in the list. They are added to the form.
   4. To create a new field to be added to the collection:
      1. Select **CREATE NEW FIELD**. The New field page is displayed.
      2. Enter the new **Field name**.
      3. Select the field's **Data type** and then complete any required settings associated with the field. See [Field types](/settings/account-management/fields#field-types).
4. For multi-select fields, to filter values available to be used in the form:
   1. Click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and then select **Filter values**.
   2. Select the values that the user can select when using the form.
   3. Click **Save**.
5. For fields that pull from other collections, to filter the values available for selection:
   1. Click ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and then select **Filter values**.
   2. Select the **Field name** associated with the filter.
   3. Select the **Operator** and enter the **Value** to apply to the filter.
   4. Click **Apply**.
6. Add styling elements to the form:
   1. Click **Add**.
   2. Select **Form styling**.
   3. Select the element to add to the form:
      * **Heading**: Adds an **Add Heading** line to the form. You can edit the heading after it is added.
      * **Text**: Adds a Form description line to the form. You can edit the text after it is added.
      * **Table**: For forms to update multiple records, adds a table to the form so mutiple fields can be specified. See [Use tables in multiple-record forms](#use-tables-in-multiple-record-forms).
      * **Page**: Adds a page break to the form. You can then add form elements to the new page.
      * **Line**: Adds a divider line to the form.
      * **Submitted by**: Adds the placeholder for the submitter to the form.
      * **Submission date**: Adds the placeholder for the submission date to the form.
7. Arrange the form elements on each form page:
   1. Hover over a form element until the **Arrange** ![Arrange icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) icon is displayed.
   2. Drag the **Arrange** ![Arrange icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) icon to move the element to the appropriate location. You can drag fields to the left or right of other fields to stack them horizontally on the page.
8. To change the text of the **Submit** button, double-click the button and then enter the appropriate button text.
9. To display a message to users who submit the form, select **Thank you message** and then edit the text to be sent to the user.
10. Click **Save Changes**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Data populated in the selected fields when the form is submitted is automatically updated in the relevant records.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

#### Record Selection <a href="#record-selection" id="record-selection"></a>

Administrators can choose the records that can be selected in the form, and the fields that are displayed for the user to view the records.

1. Select **Record selection** above the form view.
2. To filter the records that can be selected for update:
   1. Click <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i>. The **Filter by** page is displayed.
   2. Select the **Field name** to filter the collection records.
   3. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
   4. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field.
   5. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps b-d.
   6. If multiple conditions are specified, select an option to determine whether **All** or **Any** of the conditions must be met to enable the record to be displayed.
   7. Click **Apply**.
3. To select the fields displayed for records:
   1. Click **Manage** **fields** ![Manage fields icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FLnMn2wsO7Q3ARYB32TUW%2FManage%20Fields.png?alt=media\&token=2b62f5fd-c745-47eb-8d46-30bd5527895e). The list of collection fields is displayed.
   2. To hide a field, click **Hide field** ![Hide field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88) next to the field.
   3. To show a field, click **Show field** ![Show fields icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsJ301q8nf1ayiNLnBrRr%2FField%20Hidden.png?alt=media\&token=d2d34e91-a2b3-4ae6-a62b-e5d223a60d3a) next to the field.
   4. To rearrange the order of displayed fields, click **Arrange** ![Arrange](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and drag the field up or down in the list.
4. Click **Save changes**.

#### Share

{% hint style="info" %}
**Organization**, **Account**, and **Module admins** have full access to all forms by default.
{% endhint %}

1. Select **Share** above the form view.
2. To share the form with users in a specific role, select the role from the **Select a role** drop-down list. Repeat this step to share with multiple roles.
3. To share the form with individual users, enter a name in the **Select a user** field. Repeat this step to share with multiple users.
4. Click **Save changes**.

#### Preview <a href="#preview" id="preview"></a>

You can verify how the form is displayed across different devices before publishing.

1. Select **Preview** above the form view.
2. Select **Desktop**, **Tablet**, or **Mobile** from the drop-down list.
3. Review the form layout and test the form by simulating submissions.
4. Select **Form build** above the form to adjust the form.
5. Click **Save Changes** to finalize the form.

***

## Use tables in multiple-record forms

When multiple existing records need to be modified (for example, changing ownership or status) you can use a table to enable individual updates per row in a single submission. Each row in the table represents an individual record. This format allows users to update each device's details in a row and submit everything at once, which improves visibility, reduces repetition, and increases accuracy when working with large sets of data.

{% hint style="warning" %}
***Note**: The current limit is 15 rows per form submission. This limit will increase in upcoming product updates.*
{% endhint %}

### Create the form table

{% hint style="warning" %}
***Note**: Only fields added to the form table (or added separately to the form) are updated. All other fields remain unchanged.*
{% endhint %}

1. Create a form to create records for **Multiple records**.
2. When adding form styling elements, add the **Table** element to the form.
3. Inside the table, click **+** to add the relevant input fields. You can also select **CREATE TABLE FIELD** to create new fields to be updated in the table (and added to the collection).
4. Click **Save Changes**.

### Use the form table

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Under **Forms**, select the appropriate update form. The collection is displayed.
3. In the collection, select the records you want to update.
4. Click **Continue**. Each selected record is displayed as a row in the table. Fields will be editable based on the form configuration.
5. Enter updated values in each table row.
6. Click **Submit**. Each record is updated with the values entered in its respective row. The Collection view is then displayed.
7. To edit additional records with the form, repeat steps 3-6.

***

## Edit a form

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Forms** tile. The list of forms is displayed.
3. Click the form to edit.
4. Edit the form settings. See [Create a form to update records](#create-a-form-to-create-records).

***

## &#x20;Delete a form

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Forms** tile. The list of forms is displayed.
3. Click ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) next to the form to delete. The **Deleting form(s)** page is displayed.
4. Click Delete.


# Form submission logs

Form Submission Logs enable users to track form responses in a centralized, tabular format. This eliminates the need to navigate between individual records or forms to review submission history. Users can search for specific field values, apply filters, sort results, and export data, making it easier to audit and manage form-based interactions across the platform.

Form logging is available in two formats:

* **Form submissions against one record**: This view displays a detailed log of all submissions tied to a single record. It enables users to review historical submissions for that specific record. Only fields configured to show in the log will appear, with the record's ID being the primary identifier. At this time, collection fields are not supported in the log view.
* **All submissions for a specific form**: This option shows every record that has submitted a particular form, regardless of the record it is associated with. Similar to the per-record log, only select fields (including the ID field) are visible, and collection fields are currently not supported.

***

## View form submission logs

1. Perform one of the following steps to access the forms list:

   * In the navigation pane, click <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> **Account Switcher**, select the appropriate account and module, and then expand the **Forms** list.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the current module pane and then expand the **Forms** list..
   * In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**, expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Forms** tile.

   The list of forms is displayed.
2. Click ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) next to the appropriate form and select **View form submissions**. The record of submissions is displayed.
3. Click a **Record ID**. The form submission details are displayed for the selected record.
4. To view all form submissions for the selected record, click **Show record's submissions**.
5. To view the full details of the record, select **View record**. This view shows the record's details, activity, linked records, tickets, and attachments.

### Save the log to a report

You can save the data in the log to a report that can be accessed from the Reports in the navigation pane.

1. Select **Save report**.
2. Enter the **Report name** and **Description** of the report.
3. Click **Save**.

### Export form submission log details

You can export the form submission log details to an external report file.

{% hint style="info" %}
You cannot export other activity stream logs using this procedure.
{% endhint %}

1. View the form submission log.
2. Click ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and then select the appropriate export format. The file is generated made ready for download.
3. Click **Download Link** to download the report file.


# Ticketing

If the Ticketing module is enabled in your organization's settings, you can create tickets to manage issues, requests, and incidents associated with your asset/record data. Each ticket in the Ticketing collection represents an item that needs attention, such as an asset problem, service request, or internal task.&#x20;

You can configure user roles and permissions to identify the users who can view and manage tickets. See [Roles & permissions](/settings/roles-and-permissions).

## Enable the Ticketing module <a href="#id-5.-enabling-and-configuring-ticketing" id="id-5.-enabling-and-configuring-ticketing"></a>

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module.
3. Click **Enable** in the **Ticketing** tile. The **Manage help desk** window is displayed.
4. Select **Turn on**, and then click **Next: set up support email**.
5. Select **Turn on**, and then click **Next**. The **Setup helpdesk** window is displayed.
6. Enter the email address name where customers can contact your team and create support requests.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
asset-panda.assetpanda.app will be used as your subdomain.
{% endhint %}

7. Click **Continue**. A confirmation page is displayed.
8. Click **Save**. The Ticketing module can be accessed in the navigation pane by users with the appropriate role or user permissions.

{% hint style="info" %}
By default, the Ticketing view is named **Help desk**, but you can rename it to meet your business needs.
{% endhint %}

## Manage the Ticketing collection <a href="#id-6.-ticket-list-view" id="id-6.-ticket-list-view"></a>

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Ticketing** tile. The Ticketing management options are displayed:
3. To specify the name displayed for the Ticketing module in the navigation pane:
   1. Select **Rename**.
   2. Enter the new name for the module.
   3. Click **Save**.
4. To review the routing address for Ticketing (Help desk) emails, select **Routing address**.
5. To modify the fields for the Ticketing (Help desk) module:
   1. Select **Edit fields**.
   2. Modify the fields stored for the template. See [Fields](/settings/account-management/fields).

## View the Ticketing page

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Under **Other**, select the **Help Desk** (**Ticketing**) option. The list of tickets is displayed.
3. To search for a ticket, enter text in the **Search** field to search by the associated [Ticket fields](#id-4.-ticket-fields).
4. To filter the ticket list:
   1. Click <i class="fa-bars-filter">:bars-filter:</i>. The **Filter by** pane is displayed.
   2. Select the **Field name** to filter the tickets.
   3. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
   4. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field.
   5. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps b-d.
   6. If multiple conditions are specified, select an option to determine whether **All** or **Any** of the conditions must be met to enable the record to be displayed.
   7. Click **Apply**.
5. To sort the ticket list:
   1. Click <i class="fa-arrow-up-short-wide">:arrow-up-short-wide:</i> above the list. The **Sort by** pane is displayed.
   2. Select the **Sorting field** and whether to sort in **Ascending** or **Descending** order by the field's values.&#x20;
   3. To sort by additional fields, click **Add more** and repeat step b. You can specify up to three levels of sorting in the list.
6. To export the ticket list, see [Export record data](/maintain-records/export-record-data).

{% hint style="info" %}
The export only includes records and fields displayed based on the applied search, filter, and sort settings.
{% endhint %}

### Ticket fields <a href="#id-4.-ticket-fields" id="id-4.-ticket-fields"></a>

<table><thead><tr><th width="173.140625">Ticket Field</th><th>Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Ticket Number</td><td>System‑generated numeric identifier, used for fast search and reference.</td></tr><tr><td>Name</td><td>Short title for the ticket.</td></tr><tr><td>Description</td><td>Detailed explanation of the issue or request.</td></tr><tr><td>Status</td><td>Field to track the state of the ticket (for example, <strong>Open</strong>, <strong>In progress</strong>, or <strong>Closed</strong>).</td></tr><tr><td>Priority</td><td>Indicates the urgency of the ticket (for example, <strong>Highest</strong>, <strong>High</strong>, <strong>Medium</strong>, <strong>Low</strong>, and <strong>Lowest</strong>)</td></tr><tr><td>Assigned to</td><td>Person responsible for the ticket.</td></tr><tr><td>Reported by</td><td>User who created or reported the ticket.</td></tr><tr><td>Created at</td><td>Date and time the ticket was created.</td></tr><tr><td>Last updated at</td><td>Date and time the ticket was last modified.</td></tr></tbody></table>

{% hint style="info" %}

* System-generated fields (**Ticket Number**, **Reported by**, **Created at**, and **Last updated at**) cannot be modified.
* You can add custom fields to store additional information, such as Category, Location, Department, or Issue Impact/Severity. See [Fields](/settings/account-management/fields).
  {% endhint %}

## Create a ticket <a href="#id-7.-working-with-individual-tickets" id="id-7.-working-with-individual-tickets"></a>

1. [View the Ticketing page](#view-the-ticketing-page).
2. Click **New ticket**. The **New ticket** page is displayed.
3. Enter a **Name** and **Description** that clearly describe the issue. You can format the Description to include additional details, such as links to websites, as needed.
4. Set the **Status** of the ticket to **Open**.
5. Select a **Priority** based on the urgency of the issue.
6. Set **Assigned to** to the user responsible for managing the ticket.
7. To link records to the ticket:
   1. Under **Record selection**, click **Link record to ticket**. The **Link record to ticket** window is displayed.
   2. Select the **Collection** that contains the record to be linked.
   3. Use search, filter, or sort tools to locate the record.
   4. Select one or more records to be linked to the ticket.
   5. Click **Confirm**.
   6. To link records from multiple collections, repeat steps b-e.
8. Under **Attachments**, upload photos or documents to support the ticket. See [Attachments](/tools/attachments).
9. Click **Save**.

## View a ticket <a href="#id-7.-working-with-individual-tickets" id="id-7.-working-with-individual-tickets"></a>

1. [Manage the ticket collection](#id-6.-ticket-list-view) to search for the tickets to view.
2. Select a ticket row. The ticket's details pane is displayed:
   * The **Details** tab displays the ticket data, including linked records and attachments.
   * The **Activity** tab shows the history of the ticket, including any comments and data updates, with the newest activity at the bottom of the view.
3. To view the full details of the activity, click **View full details**.
   * The main area shows the Activity stream for the ticket.
   * The side pane shows the ticket details, including linked records and attachments.

## Edit a ticket <a href="#id-7.3-edit-a-ticket" id="id-7.3-edit-a-ticket"></a>

1. [View the ticket ](#id-7.-working-with-individual-tickets)to edit. The ticket's details pane is displayed.
2. Click <i class="fa-pen">:pen:</i>. The **Edit ticket** page is displayed.
3. Edit the available [Ticket fields](#id-4.-ticket-fields).

{% hint style="info" %}
System-generated fields (**Ticket Number**, **Reported by**, **Created at**, and **Last updated at**) cannot be modified.
{% endhint %}

## Add comments to a ticket

You can submit notes or comments on a ticket to share information with internal team members.

1. [View the ticket ](#id-7.-working-with-individual-tickets)to edit. The ticket's details pane is displayed.
2. Select the **Activity** tab.
3. Select the recipients to be notified of the ticket activity.
4. Enter the ticket information to be shared.
5. Select whether the information should be shared as an **Internal message** or as a **Reply to ticket**.
6. Click **Send**. The information is shared in the **Activity** tab.

{% hint style="info" %}

* Activity is intended for internal notes between team members, not for external email threads. Comments are visible by all who have access to view the ticket.
* Each **Activity** entry indicates the user who made the change and the date it occurred.
  {% endhint %}

## View tickets for a record <a href="#id-9.2-view-tickets-from-a-record" id="id-9.2-view-tickets-from-a-record"></a>

1. Navigate to the collection that contains the record. See [Manage collections](/settings/account-management/collections).
2. Click the record to be updated. The details pane is displayed.
3. Click **View full details**.
4. Select the **Tickets** tab. All tickets associated with the record are displayed.
5. Select a ticket to view its details, including its activity, attachments, and linked records.


# Fields

Fields organize and store data for assets, people, locations, and categories within each module. They capture information such as an asset's name, serial number, or key details, or location's physical address elements. Each field represents a specific piece of data.&#x20;

Fields are displayed in the collection pages to make it easier to locate records for review and editing.

Fields in a collection reflect the data collected universally for records in that collection.

{% hint style="info" %}
Categories allow you to maintain conditional sets of fields for different types of related assets. See [Manage categories](/settings/account-management/collections/categories).
{% endhint %}

## Field types

Fields can represent different types of data that require different settings or restrictions to support the data stored in the field. For example, some fields may require selection from a list or a specific format to be validated.

<table><thead><tr><th width="145.2734375" valign="top">Field Type</th><th valign="top">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Address</strong></td><td valign="top">Stores physical addresses.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Attachment</strong></td><td valign="top"><p>Supports uploading files, such as images or documents, to a record for reference. </p><p>You can add the following file formats as attachments to records:</p><ul><li>Images: jpg, jpeg, gif, png, heic, heif, webp, avif</li><li>Documents: doc, docx, pdf, xls, xlsx, txt, zip, csv</li><li>Videos: mp4, qt, asx, mov, swf, asf, wmv, swt, 3gp, mn, viv, 3g2, mpg, vivo, dvx, vob, mpeg, fly</li><li>Audio: mp3, wav, wma, ogg, aac, 3gp ,m4a</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Barcode</strong></td><td valign="top"><p>Captures barcode data and can be used when scanning assets via barcode readers or mobile devices. </p><p> </p><p>For improved performance when scanning items or using the Audit feature, you are recommended to use a Barcode field as your unique identification for assets. See <a href="/tools/barcode-generator">Barcode Generator</a>. </p></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Currency</strong></td><td valign="top">Converts numbers into your default currency symbol with two decimal places. Currency fields can be summed in reports and included in numeric calculations.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Date &#x26; Time</strong></td><td valign="top">Prompts users to select the date and time and captures the selection in a single field. This data type is useful for tracking specific timestamps.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Email</strong></td><td valign="top">Displays text (presumably an email address) as a clickable email link.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Formula</strong></td><td valign="top"><p>Performs calculations using data from other fields, enabling dynamic content creation. You can choose from various formula types:</p><ul><li><strong>Text Combination:</strong> This option combines text from multiple fields into a single output, facilitating easy data aggregation and reporting. You can manually enter field names to have greater control over how text is structured.</li><li><strong>Math:</strong> This option performs arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division) using values from selected numeric and currency fields. This option is useful for calculations like totals, averages, or any derived metrics. This type also supports manual field entry, enabling users to define custom calculations.</li><li><p><strong>Date Calculation:</strong> This option calculates dates or durations based on selected time-related fields. It is beneficial for tracking durations, such as project timelines or service periods.</p><p>You can configure whether the formula output is a calculated date (with custom date formatting) or a duration (days, months, years, or time interval).</p></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>GPS Coordinates</strong></td><td valign="top"><p>Captures latitude and longitude values, allowing you to track asset locations or user activities.</p><ul><li><strong>Default Latitude:</strong> This field represents the north-south position of a location, measured in degrees. It typically features a numeric value that can range from -90° (South Pole) to +90° (North Pole). Latitude values can be derived from GPS-enabled devices or mapping services, providing precise location data for the asset.</li><li><strong>Default Longitude:</strong> This field indicates the east-west position of a location, measured in degrees. Longitude values range from -180° to +180°, helping to pinpoint a location's position relative to the Prime Meridian. Like latitude, longitude values are sourced from GPS technology or mapping platforms, ensuring accurate geographic representation.</li></ul><p>See <a href="/settings/account-management/fields/gps-data-management">GPS data management</a>.<br>You can select <strong>Capture GPS coordinates when saved from mobile</strong> to automatically record a device's location the moment a record is saved on the mobile app. This setting eliminates the need to manually drop pins or enter coordinates. If the field is required and a user’s location cannot be determined, the app will prevent the record from being saved.</p></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>IP Address</strong></td><td valign="top">Stores IP addresses for tracking devices or troubleshooting network-related issues.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Long Text</strong></td><td valign="top">Provides space for extended text entries when more details are required. There is no character limit.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Multiple Select List</strong></td><td valign="top">Allows users to select multiple options from a predefined list of values. This data type is useful for assigning multiple attributes to a record. <br>You can apply color coding to each field to make selections easier to identify on the list page and record details.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Numeric</strong></td><td valign="top">Indicates that only numbers are accepted in the value. This field can be used in numeric calculations and to provide sums in reports.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Numeric Auto Increment</strong></td><td valign="top">Automatically generates a sequential number when a new record is created. This data type is useful for assigning unique IDs or tracking record counts.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Percent</strong></td><td valign="top">Captures values and formats them as a percentage. This data type can be included in calculations and reports.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Phone Number</strong></td><td valign="top">Automatically styles the entered value in the phone number format and applies hyperlinks for use with a mobile app.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Signature</strong></td><td valign="top">Displays a signature panel for capturing digital signatures. This data type is often used for approvals or confirmations.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Single Select List</strong></td><td valign="top">Provides a drop-down list where users can select a single value from predefined options. This options is ideal for categorization. You can apply color coding to each field to make selections easier to identify on the list page and record details.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>URL</strong></td><td valign="top">Displays a URL (web address) as a clickable link for quick access to external sites.</td></tr></tbody></table>

***

## Add a field to a collection <a href="#adding-new-fields" id="adding-new-fields"></a>

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection to which you want to add a field.
3. Perform one of the following tasks:

   * Hover over a column heading, select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png), and then select **Add field to left** or **Add field to right**.
   * After the last column in the page, select  <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/ebvke6chrkB0bcUZRrDH/field-plus-icon.png" alt="Add icon" data-size="line">.

   The **New field** pane is displayed.
4. Enter the **Field name**.
5. Select the appropriate **Data type**. See [Field Types](/settings/account-management/fields).
6. To apply color formatting to field values when specific conditions are met:
   1. Select **Color coding rule**.
   2. Select the **Operator** and **Value** to be evaluated for the field.
   3. Click the **Select Color** bar to select the color to be applied when the field-value condition is met.
   4. To specify multiple color rules for the field, click **Add rule** and repeat steps a-c.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If multiple rules are defined, color coding uses the first rule that evaluates as true for the field. The remaining rules are not evaluated.
* When configured, color coding is displayed throughout the application whenever the field value is displayed.
* If color options are defined for a field, the color coding rule overrides the specified color options.
  {% endhint %}

7. To require a field value before the record can be saved, select **Set as required**.
8. To require unique values for the field, select **Set as unique field**.
9. To lock a field after the initial value is added (so the value cannot be edited), select **Set as read-only field**.
10. To display explanatory text for the field, select **Add helper** text and then enter the **Helper text**.
11. Click **Save**. The field is displayed in the collection list.

***

## Add fields from other collections

You can reuse data across collections to provide additional supporting context for records, ensuring uniformity and reducing redundancy. For example, if an asset is assigned to a person, you can populate the **Assigned To** field with a list of names built from the People collection.<br>

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to add fields.
3. Perform one of the following tasks:

   * Hover over a column heading, select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png), and then select **Add field to left** or **Add field to right**.
   * After the last column in the page, select  <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/ebvke6chrkB0bcUZRrDH/field-plus-icon.png" alt="Add icon" data-size="line">.

   The **New field** pane is displayed.
4. Enter the **Field name** (for example, **Assigned To**).
5. Select **Pull from another collection**.
6. To enable multiple values to be selected for the field when pulling values from another collection, select **Allow multiple selection**.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}

* This option cannot be disabled once it is saved for a field.
* The multi-select functionality applies everywhere the field is used, including collections, forms, automations, reports, and audits.
  {% endhint %}

1. Select the **Collection** that contains the field to be pulled (for example, **People**).
2. To filter the records from the collection that are accessible to the current field (for example, to limit an **Assigned To** field to people assigned to specific locations):
   1. Select **Filter list options**.
   2. Select the **Field name** to filter the collection records (for example, **Location**).
   3. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
   4. Enter the **Value** to determine the records available to the collection field (for example, the allowed location name).
3. Select the **Primary Field** to pulled collection field whose values will be displayed (for example, **Name**).
4. To display additional fields from the pulled collection (for example, the phone number of the assigned user):
   1. Under **Pull in additional fields**, click **Add field**.
   2. From the drop-down list, select the collection field to be pulled (for example, **Phone Number**).
   3. In the available field, enter the display name for the field (for example, **Assigned Phone**). If you do not enter a display name, the field name is populated as *Collection*: *Field Name* (for example: **People: Phone Number**).
   4. Repeat steps a-c for any additional pulled collection fields.

{% hint style="info" %}
This option is not available if Allow multiple selection is enabled for the field.
{% endhint %}

11. To require a field value before the record can be saved, select **Set as required**.
12. To require unique values for the field, select **Set as unique field**.
13. To lock a field after the initial value is added (so the value cannot be edited), select **Set as read-only field**.
14. To display explanatory text for the field, select **Add helper** text and then enter the **Helper text**.
15. To enable kit parent values for the field to sync to all child records, select **Copy kit parent data into children**.

{% hint style="info" %}

* This option is available only when Kits are enabled in the module.
* This option is disabled for unique, auto-increment, attachment, and formula fields.
* When this option is selected for an existing field, the current parent value is copied to all existing child records immediately, overriding any existing child values. Child records cannot maintain a different value while the synchronization is active.
* When child records are added to a kit, they automatically inherit the current parent value.
* When child records are removed from a kit, the last synced value is preserved.
  {% endhint %}

15. Click **Save**. The field is displayed with the <i class="fa-link">:link:</i> icon in the collection list.

***

## Edit field settings

### Edit from the collection view

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to edit fields.
3. Hover over the field heading, select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png), and then select **Settings**. The field's details pane is displayed.
4. Edit the settings for the field. See [Add a field](#adding-new-fields).
5. Click **Save** to apply the changes.

### Edit from Account management

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Collections** tile. The list of collections is displayed.
3. Click **Fields** for the appropriate collection. The **Fields** page is displayed.
4. To hide a field in the collection view, click **Hide field** ![Hide field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88) next to the field.
5. To rearrange the order of displayed fields, click ![Rearrange icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and drag the field up or down in the list. You can also select a field and click **To top** or **To bottom** to move the field to the beginning or end of the field list.
6. To edit the field settings, click the field name. The field details are displayed.
7. Edit the settings for the field. See [Add a field](#adding-new-fields).
8. Click **Save layout**.

***

## Show, hide, or rearrange fields <a href="#showing-and-hiding-fields" id="showing-and-hiding-fields"></a>

You can define the fields that are displayed in your collections to focus on the most relevant data.&#x20;

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to show or hide fields.
3. Click **Manage** **fields** ![](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FLnMn2wsO7Q3ARYB32TUW%2FManage%20Fields.png?alt=media\&token=2b62f5fd-c745-47eb-8d46-30bd5527895e). The list of collection fields is displayed.
4. To hide a field, click **Hide field** ![Hide field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FqbjK1HNTS8AgRlLABOc7%2FField%20Displayed.png?alt=media\&token=d615927b-a6b0-4607-b655-fcd653cc3e88) next to the field.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can also hover over a field heading, select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png)  and then select **Hide** to hide a field.
{% endhint %}

5. To show a field, click **Show field** ![Show field icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsJ301q8nf1ayiNLnBrRr%2FField%20Hidden.png?alt=media\&token=d2d34e91-a2b3-4ae6-a62b-e5d223a60d3a) next to the field.
6. To rearrange the order of displayed fields, click ![Rearrange icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FEslOE93flpVYffDIWv9k%2FArrange.png?alt=media\&token=3dad5b82-8e7c-4cad-b0e2-9dc9bdbe9815) and drag the field up or down in the list.
7. To resize field columns to display longer data strings:
   1. Hover over the border to the right of the field column. A drag bar is displayed.
   2. Click the drag bar and drag it until the column is the appropriate width.
8. To display a summary row with totals for numeric fields, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Row Summary**. The summary (<i class="fa-sigma">:sigma:</i>) row is displayed above the records.

***

## Delete a field

{% hint style="danger" %}
Deleting a field deletes all data stored in the field across all records. This action cannot be undone.
{% endhint %}

1. Perform one of the following steps to display the module pane:
   * In the navigation pane, click the  **Account Switcher** <img src="https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/iuISuP3Hf3EJJWdA4Wtr/Account_Switcher_Icon.png" alt="Account Switcher icon" data-size="line"> and then select the appropriate account and module.
   * Click <i class="fa-house">:house:</i> to display the module pane.
2. Select the collection for which you want to delete fields.
3. Hover over the field heading, select ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png)  and then select **Delete**. The **Deleting field** page is displayed.
4. Select **Yes, delete**.


# GPS data management

## Maps <a href="#add-a-new-account" id="add-a-new-account"></a>

The Maps tool simplifies and enhances record location management. It enables precise address and GPS data handling while improving workflows for users who require accurate and actionable geographic information. Through manual entry and interactive map integration, Maps offers versatility and precision for various use cases.&#x20;

***

## GPS fields <a href="#gps-maps" id="gps-maps"></a>

GPS fields support the input and management of precise geographic coordinates. You can manually enter **Latitude** and **Longitude** values or click <i class="fa-location-dot">:location-dot:</i> to interact with a map to select a specific location. This flexibility supports high-precision scenarios, such as asset tracking or compliance verification.

Records that contain GPS data include dynamic mapping capabilities, allowing for easy access to location details directly from listings. This ensures users can view and manage coordinates without disrupting their workflows.

<br>


# Automations

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="" data-size="line">[Visit Automations in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/account-management/automations)

Automations in Asset Panda streamline workflows by executing predefined actions based on specific conditions. By defining triggers, conditions, and actions, you can create structured workflows that reduce manual effort and ensure consistency.

Automations enhance efficiency by executing tasks seamlessly, reducing manual intervention, and ensuring accuracy in workflows.

## Automation components

### Triggers

Triggers determine when the automation should run:

* **When a record is created**: Runs when a new record is added to a collection
* **When a record is updated**: Runs when any field in a record changes
* **When a record is deleted**: Runs when a record is removed
* **Based on a numeric field**: Runs when a specified numeric threshold value is reached
* **When a form is submitted**: Runs when a user submits a specific form
* **At a scheduled time**: Runs at set intervals (hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly)
* **Based on a date field**: Runs a specified number of days before or after a selected date field. Date, formula date, and pull date fields are supported.
* **Based on audit dates**: Runs relative to audit start or end dates
* **When an audit is closed**: Runs when an audit is finalized
* **When a record is audited**: Runs when a record is included in an audit

### Conditions

Conditions filter records based on predefined criteria. Automations can be triggered when any condition is met or when all conditions are met.

### Actions

Actions define the event that occurs when the automation runs.&#x20;

* **Send a notification**: Send an email, Slack message, or Microsoft Teams notification

{% hint style="info" %}
Automation triggers allow only up to 50 emails per trigger to ensure reliable delivery and prevent service limits from being exceeded.
{% endhint %}

* **Send a report**: Email a report of collection data
* **Update field values**: Automatically change field values on a record
* **Create a record**: Create a new record in the same or a different collection
* **Send an audit report**: Email an audit report
* **Subscribe to a webhook**: Send data to an external URL when triggered

Multiple actions can be added to a single automation.

## Advanced Settings

You can refine when automations run with advanced settings:

* **Trigger Type Specification**: Specifies whether an automation runs based on manual updates, imports, API changes, or other automations. This specification prevents automations from triggering due to unintended record modifications.
* **Field Change Specification**: Triggers automations only when specific fields change instead of based on a record update. This helps focus automation on relevant updates.

## Dynamic Automation

Automations support dynamic conditions for numeric, currency, percentage, formula-math, and date-time fields. You can create flexible triggers based on relative date conditions, such as today, yesterday, or a set number of days ago. Field values can also be updated dynamically using data from other fields or related records.

* **Dynamic Filtering**: Rather than using static values, conditions can compare one field's value to another field dynamically. For example, you can trigger a notification when stock quantity drops below a minimum threshold.
* **Updating Field Values**:Fields can be updated based on values from other fields, including related records. You can also dynamically update date fields using values like Today.
* **Dynamic Emails**: When sending notifications, email recipients can be dynamically selected from an email field in the collection or a related record.
* **Field Value Placeholders**: Emails, and Teams messages (if integrated), can include field values from the triggering record, ensuring relevant details are automatically inserted.

### Handling Complex Automations

Automations that create records require safeguards to prevent infinite loops. If an automation creates a new record in the same collection as the triggering record, it may trigger the automation repeatedly.&#x20;

To avoid this scenario:

* You cannot select the same collection for both the trigger and record creation.
* You are recommended to apply conditions when running scheduled automations to limit execution scope and avoid unnecessary system load.

***

## Create an automation

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Automation** tile. The list of automations is displayed.
3. Click **Create**. The Automation Settings page is displayed.
4. Enter the **Automation Name** and an optional **Description** of the automation.
5. Click **Save**. The automation details are displayed.
6. Under **WHEN,** select the trigger event and configure the associated options. See [Trigger events and options](#trigger-events-and-options).
7. Configure the conditions to filter the records associated with the trigger:
   1. Click **Add Condition**.
   2. For **When**, select the field to filter records. The list of fields is filtered based on the automation trigger selected.
   3. Select the **Operator** used to review the field.
   4. Enter the **Value** used to invoke the trigger condition. You can select **Exact value** to specify a static value or select another field to use its value in the condition.
   5. Repeat steps a-d to configure the necessary conditions.
   6. Above the conditions, select an option to specify whether **All** or **Any** conditions must be meet to trigger the action.
8. Under **THEN**, select the **Type** of action to perform and then configure the action. See [Action types](#action-types).
9. To add multiple actions, click **Add Action** and then repeat step 8. You can click **X** next to an action to remove it.
10. To view the summary of the automation, click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i> next to **Automation Summary**.
11. Click **Save**.&#x20;

***

### Trigger events and options

<table><thead><tr><th width="275.55078125" valign="top">Trigger event</th><th>Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top">When a record is created</td><td><ul><li><strong>By</strong>: Select the methods by which record creation triggers an action. Click <strong>x</strong> for a method to remove it from the trigger list. Select an option from the drop-down to reinstate it.</li><li><strong>Using</strong>: Select the collection whose record creation triggers the action.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">When a record is updated</td><td><ul><li><strong>By</strong>: Select the methods by which record updates trigger an action. Click <strong>x</strong> for a method to remove it from the trigger list. Select an option from the drop-down to reinstate it.</li><li><strong>Using</strong>: Select the collection whose record creation triggers the action, then select the field that, when updated, triggers the action.<br><br>You can select <strong>Include all options</strong> to trigger the action if any record field is updated.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">When a record is deleted</td><td><ul><li><strong>By</strong>: Select the methods by which record deletion triggers an action. Click <strong>x</strong> for a method to remove it from the trigger list. Select an option from the drop-down to reinstate it.</li><li><strong>Using</strong>: Select the collection whose record deletion triggers the action.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Based on a numeric field</td><td><strong>Collection</strong>: Select the collection whose numeric field value triggers the action. <br>Use conditions to determine the field and value associated with the trigger.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">When a form is submitted</td><td><strong>Using</strong>: Select the form whose submission triggers the action.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">At a scheduled time</td><td><ul><li><strong>Using</strong>: Select the collection associated with the trigger.</li><li><strong>Interval Type</strong>: Select whether the trigger occurs <strong>Hourly</strong>, <strong>Daily</strong>, <strong>Weekly</strong>, <strong>Monthly</strong>, or <strong>Yearly</strong>.</li><li><strong>Every</strong>: Select an option to specify the delay between intervals. For example, you can run the automation every 3 days.</li><li><strong>Time zone</strong>: Select the time zone that determines the time when the automation is triggered.</li><li><strong>Start Date</strong>: Select the date and time when the automation should start.</li><li><strong>End Date</strong>: Select the date and time when the automation should end.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Based on a date field</td><td><ul><li><strong>Using</strong>: Select the collection associated with the trigger.</li><li><strong>Notify</strong>: Specify the number of days before or after the selected date field to trigger the automation.</li><li><strong>Before/after the date</strong>: Select whether the automation should be triggered before or after the selected date field's date.</li><li><strong>Date field</strong>: The field whose date should trigger the automation.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Based on an audit start date</td><td><ul><li><strong>Start</strong>: To start a specified time before or after the start date (for example, 6 hours before an audit starts), enter the number of intervals and then select the interval.</li><li><strong>Before/after start date</strong>: Select whether the selected <strong>Start</strong> time should be before or after the audit start date.</li><li><strong>Interval</strong>: Select whether the trigger occurs <strong>Hourly</strong>, <strong>Daily</strong>, <strong>Weekly</strong>, or <strong>Monthly</strong></li><li><strong>End after</strong>: Specify the number of times that the automation should run when it starts.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Based on an audit end date</td><td><ul><li><strong>Start</strong>: To start a specified time before or after the end date (for example, 6 hours after an audit completes), enter the number of intervals and then select the interval.</li><li><strong>Before/after start date</strong>: Select whether the selected <strong>Start</strong> time should be before or after the audit start date.</li><li><strong>Interval</strong>: Select whether the trigger occurs <strong>Hourly</strong>, <strong>Daily</strong>, <strong>Weekly</strong>, or <strong>Monthly</strong></li><li><strong>End after</strong>: Specify the number of times that the automation should run when it starts.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">When an audit is closed</td><td>No options required.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">When record is audited</td><td><strong>Collection</strong>: Select the collection whose record audit triggers the action.</td></tr></tbody></table>

***

### Action types

<table><thead><tr><th width="233.09765625" valign="top">Type</th><th valign="top">Options</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top">Send notification</td><td valign="top"><p>Send a notification when the trigger occurs. You can send the notification as an email or, if integrations are enabled, to Microsoft Teams or Slack.</p><p></p><p>Click <strong>Edit</strong> to create the draft of the message. </p><ul><li>For Email, you can send the notification to specific emails, emails associated with collection fields, and to all users in a specific role.</li><li>For Microsoft Teams, you can send to specific Channel URLs.</li><li>For Slack, you can send to specific Slack users or channels.</li><li>For email and Microsoft Teams, you can select line styles text options to format the body of the email.</li><li><p>For email and Microsoft Teams, you can click <strong>Field</strong> to insert field placeholders in the email. They are replaced with the relevant record values when the email is sent.</p><ul><li>Images and signatures are displayed as inline images.</li><li>PDFs, audio and video files, and GPS data are displayed as clickable links that are opened in a new tab.</li></ul></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Update field value</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>In</strong>: The collection containing the field to be updated.</li><li><strong>Field</strong>: The field to update.</li><li><strong>To value</strong>: The value to apply to the selected field. You can enter a specific value or copy values from fields associated with the triggering collection. You can update date fields  with selected date-related options (for example, number of days ago).</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Send Report</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>Report Source</strong>: Select the collection or saved view to associate with the action.</li><li><strong>Report Format</strong>: Select whether to share the report in PDF, Excel, or CSV format.</li><li><strong>Notification Type</strong>: Click <strong>Compose</strong> to create the draft of the email that will share the report. You can send the notification to specific emails, emails associated with collection fields, and to all users in a specific role.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Create record</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>In</strong>: Select the collection in which you want to create a record.</li><li><strong>Field Mapping</strong>: Click <strong>Create</strong> to map data from the automation collection fields to the selected <strong>In</strong> collection fields.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Subscribe to webhook</td><td valign="top">Click <strong>Add URLs</strong> to specify the webhook urls. See <a href="/integrations-store/data-sync/webhooks-integration">Webhooks Integration</a>.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Send audit report</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>Report Format</strong>: Select whether to share the audit report in PDF, Excel, or CSV format.</li><li><strong>Notification Type</strong>: Click <strong>Compose</strong> to create the draft of the email that will share the audit report. You can send the notification to specific emails, emails associated with collection fields, and to all users in a specific role.</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Send for DocuSign signature</td><td valign="top">Select the DocuSign Mapping to support the signature request. See <a href="/integrations-store/collaboration/docusign-integration">DocuSign integration</a>.</td></tr></tbody></table>

***

## Activate or deactivate an automation

You can activate an automation so that it runs as configured. You can deactivate an automation to prevent it from being run.

* To activate an automation, select **Status** in the list or select the check box for the automation and then click **Activate**.
* To deactivate an automation, clear the **Status** selection or select the check box for the automation and then click **Deactivate**.

{% hint style="info" %}
To run an automation directly, click ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the automation row and then select **Run Now**.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

***

## Edit an automation

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Automation** tile. The list of automations is displayed.
3. Click ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the automation row and then select **Edit automation**.
4. Adjust the automation settings. See [Create an automation](#create-an-automation).

***

## Duplicate an automation

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Automation** tile. The list of automations is displayed.
3. Click ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the automation row and then select **Duplicate automation**.
4. Adjust the automation settings. See [Edit an automation](#edit-an-automation).

***

## Delete an automation

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Automation** tile. The list of automations is displayed.
3. Click ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) in the automation row and then select **Delete automation**.


# Users

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Users in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/users)

User roles determine their access to data within an organization. User roles are set at the module level within accounts in an organization. The following roles can be assigned:

* **Organization Admin**: Can add, delete, and edit accounts and modules in the organization.
* **Account Admin**: Can add and edit modules for the account. The user can access data for the specific account, but not other accounts in the organization.
* **Module Admin**: Can edit and configure the selected module.
* **Collaborator**: Can view records and submit forms.

Users can have access to multiple modules and accounts, and their role in each module or account can differ based on the access needed. For example, an Account Admin in the IT Division of a company might also need to access forms in the Fleet division. In this scenario, the Account Admin can be given the Collaborator role for the Fleet module outside the account they administer.&#x20;

Organization Admins, Account Admins, and Module Admins can invite and assign roles to other users within their allowed modules.&#x20;

## Invite users to a module

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
2. Click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i> for the account and module for which you want to invite user&#x73;**.**&#x20;
3. Click **Manage** in the **Users** tile.
4. Click **Invite users**. The **Invite users** pane is displayed.
5. For **Role**, select the appropriate role for the users:
   * **Organization Admin**: Can add, delete, and edit accounts and modules in the organization.
   * **Account Admin**: Can add and edit modules for the account. Data is accessible in the specific account, but not other accounts in the organization.
   * **Module Admin**: Can edit and configure the selected module.
   * **Collaborator**: Can view records and submit forms.
   * \<Custom role name>: Can perform the tasks configured in the custom role.

{% hint style="info" %}
Users do not have access to data across accounts with the Account Admin role. However, Account Admin access can be granted to a user for modules of multiple accounts to associate the user with multiple accounts.
{% endhint %}

8. Enter the email address of the user. To enter multiple user emails, press **Enter** to add each email on a new line.
9. Click **Save**.


# Limit user access to assets

You can configure the application to limit each user's access to only the assets that are assigned to them.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.&#x20;
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Collections** tile. The list of collections is displayed.
3. For the **People** collection, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Link to users**.
4. Click the **People** link to display the collection. The **Link to user** field is displayed in the collection.
5. Select each employee whose access you want to limit. The users details are displayed in the details pane.
6. Select **Link to user**, and then select the user account to link to the employee.
7. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Roles & Permissions**.&#x20;
8. [Create a custom user role](/settings/roles-and-permissions#create-a-custom-role) to define the tasks you want the employees to be able to perform. In the custom role, create a filter to limit the records the user can view:
   1. Click **Filter** next to **Limit record permissions**.&#x20;
   2. Select the **Collection** whose records you want to filter.
   3. For **Field**, select **Assigned To** (or the field the system is pulling from to assign the asset to a user).&#x20;
   4. Set **Value** to **Current User**.
   5. Click **Apply**.


# Roles & permissions

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Roles & Permissions in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/permissions)

Permissions dictate the actions that can be performed by users in each role within the Asset Panda platform. Role provide different levels of permissions to ensure users have the appropriate ability to perform their responsibilities efficiently. &#x20;

## Default and custom roles

The following default roles provide access levels that range from full administrative access to limited operational tasks.

* **Organization admin:** Maintains full control across all organization-wide settings and modules.
* **Account admin**: Manages accounts, modules, and associated user permissions within specific accounts.
* **Module admin**: Configures and manages specific modules and related data structures.
* **Collaborator**: Maintains limited access for viewing records, submitting forms, and interacting with data relevant to their tasks.&#x20;

Admins can add also custom roles to enable users to perform actions within their designated scope of the application.

***

## View roles & permissions

1. Select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Roles & Permissions**. The **Roles & Permissions** page includes the following sections:
   * **Predefined roles**: Displays the permissions and features available to the default roles.
   * **Custom roles**: Displays any custom roles you create, with options to add new roles.
2. To view the permissions for a specific predefined role, click <i class="fa-chevron-down">:chevron-down:</i> next to the role name.&#x20;
   * The **Permissions** table displays the system-defined permissions (View, Create, Edit, and/or Delete) for  each main application area (for example, Accounts, Modules, Collections, and Attachments).
   * The **Additional features** list identifies other actions users in the role can perform.

***

## Create a custom role

In Asset Panda, admins can create custom roles with specific permissions to determine who can perform tasks such as managing assets, approving requests, or viewing reports. These roles can be helpful if the predefined roles don’t accurately reflect your workflow. They also enable you to secure sensitive actions while providing an efficient workflow for your team.&#x20;

You can then assign the roles to users to ensure everyone has the correct access.

1. Select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Roles & Permissions**.&#x20;
2. Under **Custom roles**, click **Add**. The Custom role page is displayed.&#x20;
3. Enter the **Role name** and enter an optional **Description** to provide a summary of the role’s purpose.
4. Select the **Account** and **Module** to which the role applies. The relevant collections are displayed with check boxes to enable or disable access.
5. Under **Records permissions**, select the check boxes for each task you want users to be able to perform for records in the collection:
   * **View**: View the list of collection records.
   * **Create**: Add records to the collection.
   * **Edit**: Edit existing collection records.
   * **Delete**: Delete existing collection records.
   * **Forms-only access**: Access forms associated with the collection.
   * **Allow importing**: Import data to create or update collection records.
   * **Archive records**: Archive records in the collection.
6. To limit the fields accessible to the custom role, click **Limit** next to **Limit field permissions** and then perform one of the following tasks:
   * To limit the roles access to viewing fields associated with a saved view, select **Use locked saved views** and then click **Save**. Users assigned the role can only access the shared locked saved view, and hidden fields are enforced within that view.
   * To define the fields accessible to the role:
     1. Under **Option 2**, select the collection for which you want to limit field access.
     2. Select **View** and **Edit** check boxes to define the access for each field in the collection.
     3. Click **Save**.
7. To limit the records a user can view based on specified filters:
   1. Click **Filter** next to **Limit record permissions**.&#x20;
   2. Select the **Collection** whose records you want to filter.
   3. Select the **Field** to review, the **Conditions** to use when reviewing the filter, and the **Value** to limit the records displayed.
   4. To define multiple conditions, click **Add more** and then repeat steps a-c.
   5. If multiple conditions are defined, select whether the record must match **All** or **Any** of the conditions to be displayed.
   6. Click **Apply**.
8. To limit reservation permissions for collections:
   1. Select the **Reservations** toggle.
   2. Click **Collection settings**. The **Reservations permissions** page is displayed.
   3. For each collection, select the check box for each reservation task you want to enable for users (**View**, **Create**, **Edit**, or **Cancel**).
   4. Click **Save**.
9. Under **Resources**, select the check box for each task you want to enable for users (**View, Edit, Create,** or **Delete**) in each main application area.
10. To enable additional features, select the toggle next to the feature:
    * **Submit forms**: Allow users to bypass their add/edit record permissions and submit a form to create or update records.
    * **Import records**: Allow users to import new records or update existing records in bulk from an external spreadsheet.
    * **Export records**: Allow users to export data from a collection or saved view to an external file.
    * **Barcode/Matrix scanning**: Allow users to connect a third party device or the Asset Panda mobile app to scan barcodes.
    * **Barcode generator**: Allow users to design custom barcode sheets and labels.
    * **Creating kits**: Allow users to manage kits in a collection.
    * **Transfer consumables**: Allow users to transfer consumable records between destinations.
    * **Activity stream**: Allow users to view historical data and changes.
    * **Locking records:** Allow users to lock records to prevent other users from making any manual edits or automated changes to records.
11. Click **Save**. You can assign the role to new and existing users associated with the module. See [Invite users to a module](/settings/users#invite-users-to-a-module).&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
In Asset Panda Pro, forms are restricted to specific users based on sharing settings, which differs from version 1.0 behavior. User permissions also influence access to shared items, including dashboards and saved views.&#x20;

You should ensure that permissions and sharing settings are correctly configured to avoid access issues. You should also verify how these settings apply to forms for a seamless user experience.<br>
{% endhint %}

***

## Duplicate a role

You can duplicate an existing custom role to speed the creation of new roles.

1. Select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Roles & Permissions**.&#x20;
2. Under **Custom Roles**, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Duplicate**. The **Duplicate custom role** window is displayed.
3. Click **Include** next to each permission or feature you want to include in the cloned role.
4. Click **Duplicate**. The new role is displayed, with  " - Copy" added to the name.
5. Edit the role settings. See [Create a custom role](#create-a-custom-role).
6. Click **Save**.

***

## Export custom role details

You can export the permission configuration of a custom role in Excel, CSV, or PDF format to review, share, audit, and document role configurations outside the application.

1. Select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Roles & Permissions**.&#x20;
2. Under **Custom Roles**, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> and then select **Export**.
3. Select the export option based on the appropriate export format.
4. Select where to save the downloaded file.
5. Click **Save**. The file is saved to the designated location. The export includes the role summary information and the complete permission configuration for the selected custom role, grouped and organized by section. Empty permission sections are included wherever defined in the reference template, ensuring a complete and consistent view of the role.


# Preferences

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Preferences in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/preferences)

You can specify organization preferences that become the default for all accounts and modules within the organization. Users can overwrite the preferences in each account or in their personal settings.

## Logo&#x20;

You can incorporate your brand logo into the Asset Panda Pro platform to create a familiar and professional experience for your team. This visual consistency reinforces your brand identity, helping users quickly connect the platform to your business operations.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
The recommended logo size should be no more than 510 x 510 pixels. The maximum file size is 2MB.
{% endhint %}

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Preferences**.
2. Under **Logo**, click **Edit**.
3. Select the logo and click **Open**. You can preview the logo once the upload is complete.
4. Click **Save.**

{% hint style="info" %}
To remove the selected logo, click <i class="fa-trash">:trash:</i>.
{% endhint %}

***

## Ursa<sup>AI</sup>

You can enable Ursa<sup>AI</sup> to enable users to select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd) Ursa<sup>AI</sup> to use the built-in AI assistant to answer questions, build workflows, and find assets by describing what you need. See the [Ursa<sup>AI</sup> Overview](broken://pages/l2LxlJf5hlpvFzo9iZM5).

***

## Use 3rd party scanning devices

You can specify whether users can connect to external scanning devices to scan barcodes to be processed in the application.

***

## Time & Region

You can specify the default time zone and time format applied to the entire organization to ensures that everyone sees dates and times consistently.

* **Time Zone**: Select the default time zone for the organization.
* **Time Format**: Select the default time format to be used across the organization.

{% hint style="info" %}

* Users can override the default time settings in their profile to ensure that times reflect their local time zone. See [Manage your profile](/get-started/manage-your-profile).
* Exports and reports follow the organization’s default time zone, making it easier to reconcile data across different regions.
  {% endhint %}

***

## Date format/Date separator

You can change how you want dates to be displayed across your organization.

* **Date Format**: Specify how date values are arranged (for example, **Day First**, **Month First**, or **Year First**).
* **Date Separator**: Specify the character used to separate day, month, and year values (**Dash** or **Slash**).

***

## "From" name

You can specify the name that is displayed in the **From** line when you send emails from the application. By default, the value is "Asset Panda Pro", but you can change it to your organization name for better brand visibility and email management.

The name specified here is applied to all system emails, including the following:

* User invitations and password resets
* Automation and workflow notifications
* Email-based record creation responses
* System alerts and updates

***

## Welcome email

You can customize the email that is sent to new users who are invited to use your Asset Panda Pro environment. This enables you to welcome your new users with your corporate branding and voice.

Click **Customize** to define the subject and the body of the email to be sent to new users.&#x20;

***

## Fiscal month start

You can select the fiscal month start for your organization. This setting determines how depreciation is calculated across years, quarters, and months to ensure that your financial reporting aligns with your accounting periods.

***

## Session Timeout/Idle Timeout

You can configure the application to automatically log out periodically or after periods of inactivity to support your organization's security protocols:

* **Session Timeout**: Automatically log users out of the application after the configured duration (4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 7 days, or 30 days), regardless of their activity. You can also select **Never** to keep user sessions active indefinitely, providing more flexibility for specific internal workflows
* **Idle Timeout**: Automatically log users out of the application after a period of inactivity (15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 4 hours, or 8 hours). You can select **Never** to never log users out after an inactive period.

{% hint style="info" %}

* A warning message is displayed before any session or idle logout, with a countdown to enable user action.
* The timeout settings apply to both the web and mobile applications.
  {% endhint %}

***

## Currency

You can define a primary currency symbol and formatting standard (position, separators, and precision) for the account.

* **Symbol**: Select the symbol to be displayed for currency values.
* **Symbol position**: Select whether the currency symbol is displayed before (**Prefix**) or after (**Suffix**) the value.
* **Decimal separator**: Specify the character (period or comma) to display between whole number and decimal portions of the value.
* **Thousands separator**: Specify the character (period, comma, space, or no separator) to groups sets of three digits in larger values.
* **No. of decimals**: Specify the number of digits to display after the decimal separator.

The selections are applied to the preview in the view.


# API configuration

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit API Configuration in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/api-configuration)

Access our API Documentation at Asset Panda's [API Documentation Site](https://docs.api.assetpanda.app/docs/getting-started).&#x20;


# Templates Guides

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Templates in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/templates)

When adding new module into your organization, users can browse the template library to start with a pre-made collection of forms and saved views with sample data.&#x20;


# Agency Asset Register template

The **Agency Asset Register** template illustrates how agencies manage assets, audits, operations, and public safety equipment in a single system of record.

***

## Template structure

The template module is pre-configured to reflect how public agencies operate:

* **Collections**: One shared list of agency Assets along with collections for People, Departments, Locations, and Categories
* **Dashboards**: Clear separation of Finance, Operations, Public Safety, and Audit responsibilities
  * **Finance - Asset Oversight**: Displays information on capital assets.
  * **Operations - Asset Management**: Review the **Assigned Assets** and **Unassigned Assets** widgets to identify the assets that are in use vs. available.

    <div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="info" class="hint hint-info"><p>No financial data is exposed.</p></div>
  * **Public Safety - Equipment Register**: Displays information only for public safety equipment.
* **Saved views**:
  * **Unassigned Assets**: Assets filtered by Status set to Unassigned
  * **Assigned Assets**: Assets filtered by Status set to Assigned
  * **Capital Asset Register**: Assets filtered by Capital Asset set to Yes
  * **Public Safety Equipment Register**: Assets filtered by Asset Category set to Public Safety Equipment
* **Forms**:
  * Assign Asset: Used to assign a single asset
  * Inspection Check:&#x20;
  * Capitalize Asset
  * Dispose  Surplus Asset
  * Chain of Custody Transfer: Used to transfer the chain of custody of an asset
  * Return Asset
* Controls aligned to government expectations (GASB, grants, inspections, custody)

***

### Public Safety (Readiness & Risk)

Estimated time: 5 minutes

Step 8: Open the Public Safety Dashboard

1. Navigate to Public Safety – Equipment Readiness.

What to notice:

* Only public safety equipment is visible
* This view is isolated from IT and facilities assets

***

Step 9: Review Overdue Inspections

1. Open Overdue Inspections.
2. Select Ballistic Vest.

What to notice:

* Inspection dates drive risk visibility
* Equipment can appear compliant or overdue

***

Step 10: Perform an Inspection

1. Open the Inspection Check form.
2. Update inspection dates and readiness status.
3. Submit the form.

What to notice:

* The dashboard updates immediately
* Inspection history is preserved

***

Step 11: Chain of Custody

1. Open Chain-of-Custody Required.
2. Select a public safety asset.
3. Use Chain of Custody Transfer.

What to notice:

* Custody changes are explicit
* Responsibility is never ambiguous

***

### Audit & Oversight

Estimated time: 2–3 minutes

Step 12: Auditor View

1. Switch to an Auditor – Read Only user (if provided).
2. Open Finance – Asset Oversight.
3. Review the Capital Asset Register.

What to notice:

* No edit or action controls are available
* All data is visible and consistent

***

Step 13: Automated Audit Delivery

This environment is configured to:

* Automatically deliver the Capital Asset Register to auditors monthly
* Preserve a consistent audit cadence

What to notice:

* Auditors do not need to chase reports
* Finance retains governance and control

***

What This Trial Demonstrates

* One system shared across departments
* Clear separation of duties
* Enforced depreciation and capital controls
* Operational accountability
* Public safety readiness and defensibility
* Audit confidence without manual effort

***

Inviting Other Departments into the Trial

One of the most valuable ways to experience this trial is to invite colleagues from other departments and apply the role-based user templates that have been preconfigured.

This allows you to see how the same system of record presents very different experiences depending on responsibility and risk.

How to Invite Another User

1. Navigate to User Management / Users.
2. Invite a new user using their email address.
3. Assign one of the following user templates:
4. Finance Admin – Fixed Assets
5. Operations Manager
6. Public Safety Supervisor
7. Auditor – Read Only

Once invited, ask the user to log in and land on their default dashboard.

***

What to Observe When Switching Roles

Finance Admin

* Sees depreciation, capitalization, and audit-focused views
* Can correct asset values without touching operational data
* Lands on a governance-focused dashboard

Operations Manager

* Sees assignment, location, and availability
* Cannot view or edit financial data
* Experiences the system as a day-to-day operational tool

Public Safety Supervisor

* Sees only public safety equipment
* Focuses on inspections, readiness, and chain of custody
* Is isolated from IT, facilities, and finance noise

Auditor (Read Only)

* Has full visibility but no ability to change data
* Accesses locked registers and compliance views
* Receives scheduled audit reports automatically

***

Why This Matters

Public agencies rarely operate with a single stakeholder. This trial is intentionally designed to show:

* How separation of duties is enforced
* How the same data supports different roles without duplication
* How governance, operations, and safety coexist in one platform

Inviting additional departments into the trial often surfaces the most meaningful conversations.

***

Next Steps

If this were your production environment, typical next steps include:

* Importing your full asset inventory
* Enabling barcode or mobile workflows
* Adding approval and automation rules
* Expanding to additional departments or agencies

&#x20;


# Asset Management template

The **Asset Management** template provides a simple example of how a company might track equipment, assign assets to employees, monitor locations, and maintain a clear activity history.

The template enables you to explore the following processes:

* Asset tracking and lifecycle management
* Assigning assets to employees
* Monitoring equipment locations
* Reviewing activity history
* Viewing operational dashboards

***

## Template structure

* **Collections**: The template environment includes the following core collections.
  * **Assets**: Stores all equipment being tracked, including the following information:
    * Asset type
    * Department ownership
    * Location
    * Assigned employee
    * Purchase information
    * Warranty expiration
  * **People**: Stores individuals who may be responsible for assets. People can be assigned equipment, allowing organizations to track who currently has an asset.
  * **Departments**: Organize assets by team or business unit.
  * **Locations**: Represent where assets are stored or used.
  * **Activity Logs**: Capture the history of actions performed on assets, including assignments, transfers, status changes, and maintenance update. Each activity log entry includes:

    * Asset involved
    * Employee responsible
    * Date of the action
    * Notes describing the event

    This creates a clear audit trail showing how assets move through the organization.
* **Dashboards**: The **Asset Management Overview** dashboard provides a high-level summary to give organizations operational visibility without requiring users to search through records.
  * **Total Assets**: Shows the total number of assets currently tracked.
  * **Assets by Status**: Displays the distribution of asset lifecycle stages.
  * **Assets by Department**: Shows which teams currently manage the most assets.
  * **Assigned Assets**: Lists employees who currently have equipment assigned.
  * **Available Assets**: Displays equipment ready for use.
* **Saved views**: Organize assets into useful operational lists:
  * **Available Assets**: Displays assets that are currently available for use.
  * **Assigned Assets**: Shows equipment currently assigned to employees.
  * **Warehouse & Storage Assets**: Lists assets currently located in storage areas.
  * **New Assets**: Displays assets purchased within the last year.

***

## Explore the template

### View an asset

1. Open the Assets collection to view the equipment currently tracked in the system. Each record displays the following key information:
   * Asset name and type
   * Department ownership
   * Location
   * Assigned employee
   * Lifecycle status
2. Click an asset to review the full asset details, including purchase details, warranty information, assignment status, and activity history.

***

### Assign an asset

Asset Panda allows organizations to track which employee is responsible for equipment.

1. Open an asset record.
2. Edit the **Assigned To** field.
3. Select an employee from the **People** collection.
4. Save the record. When an asset is assigned, the system updates the **Status** field to **Assigned**.

***

### Return an asset

1. Open the asset record.
2. Clear the **Assigned To** field.
3. Save the record. The system updates the **Status** field to **Available**.

***

## Template automations

The following automations illustrate how Asset Panda Pro can help organizations reduce manual data management.

* **Assignment Automation**: When an employee is assigned to an asset, the system automatically sets the asset status to Assigned.
* **Return Automation**: When an asset is no longer assigned to a user, the system automatically updates the status to Available.

***

## Explore the template

Perform the following tasks to explore the template module:

* Create additional assets
* Assign equipment to employees
* Move assets between locations
* Add activity log entries
* Build new saved views
* Create custom dashboardss


# Equipment Maintenance Tracking template

The **Equipment Maintenance Tracking** template demonstrates how organizations can manage operational equipment, maintenance activities, and calibration schedules using Asset Panda Pro.

This template shows how to perform the following tasks:

* Track operational equipment across departments and facilities
* Maintain a complete service and calibration history
* Automatically identify overdue or upcoming service requirements
* Provide operational visibility through dashboards and reporting

The environment has been preconfigured with sample equipment records and maintenance data so you can explore how the system functions.

***

## Template structure

* **Collections**: This environment uses connected collections to manage equipment checkout.
  * **Equipment**: Stores all shared equipment that can be checked out, with the following information:
    * Equipment identification information
    * Department ownership
    * Physical location
    * Operational status
    * Calibration requirements and schedules
    * Maintenance history
  * **Vendors**: Tracks service providers and calibration vendors that perform maintenance work on equipment.
  * **Locations**: Represent physical locations where equipment is normally stored or used.
  * **Departments**: Identify the organizational units responsible for equipment.
  * **Service Logs**: Records all maintenance activity performed on equipment to create a permanent service history for each piece of equipment. This collection includes the following information:
    * Service type (Calibration, Repair, Maintenance)
    * Service date
    * Technician or vendor performing the work
    * Calibration results
    * Service notes
    * Service cost
    * Next calibration due date
* **Dashboard**: The **Equipment Maintenance Overview** dashboard helps maintenance teams monitor equipment health across the organization. The dashboard includes the following information:
  * Counts of overdue calibrations, upcoming service requirements, and equipment currently under repair
  * Distribution of equipment by department
  * Tables listing equipment requiring service
* **Saved Views**: Enable operations teams to focus on the equipment requiring attention:
  * Overdue Calibrations: Equipment that requires immediate service
  * Due Soon: Equipment approaching calibration deadlines
  * Under Repair: Equipment currently undergoing repair
  * Safety Critical Equipment: Equipment marked as safety critical.
* **Forms**: The **Log Calibration**: Enables users to log calibration results.
* **User Roles**: The system supports different roles across operations teams.
  * Operations Manager: Can manage equipment records and monitor maintenance activity.
  * Technician: Logs service events and maintenance work.
  * Executive Viewer: Can view dashboards and operational reports without modifying data.

### Extend the system

Asset Panda can support a wide range of operational asset management use cases, including:

* Tool and equipment checkout systems
* Fleet and vehicle maintenance tracking
* IT asset management
* Facility equipment maintenance
* Safety and inspection tracking

Organizations can customize collections, workflows, and dashboards to match their operational needs.

***

## Equipment Maintenance workflow

The platform tracks maintenance activity using a simple operational workflow.

1. **Equipment is registered.** Equipment records contain key information such as operational status, location, and calibration requirements.
2. When maintenance or calibration occurs, a Service Log record is created to store the following information:
   * The work that was performed
   * When the work occurred
   * Who performed the work
   * When the next service is required.
3. Automations continuously monitor calibration schedules and service deadlines and automatically updates the equipment status if service becomes due or overdue.
   * **Calibration Due Soon**: When a calibration due date falls within the next 30 days, the system automatically updates the equipment's calibration status to **Due Soon** to enable maintenance teams to schedule service.
   * **Calibration Overdue**: If the calibration due date passes, the system updates the equipment's calibration status to **Overdue** to indicate that the equipment requires immediate attention.
   * When a new calibration service is logged and a future calibration date is entered, the system automatically resets the calibration status to **Current** to ensure that the equipment health status reflects the most recent service activity.

***

## Suggested asctions

* Open an equipment record and review its service history.
* Create a new Service Log for a piece of equipment.
* Enter a calibration due date within the next 30 days and observe how the system updates the equipment status.
* Explore the Equipment Maintenance Overview dashboard.
* Review the saved views to identify equipment requiring service.


# Equipment Checkout template

The **Equipment Checkout** template illustrates how organizations can track shared equipment, manage checkout workflows, and maintain clear accountability for tools and devices across teams.

The module is preconfigured with sample equipment, employees, and checkout history so you can explore how the workflow operates.

***

## Template structure

* **Collections**: This environment uses connected collections to manage equipment checkout.
  * **Equipment**: Stores all shared equipment that can be checked out, with the following information:
    * &#x20;Equipment identification information
    * Department ownership
    * Storage location
    * Current status
    * Assigned employee (if checked out)
    * Expected return date
  * Employees: Stores individuals who may borrow equipment. These records enable equipment to be assigned to specific individuals.
  * Checkout Logs: Records every checkout and return event to create a complete history of equipment usage. Each log entry records:
    * Equipment that was borrowed
    * Employee who borrowed the equipment
    * Checkout date
    * Expected return date
    * Return date
    * Equipment condition
  * Locations: Represent where equipment is normally stored
  * Departments: Identify the teams that are responsible for equipment.
* **Dashboard**: The **Equipment Checkout Overview** dashboard enables supervisors to monitor equipment usage across the organization, including the following information:
  * Available equipment
  * Equipment currently checked out (graph and list views)
  * Overdue equipment (graph and list views)
  * Equipment distribution by department
* **Saved Views**: Enable operations teams to identify equipment that requires attention:
  * **Available Equipment**: Shows equipment ready to be checked out.
  * **Checked Out Equipment**: Shows equipment currently assigned to employees.
  * **Overdue Equipment**: Shows equipment that has not been returned on time.
  * **Equipment Under Maintenance**: Shows assets temporarily unavailable due to repair.
* **Forms**:&#x20;
  * **Check Out Equipment**: Enables users to check out equipment
  * **Return Equipment**: Enables users to return equipment
* **User Roles**: Simulate real operational workflows:
  * Equipment Manager: Manages equipment inventory and oversees checkout activity.
  * Technician / Employee: Checks out and returns equipment using forms.
  * Operations Viewer: Monitors equipment availability through dashboards and reports.

### Extend the system

This template configuration can support many real-world use cases, including:

* Tool room management
* IT device checkout
* Construction equipment tracking
* Field inspection equipment pools
* Warehouse asset management

Organizations can customize the system to track additional asset types, automate approval workflows, and generate operational reports.

***

## Equipment Checkout Workflow

The system tracks equipment usage using a simple workflow.

1. Equipment records store asset information including type, location, and operational status.
2. When an employee borrows equipment, a checkout record is created using the Check Out Equipment form. The system records the following information:
   * Employee receiving the equipment
   * Checkout date
   * Expected return date
3. Automations update the Equipment record to reflect that the asset is currently checked out. The equipment record will display the following information:
   * Assigned employee
   * Checkout date
   * Expected return date
   * Status: Checked Out
4. When equipment is returned, a Return Equipment form is submitted and the system updates the equipment record's **Status** value to **Available**.

***

## Overdue Equipment Monitoring

This workspace includes automated monitoring that identifies late equipment returns. Each day, the system checks the equipment currently checked out and its expected return date. If the expected return date has passed, the system automatically updates the equipment **Status** to **Overdue**. This allows operations teams to quickly identify equipment that requires follow-up.

***

## Suggested actions

* Open the **Equipment** collection and review the available equipment records.
* Use the **Check Out Equipment** form to assign equipment to an employee.
* Submit a **Return Equipment** form to return equipment to inventory.
* Review the **Checkout Logs** to see the history of equipment transactions.
* Open the **Equipment Checkout Overview** dashboard to monitor equipment availability.


# Fleet Operations template

The **Fleet Operations** template demonstrates how organizations can manage vehicles, drivers, and maintenance activity using Asset Panda Pro.

This template shows how organizations can centralize fleet operations, improve visibility, and manage vehicles proactively.

• Tracking vehicle assignments\
• Monitoring inspection and registration dates\
• Managing maintenance history\
• Understanding fleet availability

***

## Template structure

* **Collections**: The following connected collections work together to manage fleet operations:
  * **Vehicles**: Stores all fleet assets with the following key operational information:
    * Vehicle identification details
    * Department ownership
    * Assigned driver
    * Storage location
    * Current mileage
    * Inspection schedule
    * Maintenance history
  * **Drivers**: Tracks employees authorized to operate vehicles, including the following information:
    * Driver name
    * Department
    * License number and expiration date
    * Contact information
    * Status
  * **Maintenance Logs**: Tracks the complete service timeline for every vehicle, including the following information:
    * Vehicle serviced
    * Service type
    * Service date
    * Vendor or service provider
    * Service cost
    * Mileage at service
    * Next service due date
  * **Departments**: Identify the teams that operate fleet vehicles.
  * **Locations**: Represent where vehicles are typically stored to enable fleet managers to quickly locate vehicles.
* **Dashboards**: The Fleet Operations Overview dashboard provides a real-time summary of fleet activity, including the following information:

  * Vehicles currently in use
  * Available vehicles
  * Upcoming inspections
  * Lists of active vehicles
  * Maintenance schedules
  * Fleet distribution by department

  This dashboard allows fleet managers to quickly identify operational issues.
* **Saved views**: Help fleet managers quickly monitor the fleet.
  * **Available Vehicles**: Displays vehicles that are ready to be assigned or deployed.
  * **Vehicles In Use**: Displays vehicles currently assigned to drivers to help managers understand fleet utilization.
  * **Maintenance Due Soon**: Displays vehicles with upcoming inspection or maintenance dates to enable maintenance teams to proactively schedule service.
  * **Fleet by Department**: Displays vehicles grouped by department to help organizations understand how fleet resources are distributed.
* **User Roles**: The template includes several user roles that simulate real operational workflows:
  * **Fleet Manager**: Responsible for managing the fleet, with the following permissions:
    * Managing vehicles
    * Recording maintenance activity
    * Monitoring inspections
    * Viewing dashboards and reports
  * **Driver**: Can view fleet information and see which vehicles are assigned. Drivers do not modify vehicle records directly.
  * **Operations Viewer**: Operations leadership can view dashboards and reports without editing data. This allows supervisors and leadership to monitor fleet operations.

***

## Vehicle lifecycle workflow

The system supports the full lifecycle of a fleet vehicle.

1. **Vehicle Registration**: Vehicles are first registered in the Vehicles collection. Each vehicle record includes the following information:
   * Vehicle ID
   * VIN
   * License plate
   * Assigned department&#x20;
   * Assigned driver
   * Inspection schedule
   * Operational status
2. **Vehicle Assignment**: Vehicles can be assigned to drivers responsible for operating the vehicle. This assignment allows organizations to maintain accountability and quickly identify who is responsible for each vehicle.
3. **Maintenance Tracking**: When a vehicle receives service, a record is created in the Maintenance Logs collection with the following information:

   * Type of service performed
   * Service provider
   * Service cost
   * Mileage at service
   * Next service due date

   The vehicle record automatically displays the maintenance history.
4. **Inspection Monitoring**: Each vehicle includes a **Next Inspection Due** date. The system automatically monitors inspection dates and flags vehicles whose inspections have passed.

   When a vehicle inspection date has passed, the system automatically updates the vehicle status to **Inspection Overdue**.

***

## Suggested actions

* Open the **Vehicles** collection and review vehicle records.
* Assign a different driver to a vehicle.
* Open a vehicle record and review its maintenance history.
* Create a new Maintenance Log entry for a vehicle.
* Review the **Fleet Operations** dashboard to see fleet activity.
* Explore the **Saved Views** to understand how vehicles are organized.

***

## Example use cases

This system can support many real-world fleet operations including:

* Municipal fleet management
* Utility and public works vehicles
* Field service fleets
* Construction vehicle tracking
* Emergency response vehicle monitoring

Organizations can extend this system to track additional assets, automate maintenance reminders, and generate fleet performance reports.


# IT Asset Management (ITAM) Trial Guide

Welcome to your IT Asset Management trial. This guided walkthrough is designed to help you experience real-world ITAM workflows in under 20 minutes.

***

### What You’ll Experience

·      Device inventory visibility

·      Check-in / check-out workflows

·      Warranty risk monitoring

·      Depreciation & financial visibility

·      Role-based access control

You do not need to configure anything. The environment is pre-built.

***

### Review the IT Dashboard

Navigate to: Dashboard → IT Manager – Device Overview

Observe:

·      Total Devices

·      Devices Assigned

·      In Stock Inventory

·      Warranty Risk – Next 60 Days

·      Device Distribution by Department

·      Total Active Asset Book Value

Ask yourself: - How many devices are currently deployed? - Where is financial exposure concentrated? - Are any devices approaching warranty expiration?

***

### Assign a Device to a User

Navigate to: Assets → Run Form → Check-Out Device

1\.        Select a device that is “In Stock”

2\.        Choose a user from the dropdown

3\.        Submit the form

Observe: - Status updates to Assigned - “Currently Assigned” toggles to Yes - Activity log updates automatically

Return to the dashboard and confirm the Assigned metric updates.

***

### Check the Device Back In

Navigate to: Assets → Run Form → Check-In Device

1\.        Select the same device

2\.        Submit the form

Observe: - Status returns to In Stock - “Currently Assigned” toggles to No - Device moves out of Assigned Devices view

This demonstrates clean lifecycle control.

***

### Review Warranty Exposure

Navigate to: Saved Views → Warranty Expiring in 60 Days

This view shows devices with warranty expiration within the next 60 days.

The system also sends a daily summary report to IT leadership.

Consider: - Which departments are most exposed? - Should these devices be refreshed?

***

### View Financial Impact

Switch to the Finance Viewer role (if invited).

In this trial environment, Finance access is controlled at the collection level rather than individual field-level permissions. Finance users have read-only access to Assets and can review financial and depreciation data without modifying operational records.

Review key financial fields on several assets: - Asset Cost - Date Placed in Service - Useful Life - Current Book Value - Depreciation Expense

Navigate to the dashboard and observe the “Total Active Asset Book Value” metric.

This demonstrates alignment between IT operations and finance while maintaining read-only financial oversight.

***

### Simulate Audit Oversight

Switch to the Read-Only Auditor role.

Notice: - Full visibility across collections - No ability to add, edit, delete, or run forms - Clean separation of operational control and oversight

Even without field-level restrictions, role-based collection permissions ensure governance and audit transparency.

This reflects audit-ready oversight without operational interference.

***

### Invite a Colleague

Invite another team member and assign them a permission template:

·      IT Technician

·      Finance Viewer

·      Read-Only Auditor

Observe how the interface changes based on role.

***

### What This Trial Demonstrates

·      Centralized device inventory at scale

·      Assignment accountability

·      Warranty lifecycle monitoring

·      Financial asset tracking with depreciation

·      Role-based governance

***

### Next Steps

If this workflow reflects your environment, consider:

·      Importing a larger device list

·      Connecting to MDM (Intune, Jamf)

·      Expanding to peripherals or network equipment

·      Configuring refresh-cycle automation

Thank you for exploring the ITAM trial.


# Ursa

Ursa<sup>AI</sup> is Asset Panda’s built-in artificial intelligence assistant designed to help you work faster, configure smarter, and uncover insights from your asset data without needing to navigate complex menus or remember where everything lives.

Available on **web, iOS**, and **Android**, Ursa acts like an AI coworker inside your account, ready to answer questions, build workflows, and help you find exactly what you need.

***

## Ursa capabilities

Ursa allows you to interact with Asset Panda using conversation instead of navigating across menus and modules. This helps surface answers and guides you through configuration.

{% hint style="info" %}
To get the most from Ursa:

* Be specific in your request
* Use clear descriptions
* Review generated automations before activating
* Ask follow-up questions, if needed
  {% endhint %}

Ursa can be helpful in the following scenarios:

<table><thead><tr><th width="197.19140625" valign="top">Scenario</th><th width="330.66796875" valign="top">Description</th><th valign="top">Example</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top">Learn how to use the app</td><td valign="top"><p>Ursa provides instant guidance for common tasks, including:</p><ul><li>Creating a form or automation</li><li>Inviting a user</li><li>Scanning a barcode</li><li>Filtering records</li><li>Configuring settings</li></ul><p>Instead of searching through menus or documentation, simply ask Ursa your question.</p></td><td valign="top"><em>How do I filter my collection?</em></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Create and edit automations or forms with natural language</td><td valign="top"><p>Describe the workflow you want, and Ursa will help build it. </p><ul><li>Create automation triggers</li><li>Define conditions</li><li>Configure notification actions</li><li>Help modify existing automations</li></ul><div data-gb-custom-block data-tag="hint" data-style="warning" class="hint hint-warning"><p>Always review automation details before saving.</p></div></td><td valign="top"><p><em>When a device is marked Lost, notify IT.</em><br></p><p><em>Create an automation to notify managers when inspections are overdue.</em><br><br><em>Help me build a new equipment intake form.</em></p></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Generate filters and locate records</td><td valign="top"><p>Ursa can create filters on collections to narrow results more quickly.</p><p>Ursa builds the filter logic so you don’t have to manually configure it.</p></td><td valign="top"><p><em>How many laptops are assigned to Denver?</em></p><p></p><p><em>Who currently has asset 49283?</em><br></p><p><em>Which assets are overdue for check-in?</em><br></p><p><em>Show devices that haven’t synced in 30 days.</em></p></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Create collections with suggested fields</td><td valign="top"><p>When setting up a new collection, Ursa can suggest helpful fields based on your use case. This speeds configuration and reduces setup errors.</p><p>Ursa may suggest fields like:</p><ul><li>VIN</li><li>Mileage</li><li>Driver</li><li>Insurance Expiration</li><li>Maintenance Interval</li></ul></td><td valign="top"><em>Create a fleet tracking collection.</em></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Create categories with recommended fields</td><td valign="top"><p>Ursa can assist in creating categories and recommending relevant fields to ensure each asset type captures the right information.</p><p>Ursa may suggest:</p><ul><li>Battery Health (Laptop)</li><li>Rack Location (Server)</li><li>Monitor Count (Desktop)</li></ul></td><td valign="top"><em>Create categories for Laptop, Desktop, and Server.</em></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Create sample records for testing</td><td valign="top"><p>Ursa can generate test records so you can build and test workflows safely:</p><ul><li>Validate dashboards</li><li>Test automations</li><li>Preview reports</li><li>Experiment before importing live data</li></ul></td><td valign="top"></td></tr></tbody></table>

{% hint style="warning" %}

* Automation changes are not activated until you confirm and save them. You should review any Ursa suggestions before saving changes.
* Ursa follows your account permissions and only accesses data you are allowed to see.
  {% endhint %}


# Ursa Frequently Asked Questions

Answers to common questions about UrsaAI in Asset Panda Pro.

### What can Ursa do?

Ursa is a versatile AI assistant that can help with the following tasks:

* Answer questions about your data, collections, and account
* Create forms based on natural language descriptions
* Build automation rules from plain language instructions
* Filter collection records by describing what you want to see
* Process uploaded files (images, PDFs, spreadsheets, and more)
* Help set up your account structure through the Account Builder
* Accept voice input for hands-free interaction

### Is my data safe with Ursa?

<mark style="color:$success;">**Yes.**</mark> Ursa operates entirely within your organization's data environment. Your data is not shared with other organizations or used to train AI models. Ursa can only access data that belongs to your organization, and conversations are private to the user who created them.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Administrators can review conversations through the AI chat logs.
{% endhint %}

### Does Ursa remember previous conversations?

<mark style="color:$success;">**Yes.**</mark> Ursa maintains context within a conversation, so you can ask follow-up questions without repeating yourself. You can also access your full conversation history to resume previous discussions. See [Chat conversations](/ursa/ursa-chat/manage-chat-conversations).

### How do I report an issue with Ursa?

* **Use the feedback buttons**: Click the thumbs down button on any unhelpful response. This sends feedback directly to the team.
* **Contact support**: Contact Asset Panda support for technical issues or persistent problems.

Your feedback helps improve Ursa's accuracy and usefulness. See [Ursa Chat](/ursa/ursa-chat).

### Can I use Ursa on mobile?

<mark style="color:$success;">**Yes.**</mark> Ursa is available on the Asset Panda Pro mobile app so you can ask questions and interact with your data on the go.

### What file types can I upload?

Ursa supports a wide range of file types including:&#x20;

* Images (PNG, JPG, GIF, BMP, TIFF, WebP)
* Documents (PDF, DOC, DOCX, TXT, RTF)
* Spreadsheets (XLS, XLSX, CSV)
* Data files (JSON, XML, MD).&#x20;

You can upload up to three files in each message, with a maximum size of 50 MB per file.

### What languages does Ursa support?

The Asset Panda Pro interface supports over 20 languages, including:

* English, Spanish, French, German, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch
* Japanese, Korean, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional)
* Arabic, Hindi, Bengali, Urdu
* Russian, Polish, Turkish, Thai, Vietnamese, Indonesian

Ursa will respond in the same language you use to write your message. For the best results, use clear, simple phrasing regardless of language.

{% hint style="info" %}
Voice input is currently optimized for English.
{% endhint %}

### How do I turn off Ursa for my organization?

Only administrators can disable Ursa. See [Ursa Administrator tasks](/ursa/ursa-administrator-tasks#enable-or-disable-ursaai).

### Can I see what my team is asking Ursa?

<mark style="color:$success;">**Yes.**</mark> Administrators can view all AI conversations through the AI chat logs. See [Ursa Administrator tasks](/ursa/ursa-administrator-tasks#enable-or-disable-ursaai).


# Ursa Administrator tasks

## Enable or disable Ursa<sup>AI</sup>

Administrators control whether Ursa is available to users in the organization.

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Preferences**.
2. Select the **Ursa**<sup>**AI**</sup> toggle. Ursa is enabled for all users in your organization. Users can select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd) **Ursa** to use the assistant to answer questions, build workflows, and find assets.&#x20;
3. To disable Ursa, deselect the **Ursa**<sup>**AI**</sup> toggle. The Ursa interface is no longer accessible to users.

{% hint style="info" %}
If Ursa is disabled, the existing conversation history and logs are preserved and are made available if you re-enable the assistant.
{% endhint %}

***

## View Ursa chat logs

Administrators can review all Ursa conversations that occur within the organization. This is useful for monitoring usage, reviewing response quality, and ensuring Ursa is used appropriately. This can help you identify common questions that could be addressed through better account configuration, training materials, or documentation.

Each log entry contains the following information:

* **Session details**: Date, time, and duration of the conversation
* **User information**: User who initiated the conversation
* **User messages**: User prompts and questions
* **Ursa responses**: Full text of Ursa's replies
* **Feedback ratings**: Thumbs up or thumbs down feedback provided by the user.&#x20;

1. In the navigation pane, select ![Tools icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F86r2Hf7sGhCvOUQwkZEL%2FTools.jpg?alt=media\&token=77c3c6a1-287f-49ac-8991-c4f215e89d32) **Tools** > **Activity stream**.
2. Select **AI Logs**.
3. To locate logs that contain specific keywords, enter the search term in the **Search** field.
4. To filter the log based on specified criteria, click <i class="fa-filter">:filter:</i>. See [Filter the Activity Stream](/tools/activity-stream).
5. To view the details of a conversation, click **View details** in the conversation row.


# Ursa automations

Build automations with Ursa

Ursa supports the full range of automation capabilities in Asset Panda Pro. See [Manage automations](/settings/account-management/automations).

Ursa can create automation rules for your collections based on natural language descriptions. Instead of manually configuring triggers, conditions, and actions, you can describe what you want to automate and let Ursa build it for you.

## Create an automation with Ursa

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Automation** tile. The list of automations is displayed.
3. In the navigation pane, select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd). The chat window is displayed.
4. In the chat input, enter the automation you want to create, including the following details:

   * **Trigger:** Event that starts the automation
   * **Conditions** (optional): Filters or criteria that must be met. If you only want the automation to run under certain circumstances, describe those conditions clearly.
   * **Action**: The tasks that should occur when the automation event occurs
   * **Recipients**: If applicable, the individuals (email addresses or role names) who should receive notifications or reports
   * **Schedule**: For scheduled automations, specify the frequency, day, and time.

   See [Example prompts](#example-prompts).\
   \
   Ursa generates the automation configuration and presents it for your review.

{% hint style="info" %}
For best results, describe one automation rule at a time.
{% endhint %}

6. [Review and customize the generated automation](#review-and-customize-the-generated-automation).

#### Example prompts

> *Send an email notification when a laptop's warranty expiration date passes.*

> *When a new record is created in the People collection, create a corresponding record in the Equipment Assignments collection.*

> *Every Monday at 9 AM, send a report of all assets with a **Status** of Needs Maintenance.*

> *When a record is updated and the **Status** field changes to Retired, update the **Available** field to No.*

> *Send a Slack notification when a form is submitted for an equipment check-out.*

> *One day before an audit start date, send an email reminder to the audit team.*

***

## Review and customize the generated automation

1. Review the trigger, conditions, and actions.

{% hint style="info" %}
The automation is created with a status of **Inactive** by default, so it won't run until you activate it.
{% endhint %}

2. To modify the automation, perform one of the following tasks:
   * Ask Ursa to modify specific parts. For example, *"Change the trigger to weekly instead of daily."*
   * Open the automation in the automation editor to make manual adjustments.
3. When the automation is correct, select the **Status** toggle for the automation to activate it.


# Ursa forms

Create forms using Ursa

Instead of adding individual fields manually to a form in the form builder, you can describe what you need and let Ursa create the form for you. You can then fine-tune it in the form builder in a faster process.

Ursa can create the following form elements:

* Complete form with all necessary fields and field types (for example, text, date, drop-down, or number)
* Form layout and field ordering
* Field validation rules

### Create a form with Ursa

1. Navigate to the collection or forms page where you want to create a form.
2. In the navigation pane, select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd). The chat window is displayed.
3. Describe the form you want to create, including the following details:

   * **Purpose**: Describe how the form will be used (for example, to check in returned equipment)
   * **Fields**: List the specific data you want to collect.
   * **Field types**: Include if you need specific field types, such as drop-downs, date pickers, or photo uploads
   * **Audience**: Include who will complete the form to help Ursa choose appropriate field labels and ordering

   See [Example prompts](#example-prompts).\
   Ursa generates the form structure and presents it for review.
4. [Review and edit the generated form](#reviewing-and-editing-the-generated-form).

#### Example prompts

> *Create a check-in form for laptops with fields for condition, location, damage notes, and a photo.*

> *Build a maintenance request form with fields for asset name, issue description, priority level (low, medium, high, critical), and the requested completion date.*

> *Make an employee onboarding form that captures the new hire's name, department, start date, manager, and a list of equipment they need.*

> *Create an audit form with fields for inspector name, inspection date, pass/fail status, and comments.*

### Review and edit the generated form

1. Review the proposed fields, types, and layout.
2. To modify the form, perform one of the following tasks:

   * Ask Ursa to modify specific fields. For example, *"Change the Priority field to a drop-down with options: Low, Medium, High."*
   * Open the form in the form builder to make manual adjustments.

   When the form is correct, it is ready to use.


# Ursa account builder

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="Asset Panda Pro app link" data-size="line"> [Visit Account Builder in the app](https://assetpanda.app/settings/account-builder)

When you enable Ursa<sup>AI</sup> in your organization, the Account Builder provides a specialized Ursa experience that helps you set up your Asset Panda Pro account by generating a complete organizational structure based on a description of your business.

## Information to provide

When you describe your business, Ursa creates the objects needed to support the business structure. Provide as much information as possible to ensure the appropriate structure is generated.

Be as specific as possible about the following elements:

* **Your industry or type of business**\
  Mentioning your industry helps Ursa suggest relevant collections and fields. "Construction company" will produce different results than "Hospital".
* **Categories of assets, items, or resources** \
  The more detail you provide about the objects you manage, the more tailored the result will be.
* **Key workflows and processes**\
  Tell Ursa how you use your assets. For example: "Employees check out laptops and return them when they leave the company."
* **Team or department structure**\
  &#x20;Mention departments or roles that need access to the system, so Ursa can suggest appropriate organizational groupings.

{% hint style="info" %}
For best results, give a high-level description first and then add details in follow-up messages to refine the structure.
{% endhint %}

### **Example prompt**

> *We're a mid-sized IT services company. We need to track laptops, desktops, monitors, and mobile devices. Each asset should have a serial number, purchase date, warranty expiration, assigned employee, department, location, and condition status. We also manage a fleet of 20 service vehicles.*

***

## Generated objects

When you describe your business to Ursa, it can generate the following:

* **Accounts**: Top-level organizational containers for your data
* **Modules**: Groups of related collections within an account
* **Collections**: Tables that hold your records (for example, IT Assets, Vehicles, and People)
* **Fields**: The columns within each collection that define the data you track (for example, Serial Number, Purchase Date, and Assigned To)
* **Categories**: Predefined groups for organizing records within a collection (for example, Laptops, Desktops, and Monitors within an IT Assets collection)

***

## Use the Account Builder

1. In the navigation pane, select <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Builder**. The Ursa pane is displayed in Account Builder mode.

{% hint style="info" %}
Account Builder is only available from this navigation. It is not available from the main Ursa chat interface.
{% endhint %}

2. **Define your business**\
   In the chat input, describe your business and what you want to track. See [Information to provide](#information-to-provide). \
   \
   Ursa generates the account structure, showing you progress as it works. Once complete, it displays the proposed accounts, modules, collections and fields, and categories within each collection.
3. **Refine or regenerate**\
   Review the structure to determine if it matches your needs. If it does not meet your needs, perform one of the following tasks:
   * **Refine**: In the chat input, tell Ursa what to change. For example: "Add a Warranty Provider field to the IT Assets collection" or "Create a separate collection for Software Licenses".
   * **Regenerate**: Click **Restart** to provide a new or updated business description and Ursa will generate a new structure.
4. **Modify the generated objects**
   * To edit the name or description of an account or module, click **Edit** <i class="fa-pencil">:pencil:</i> for the object, update the listed information, and then click **Save**.
   * To edit the name of a collection, click **Edit name** next to the collection, enter the new name, and then click **Save**.
   * To review the fields for a module:
     1. Click the linked module name. The fields for each collection in the module are displayed.
     2. To edit a field's settings, click **Edit** in the field row, adjust the settings, then click **Save**.&#x20;
     3. To remove a field from the collection, click **Remove** in the field row.
     4. To edit the generated categories:
        1. Under **Categories**, select check boxes to determine the fields that will be included for each category name.
        2. To edit a category name, click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) for the category and select **Edit**. Enter the new name and click **Save**.
        3. To remove a category, click ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) for the category and select **Delete**.
   * To add fields or categories, click **Add field** or **Add Category** and specify the required information.
5. When the structure meets your business needs, click **Back** to return to the account builder view and then click **Done**. Ursa creates the account and suggested resources, then prompts you to view the new collection. Click **Yes** to view the collection.


# Ursa file upload

Upload files and documents to Ursa

Ursa can read and analyze files you upload, including images, PDFs, spreadsheets, and text documents. For example, Ursa can perform the following tasks for uploaded files:

* Extract text from images using optical character recognition (OCR)
* Read and summarize document contents
* Analyze spreadsheet data and answer questions about rows, columns, and values
* Answer questions about the content of the file
* Compare information across multiple uploaded files

## Upload files

1. In the navigation pane, select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd). The chat window is displayed.
2. Click <i class="fa-plus">:plus:</i> in the chat input area.
3. Select the files you want to upload from your device. The following file types are supported:&#x20;
   * Images: PNG, JPG/JPEG, GIF, BMP, TIFF, WebP
   * Documents: PDF, DOC, DOCX, TXT, RTF
   * Spreadsheets: XLS, XLSX, CSV
   * Data files: JSON, XML, MD

{% hint style="info" %}

* You can upload up to three files in each message, with a maximum size of 50 MB per file.&#x20;
* If a document, spreadsheet, or data file is too large, consider breaking the data into smaller files for upload.
* Use clear, high-resolution images. Blurry or dark images may produce inaccurate text extraction.
* Upload well-formatted documents with clear headings and structure to produce better results.
  {% endhint %}

4. Add a message describing what you'd like Ursa to do with the file (optional but recommended). See [Example prompts](#example-prompts-with-file-uploads).
5. Press **Enter** to send your message with the attached files.

### Example prompts&#x20;

**Receipt photo**

> *Extract the vendor name, date, and total amount from this receipt.*

**Spreadsheet**

> *Summarize the data in this file and tell me how many items have a status of Active.*

**PDF manual**

> *What maintenance intervals are listed in this document?*

**Upload a label image:**&#x20;

> *Read the serial number and model information from this label.*


# Ursa Chat

Ursa is designed to be conversational. You can type questions, give instructions, and have discussions as you would with a colleague.

## Send a message

1. In the navigation pane, select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd). The chat window is displayed.
2. Enter your message in the text input area. See [Prompt tips](#prompt-tips).

{% hint style="info" %}
To write a multi-line prompt, press **Shift + Enter** to add a new line without sending the message.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

3. Press **Enter** to send your message. Ursa provides responses in formatted text that may include the following elements:
   * **Bold text** and headings for emphasis and organization
   * **Bulleted and numbered lists** for step-by-step instructions
   * **Links** to relevant pages or resources within Asset Panda Pro
   * **Structured data**, such as tables or formatted field information

***

### Prompt tips

The more specific your prompt, the better Ursa's response.&#x20;

* **Be specific**: Instead of vague questions, include details like collection names, field names, or specific criteria.
  * **Vague:** *Show me assets.*
  * **Better:** *Show me all laptops in the IT Assets collection that are assigned to the New York office.*
* **State your needs**: Clearly state whether you want information, a form, an automation, or a filter:
  * *Create a form to check out equipment with fields for employee name, department, and expected return date.*
  * *Build an automation that sends an email notification when a warranty expires.*
* **Ask follow-up questions**: Ursa remembers your conversation context, so you can build on previous messages without repeating yourself.
  * *How many assets are overdue?*
  * *Which ones are assigned to the engineering team?*
  * *Can you filter the collection to show just those?*
* **Provide examples when helpful**: If you cannot describe what you need, give an example of the result you expect.
  * *I want a filter that shows something like: all records where Status is Active and Location is Warehouse A.*

***

## Copy chat text

You can copy chat messages to share with others.

1. Click **Copy** ![Copy icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FzCRhy2X4Nh9Wd47Wb3JB%2Fcopy%20chat.png?alt=media\&token=bbcb112e-f4f5-4ab4-86d2-0000e9cca275). The chat text is copied and ready to paste elsewhere.
2. To copy the contents of a response table, click **export as csv** above the table and then select the location to save the exported content.

***

## Edit a previous message

You can modify a message you already sent to update the chat response.

1. Find the message you want to edit in the conversation.
2. Click **Edit** <i class="fa-pencil-line">:pencil-line:</i> below your message.
3. Modify your text.
4. Press **Enter** to re-send the updated message.

Ursa generates a new response based on your edited message.

***

## Provide feedback

You can provide feedback to help improve Ursa's accuracy and usefulness over time. When you provide feedback, your rating is recorded along with the conversation context.

* <i class="fa-thumbs-up">:thumbs-up:</i> : The response was helpful and accurate.
* <i class="fa-thumbs-down">:thumbs-down:</i>: The response was unhelpful or incorrect.

{% hint style="info" %}
Do not hesitate to select that a response was not helpful. Honest feedback is the best way to help Ursa improve.
{% endhint %}

Your feedback is also visible to your organization's administrators in the AI chat logs<br>


# Manage chat conversations

Ursa saves your conversations so you can return to them later. This is useful for picking up where you left off, reviewing past answers, or referencing previous interactions.

## Access the chat history

1. In the navigation pane, select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd). The chat window is displayed.
2. Click **Chat History** <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FYBLwpH5nTIZuIRirkyXu%2Fchat%20history.png?alt=media&amp;token=496628df-d173-482c-9ff6-1b73dc4f3f0d" alt="History icon" data-size="original"> in the chat header area. Your previous conversations are displayed in a list. They are listed with their names so you can quickly identify them.&#x20;
3. Scroll through the list to find the relevant conversation.

***

## Search for a conversation

1. [Access the chat history](#access-the-chat-history).
2. In the **Search chat history** field, enter the keyword or phrase you remember from the previous conversation and then press **Enter**. The list shows conversations that contain your search text.

***

## Resume a conversation

1. [Access the chat history](#access-the-chat-history).
2. Click the conversation you want to resume. The conversation loads with your full message history.
3. Enter a new message to continue where you left off. Ursa remembers the context of the conversation, so you can pick up naturally without re-explaining the original question.

***

## Start a new conversation

You should start a new conversation when you're switching to a completely different topic. This helps keep your chat history organized and makes it easier to find specific conversations later.

1. In the navigation pane, select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd). The chat window is displayed.
2. Click **New conversation** ![New conversation icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F4sdXyweJ4QsljthfOVEh%2Fnew%20chat.png?alt=media\&token=b3c66703-d63f-4d0d-a685-5ed32a341e14) in the chat header. Ursa opens a blank conversation, ready for your first message.

***

## Delete a conversation

{% hint style="warning" %}
Deleting a conversation is permanent. The conversation and all its messages cannot be recovered.
{% endhint %}

1. [Access the chat history](#access-the-chat-history).
2. Locate the conversation you want to delete.
3. Click the **delete icon** next to the conversation.
4. Confirm the deletion when prompted.


# Ursa filtering

Ursa can filter your collection records using natural language. Instead of manually selecting fields, operators, and values from the filter panel, you can describe the records you want to see and Ursa will translate your description into collection filters and apply them to your current view. The filtered results are displayed in your collection as if you had configured the filters manually.

Ursa can create filters by any field in your collection, including:

* **Text fields**: Name, description, serial number, or any text value
* **Date fields**: Purchase date, warranty expiration, created date
* **Number fields**: Quantity, price, age, or any numeric value
* **Dropdown/select fields**: Status, category, department,  or location
* **Email fields**: Assigned user, owner, or any email-based field

Ursa also supports the following actions:

* **Sorting**: Order results by any field in ascending or descending order
* **Grouping**: Group records by a specific field
* **Date ranges**: Filter records based a time period (for example, the last 30 days, this month, or before January 2025)
* **Multiple conditions**: Combine multiple criteria in a single filter

1. Navigate to the collection you want to filter.
2. In the navigation pane, select ![URSA icon](https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FsvBdaCrsAlOIDNyFGzOU%2FURSA.png?alt=media\&token=1624067c-3976-4931-a19c-a7f79b2b53bd). The chat window is displayed.
3. Describe the records you want to see in plain language.&#x20;

   * **Use field names from your collection**: The more closely your description matches your actual field names, the more accurate the filter.
   * **Be explicit about operators:** Say "greater than $500" instead of "around $500" for precise results.
   * **Combine criteria:** You can ask for multiple conditions in one prompt; for example: *Status is Active AND Location is New York*.
   * **Include sort preferences** Add "*sorted by*" to your request to control the order of results.

   See [Example prompts](#example-prompts).&#x20;
4. Press **Enter**. Ursa applies the filter:
   * Your collection view shows only the matching records.
   * The filter criteria are displayed in the filter bar above your collection.
5. If needed, modify, add to, or clear the filters using the regular filter controls.

### Example prompts

> *Show me all laptops assigned to the IT department.*

> *Find assets with a warranty expiring in the next 30 days.*

> *Show records where Status is Active and Location is Warehouse A, sorted by purchase date.*

> *Show only items with a purchase price over $1,000.*

> *Show me all records created this month, grouped by department.*

> *Find all assets assigned to John Smith.*

> *Show records where the condition field is empty.*


# Ursa Inspection

AI-powered photo inspections that fill out your forms for you.

Ursa Inspection enables you to use photos of an asset to complete form fields instead of entering inspection results by hand. When enabled, a technician can take photos of an asset and have Ursa fill in fields based on the information it can identify from the images.

This process speeds the completion of forms and ensures consistency in report content.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
Ursa Inspection was built with inspection forms in mind, but it works with any Asset Panda Pro form made from supported field types.
{% endhint %}

Ursa Inspection works in the web and mobile apps. Field technicians can capture photos on their phone and get the same AI-filled results a desktop user would.

## Identifiable elements

Ursa can determine the following information visually:

* Condition and wea&#x72;**:**&#x20;
  * Tread/blade/edge wear
  * Fading or peeling paint
* Object damage and where the damage is located:
  * Dents
  * Scratches
  * Cracks
  * Chips
  * Corrosion and rust
  * Broken or bent components
* Completeness:&#x20;
  * Missing parts or fasteners
  * Whether guards, covers, and accessories are attached
* Status indicators:&#x20;
  * Gauge readings
  * Warning lights
  * Visible fluid levels
  * Displayed tire pressure readouts
* Cleanliness and environment:
  * Dirt and debris buildup
  * Spills
  * Blocked vents
  * Obstructed access
* Readable text:&#x20;
  * Serial numbers
  * Model numbers
  * Asset tags
  * Nameplate data
  * Inspection stickers
  * Dates written on tags

***

## Ursa field type support

Ursa can complete any field for which the answer can be detected in the photo. The following table describes how Ursa Inspection supports each field type.

{% hint style="info" %}
Ursa only completes fields that exist on the form.
{% endhint %}

<table><thead><tr><th width="190.8125" valign="top">Field type</th><th width="257.16796875" valign="top">Information Provided by Ursa</th><th valign="top">Field Examples</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Text / Long text</strong></td><td valign="top">Free-form descriptions of information visible in the photos</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>Damage Notes</strong><em>:</em> “paint chipped on lower-left fender”</li><li><strong>Inspection Comments</strong></li><li><strong>Visible Defects</strong></li><li><strong>Wear Description</strong></li><li><strong>Location of Damage</strong></li><li><strong>General Condition Summary</strong></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Drop-down (single or multi-select)</strong></td><td valign="top"><p>Selects only from your configured options.</p><p>Ursa never invents a value that does not exist in your configured drop-down list.</p></td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>Condition</strong>: Excellent, Good, Fair, Poor </li><li><strong>Paint Quality</strong> </li><li><strong>Tread Wear Level</strong></li><li><strong>Cleanliness</strong></li><li><strong>Rust Severity</strong></li><li><strong>Damage Type</strong><em>:</em> Dent, Scratch, Crack, Corrosion </li><li><strong>Color</strong></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Number</strong></td><td valign="top">Visible counts and measurements it can read from the image</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>Number of Visible Cracks</strong></li><li><strong>Dents Count</strong></li><li><strong>Missing Bolts</strong></li><li><strong>Quantity on Shelf</strong></li><li><strong>Number of Damaged Panels</strong></li><li><strong>Visible Gauge Reading</strong></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Yes / No</strong></td><td valign="top">Visual pass/fail and presence checks</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>Damage Present?</strong></li><li><strong>Tire Wires Showing?</strong></li><li><strong>Safety Guard in Place?</strong></li><li><strong>Leaks Visible?</strong></li><li><strong>Label Legible?</strong></li><li><strong>All Parts Present?</strong></li><li><strong>Rust Present?</strong></li><li><strong>Warning Light On?</strong></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Barcode, URL, IP address</strong></td><td valign="top">Read directly from text visible in the photo</td><td valign="top"><ul><li><strong>Asset Tag</strong> or <strong>Barcode Number</strong></li><li><strong>Serial Number</strong> on a nameplate</li><li><strong>Model Number</strong> on a sticker</li><li><strong>URL</strong> printed on a label</li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

## Unsupported fields/elements

The following information cannot be determined in images or requires human judgement. These fields are left blank for you to complete:

{% hint style="info" %}
The one exception is when the information is physically written in the photo, such as a date printed on an asset tag.
{% endhint %}

* Internal mechanical condition
* Functional test results (for example, whether the object powers on successfully)&#x20;
* Object history (**Purchase Date**)
* Ownership (**Assigned To**)
* Cost
* Elements that require measurement beyond what is photographed
* Dates, currency, and formula fields
* Signatures and file attachments
* Location and linked-record fields

{% hint style="info" %}

* If something is not evident in the photos, Ursa skips the field instead of guessing. A blurry or unusable photo leaves your form unchanged.
* Required-field validation still applies when you submit, so Ursa never lets you skip your form’s rules.
  {% endhint %}

***

## Example Use Cases

Ursa Inspection fits any workflow where you capture the condition of a physical asset on a form.

<table><thead><tr><th width="199.140625" valign="top">Use Case</th><th valign="top">Description</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Fleet and vehicle damage inspections</strong></td><td valign="top"><ol><li>Walk around a returned vehicle and photograph each panel and the tires.</li><li>Ursa identifies the <strong>Damage Type</strong>, <strong>Location of Damage</strong>, <strong>Paint Quality</strong>, <strong>Dents Count</strong>, and provides a <em><strong>Damage Notes</strong></em> summary. </li></ol></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Tire inspections</strong></td><td valign="top"><ol><li>Take close-up shots of the tread and sidewall.</li><li>Ursa identifies the <strong>Tread Wear Level</strong>, <strong>Tire Wires Showing?</strong>, <strong>Visible Cracks</strong>, and <strong>Rust Present?</strong> on the wheel hardware.</li></ol></td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Heavy-equipment pre-use safety checks</strong></td><td valign="top">Before a forklift or excavator goes into service, Ursa can read the visible <strong>Warning Light On?</strong> indicator, confirm <strong>Safety Guard in Place?</strong>, note <strong>Leaks Visible?</strong>, and grade the overall <strong>Condition</strong> from the provided photos.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Facilities and property walkthroughs</strong></td><td valign="top">From room and exterior photos, Ursa can identify <strong>Cleanliness</strong>, <strong>General Condition Summary</strong>, <strong>Obstructed Access?</strong>, or <strong>Visible Defects</strong>.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>IT asset intake and condition grading</strong></td><td valign="top">When laptops and devices arrive or are returned, Ursa reads the <strong>Serial Number</strong> and <strong>Model Number</strong> from the nameplate, automatically grades the cosmetic <strong>Condition</strong>, and records elements such as <strong>Screen Cracked?</strong> or <strong>Ports Damaged?</strong>.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Warehouse receiving and damage claims</strong></td><td valign="top">As shipments arrive, Ursa can capture <strong>Packaging Damaged?</strong>, <strong>Quantity on Shelf</strong>, <strong>Number of Damaged Panels</strong>, and a description of the visible damage. This gives receiving teams the evidence needed to file or dispute a claim.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Construction tool check-in and check-out logs</strong></td><td valign="top">When tools leave and return from a job site, Ursa records their <strong>Condition</strong>, <strong>Missing Parts?</strong>, <strong>Rust Severity</strong>, and <strong>Wear Description</strong>, so accountability and wear are tracked over the life of the tool.</td></tr><tr><td valign="top"><strong>Safety-compliance checks</strong></td><td valign="top"><p>On a periodic safety round, Ursa identifies information in the frame: </p><ul><li>Fire extinguisher’s <strong>Gauge Reading</strong></li><li><strong>Signage Present?</strong></li><li><strong>Guards in Place?</strong></li><li><strong>Label Legible?</strong></li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>

***

## Enable Ursa Inspection

1. **Enable the capability for your organization.**&#x20;

   Ursa Inspection must be activated for your account. If the option is not available on your forms, contact your Asset Panda representative or Customer Success Manager to have it enabled.
2. **Enable Ursa Inspection for specific forms.**&#x20;
   1. In the navigation pane, select **Settings** > **Account Management**.
   2. Expand the appropriate account and module, and then click **Manage** in the **Forms** tile. The list of forms is displayed.or inspection form.
   3. In the form’s settings, select the **Enable Ursa Inspection** toggle. A tooltip next to the toggle explains the feature.
   4. Save the form.&#x20;

***

## Use Ursa Inspection on a form

1. Open the form you want to complete.
2. **Start the inspection.** The **Ursa AI Inspection** button is displayed at the top of the form.&#x20;
3. Tap the **Ursa AI Inspection** button to open the inspection window.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
On a phone or tablet, tapping the button lets you take photos using your device camera, so you don't have to leave the form or upload files separately.
{% endhint %}

4. Add one or more photos to inspect:

   * Capture or upload from your device.&#x20;
     * On mobile, take photos with your camera.&#x20;
     * On any device, drag photos into the window, or browse to pick them from your files.
   * If the **Enhanced Attachments** feature is enabled for your account, switch to the **Gallery** tab and pick images from your in-account attachments gallery.

   See [Photo Guidelines](#photo-guidelines).
5. Click **Inspect** to run the inspection. Ursa reviews your photos against the form’s field list to identify labels, field types, and drop-down options across all pages in the form.
6. Review the form results. Every field Ursa could identify and complete is marked with an **AI** ✨ icon. A counter shows *“N fields filled by Ursa AI.”*&#x20;
7. Review each AI-filled value and edit anything you want to change. The icon remains so you always know which values came from Ursa.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}

* Ursa may replace existing form values based on its inspection. However the data is only replaced if you accept the AI-filled result.
* You can re-run an inspection with more photos if the initial inspection results are not sufficient.
  {% endhint %}

8. Complete any remaining fields and then submit the form as normal.

{% hint style="info" %}
Nothing is submitted automatically in the form. Ursa completes available fields, but the user must submit the form after reviewing the completed fields.
{% endhint %}

9. After the form is submitted, open the form’s logs in the **Activity Stream** to review the submission.&#x20;

* **View the inspection photos.** \
  Every picture that was uploaded and inspected is saved with the submission, so reviewers can see the images Ursa used in the inspection.
* **Identify who (or what) filled each field.** \
  Each field that Ursa completed shows an **AI** ✨ icon, so you can distinguish Ursa values \ from user-entered values.

***

## Photo Guidelines

Use the following information when capturing photos to ensure the best inspection results:

* Use several photos for each inspection. For example, you can submit a wide shot for context as well as close-ups of the areas relevant to the form or of problem spots.
* Submit well-lit, in-focus photos to improve inspection accuracy.
* Capture readable text when it is relevant, such as for serial numbers, tags, and labels that can be used to fill matching fields.
* **Supported formats:** JPEG, PNG, GIF, WebP, and HEIC (iPhone photos are converted automatically)

If a photo cannot be processed, Ursa will not complete any fields that might be associated with the photo.


# Mobile App


# Mobile: Navigation

## Navigation elements

The Asset Panda Pro mobile app provides the following tools to navigate the application:

* Account/Module links: List the active account and module. You can click the links to [switch accounts or modules](#switch-accounts-or-modules).
* **Offline data**: If enabled, provides access to offline data. See [Offline mode](/mobile-app/mobile-offline-mode).
* **Collections**: Provides access to the collections views. Expand the list and then tap the collection to view its records.
* **Forms**: Provides access to forms. Expand the list and then tap a form to use the form.
* <i class="fa-bars">:bars:</i> **Menu**: Returns to the main page from any view in the application.
* <i class="fa-calendar">:calendar:</i> **Calendar**: Displays the calendar so you can review reservation data. See [Reservations](/mobile-app/mobile-calendar-reservations).
* <i class="fa-sparkles">:sparkles:</i> **UrsaAI**: Provides access to the UrsaAI chat view.
* <i class="fa-bell">:bell:</i> **Notifications**: Displays all notifications for the user.
* <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>**More**: Provides access to additional functionality, such as [Audits](/mobile-app/mobile-audits), [Attachments](/mobile-app/mobile-attachments), and **Settings**, where you can edit the [user profile](/mobile-app/mobile-user-profile) or the [Layout Configuration](/mobile-app/mobile-layout-configuration).

***

## Access the main menu

When working in the mobile app, you can tap **Menu** from any view to return to the main page. The active account and module are displayed.

***

## Switch accounts or modules

In Asset Panda’s mobile app, the Account Switcher enables you to toggle between accounts to manage multiple accounts. &#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
You can enable the ability to switch between accounts and modules on mobile devices through user roles and permissions. See [Roles & permissions](/settings/roles-and-permissions).
{% endhint %}

1. To switch accounts, tap the account name and then select the appropriate account.
2. To switch modules, tap the module name and then select the appropriate module.

***

## Collection navigation elements

When viewing a collection list, you can use the following navigation elements to work in the view:&#x20;

* **Menu**: Returns to the main menu page.
* <i class="fa-magnifying-glass" style="color:$primary;">:magnifying-glass:</i>: Search for records in the list. Tap <i class="fa-qrcode-read">:qrcode-read:</i> in the **Search** field to scan a barcode to search for the record.
* <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical" style="color:$primary;">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>: Access additional actions for the list or selected records. For example:
  * Create a kit
  * Filter the collection records
  * Sort the collection records
  * Show/hide fields for the collection
  * Switch between the card and list views for records
  * Show the row summaries
* <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FaCINqnyk7qHFW5LF7iaB%2Fmobile_add.png?alt=media&amp;token=3cb5f9ad-78b0-4626-84e3-21e046f514fc" alt="" data-size="line">: Add a record to the collection
* <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FJ5oOQj4WQNzpko02zskA%2Fmobile_barcode.png?alt=media&amp;token=cbdf25cd-799c-435f-b80f-80a69060c950" alt="" data-size="line">: Scan [barcodes](/mobile-app/mobile-barcodes).<br>


# Mobile: User Profile

You can manage your account to update your profile details, including your profile picture, first name, last name, and time zone.

1. In the mobile app, tap ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png), select <i class="fa-gear">:gear:</i> **Settings**, and then tap **Edit** **profile**. The **Edit Profile** page is displayed.
2. To update the profile picture:
   1. Tap <i class="fa-pencil-line">:pencil-line:</i>.
   2. Select whether to take a camera photo or upload from a gallery.&#x20;
   3. Take or select the photo.

{% hint style="info" %}
**Note**: The maximum size of the profile picture is 2MB.
{% endhint %}

3. Update or change the **First name**, **Last name**, **Time Zone**, and **Language**.
4. To access the Asset Panda mobile app using biometric authentication:
   1. **Android**: Tap **Enable Fingerprint Login** and then tap **Yes**.
   2. **iOS**: Tap **Enable Face ID Login** and then tap **Yes**.
5. Tap **Done**.


# Mobile: Attachments

When the Attachments feature is enabled, users can upload, manage, and view files associated with records across the platform. Attachments can be accessed globally, at the individual record level, or for specific fields, with permissions and visibility enforced based on user roles and access to records.

## Supported attachment file types

For field-based attachments, you can specify the type of files that can be uploaded:

* Image: jpg, jpeg, gif, png, heic, heif, webp, avif
* Document: doc, docx, pdf, xls, xlsx, txt, zip, csv
* Video: mp4, qt, asx, mov, swf, asf, wmv, swt, 3gp, mn, viv, 3g2, mpg, vivo, dvx, vob, mpeg, fly&#x20;
* Audio: mp3, wav, wma, ogg, aac, 3gp, m4a

From the **Attachments** tab for the record, you can attach files of any type.

***

## View attachments (Global view)

The Attachments view displays all files across the organization that the user has permission to access based on their role:

* Organization admin: All files across all accounts and modules in the organization.
* Account/Module admin: Files tied to their scope
* Collaborator: Files in assigned modules
* Custom Role: Files per record access limits
* Multi-role: Union of all accessible records

Users can filter the list based on a specific account, module, collection, or field value. They can preview some file types and can download or delete files.&#x20;

1. In the mobile app, tap ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and then select **Attachments**. Thumbnails are displayed for each attachment.
2. To filter the list of attachments:
   1. Tap <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical" style="color:$primary;">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> in the upper-right corner and then tap **Filter**. The **Filter By** page is displayed.
   2. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and/or **Collection** for which you want to review attachments.&#x20;
   3. To filter the list based on specific records:
      1. Select the **Field name**. For example, you can select **File Type** to display only images.
      2. Select the **Operator** to compare the field values.
      3. Enter the **Value** to determine the filter.
      4. To specify multiple filter criteria, click **Add more** and then repeat steps i-iii.
      5. If multiple conditions are specified, select whether the attachment must match **All conditions** or **Any condition** to be displayed.
   4. Click **Apply**.
3. To sort the attachments in the list:
   1. Tap <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical" style="color:$primary;">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> in the upper-right corner and then tap  **Sort**. The **Sort By** page is displayed.
   2. Select the **Sorting Field**. You can sort by file type, date added, or file name.
   3. For **Value**, select whether to display attachments in ascending or descending order for the Sorting field.
   4. To specify multiple sort levels, click **Add more** and then repeat steps a-c.
   5. Click **Apply**.
4. To download an attachment, select the check box in the upper-left corner of the attachment and then click <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FQ05oPAkS93IkbkPIwyQ3%2FMobile_Download.png?alt=media&amp;token=2302e27b-e0a6-426f-9d8a-887be8eb280c" alt="" data-size="line">.
5. To delete an attachment, select the check box in the upper-left corner of the attachment, tap <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical" style="color:$primary;">:ellipsis-vertical:</i> , select **Delete**, and then select **Delete** in the confirmation message.

{% hint style="info" %}

* You can delete an attachment only if you have edit access on all records linked to the attachment.
* Attachments deleted from one record remain in others unless they are unlinked everywhere.
  {% endhint %}

***

## View attachments (record view)

You can view the attachments associated with an individual asset record.

1. Open the **Asset Panda Pro** mobile app.
2. Expand the **Collections** list and then select the collection to view.
3. Select the record to be reviewed. The details pane is displayed.
4. Select the **Attachments** tab. All attachments associated with the record are displayed.
5. To filter or sort the view, tap **Actions** and then select **Filter** or **Sort**. See [View attachments (Global view)](#view-attachments-global-view) for details.
6. To download an attachment, select the check box in the upper-left corner of the attachment and then click <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FQ05oPAkS93IkbkPIwyQ3%2FMobile_Download.png?alt=media&amp;token=2302e27b-e0a6-426f-9d8a-887be8eb280c" alt="" data-size="line">.
7. To delete an attachment, select the check box in the upper-left corner of the attachment, tap **Actions**, select **Delete**, and then select **Delete** in the confirmation message.

***

## Upload an attachment (Global view)

You can upload attachments to enable files to be attached to records at a later date.

1. In the mobile app, tap ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and then select **Attachments**. Thumbnails are displayed for each attachment.
2. In the mobile app, tap ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and then select **Upload**  <i class="fa-arrow-up-from-bracket">:arrow-up-from-bracket:</i>.
3. Select an option to specify the source of the attachment file. You can take photos or video, record audio, or select from existing files on the mobile device.
4. Select the file to be uploaded.
5. Click **Done**.

***

## Add attachments to a record

{% hint style="info" %}
Only users with Organization admin, Account admin, Module admin, or a custom role that supports the creation of attachments can add attachments to records.
{% endhint %}

### Add from a field

1. Navigate to the collection that contains the record.&#x20;
2. Select the record to be updated. The Record details page is displayed.
3. Tap **Actions** and then select **Edit**.
4. For the attachment field:
   1. Tap **Upload**.
   2. Select the source of the attachment. You can take photos or video, record audio, or select from existing files on the device. You can also select **Gallery** to upload from the global attachment list uploaded previously to Asset Panda Pro.
   3. Use the device tools to select or create the file to be attached, then tap **Done**.
5. Tap **Done**. The attachment is saved to the record.&#x20;

### Add from the record view

1. Navigate to the **Attachments** view for the record. See [View attachments (record view)](#view-attachments-record-view).
2. Tap **Actions** and then select **Upload**.
3. Select the source of the attachment. You can take photos or video, record audio, or select from existing files on the device. You can also select **Gallery** to upload from the global attachment list uploaded previously to Asset Panda Pro.
4. Use the device tools to select or create the file to be attached, then tap **Done**.


# Mobile: Audits

The Asset Panda mobile app provides a structured approach to auditing assets, ensuring accurate record-keeping and verification. For more information, see [Audits](/maintain-records/audits).

You can perform audits directly on the mobile app.

The **Tools** page is the central hub for managing audits in the Asset Panda mobile app. You can perform the following tasks in the mobile app:

* Track progress, review open and closed audits, and review records.
* Monitor completion percentages, view assigned records, and access critical metadata.
* Use barcode scanning for quick asset validation.
* Mark records as audited and complete audits.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
You can only create new audits in the Asset Panda web application.
{% endhint %}

***

## View an audit <a href="#getting-started" id="getting-started"></a>

1. Log into the Asset Panda mobile app.
2. Select ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) **More** and then select **Audits**. All available audits are displayed.
3. Select the audit to view. The following data is displayed:
   * Audit name and description
   * Associated module and collection where the audit is being performed
   * Records with their audit status, enabling you to track the records that have been audited and those that require attention.

***

## Start an audit <a href="#starting-an-audit" id="starting-an-audit"></a>

1. **Review the Summary**: Review the audit summary to ensure all details are accurate before proceeding.
2. **Start the Audit:** To begin tracking changes and logging modifications, select **Start Audit**.
3. **Monitor Progress:** After the audit starts, the system begins monitoring the selected collection. Users with appropriate permissions can view and manage audit progress through the **Audits** section.

***

## Perform an audit <a href="#conducting-audits" id="conducting-audits"></a>

1. Log into the Asset Panda mobile app.
2. Select ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) **More** and then select **Audits**. All available audits are displayed.
3. Select the audit to review.
4. View the list of records assigned to the audit.
   * Use the **filter option** to view:
     * **Full List**: All records
     * **Audited**: Verified records
     * **Not Audited**: Records that are yet to be verified
     * **Outside List**: Records with unmatched criteria
5. Select a record to review its details.

***

### Review and update a record <a href="#reviewing-and-updating-records" id="reviewing-and-updating-records"></a>

Each record contains essential details, such as:

* ID, Date Added, Last Updated
* Added By, Last Updated By
* Barcode, Email, Address, Numeric Fields
* Audit Status (Audited / Not Audited)

***

### Add notes to a record <a href="#adding-notes-to-record" id="adding-notes-to-record"></a>

1. Open a record.
2. Select **Add Notes**.
3. Enter relevant details.
4. Save the note.&#x20;

***

### Scan a barcode  <a href="#scanning-barcodes" id="scanning-barcodes"></a>

1. Select **Scan** <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FJ5oOQj4WQNzpko02zskA%2Fmobile_barcode.png?alt=media&amp;token=cbdf25cd-799c-435f-b80f-80a69060c950" alt="Scan icon" data-size="line">.
2. Align the barcode within the scan frame. The system will match the scanned code with existing records.

***

### Mark an audit as Complete <a href="#marking-complete" id="marking-complete"></a>

1. Open the audit.
2. After verifying all records, tap ![Actions icon](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png) and then select **Mark Audit as Complete**.

<br>


# Mobile: Barcodes

You can use a mobile device to scan barcodes to connect physical assets to their digital records:&#x20;

* Find assets in the system
* Verify asset details during audits
* Reprint damaged barcodes
* Confirm that barcodes have been set up correctly&#x20;

The mobile app reads the barcode and retrieves the matching asset, eliminating the need for manual searches or data entry.

{% hint style="info" %}
To scan barcodes:

* A barcode field must be configured in the system.
* Barcode labels must be attached to the physical assets.
* You must grant the Asset Panda Pro app permission to use the device's camera.
  {% endhint %}

## Scan a barcode <a href="#scanning-barcodes" id="scanning-barcodes"></a>

1. Open the **Asset Panda Pro** mobile app.
2. Expand the **Collections** list and then select the collection to view.
3. Tap <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FJ5oOQj4WQNzpko02zskA%2Fmobile_barcode.png?alt=media&amp;token=cbdf25cd-799c-435f-b80f-80a69060c950" alt="" data-size="line">. The device camera is activated.
4. Point the camera at the barcode attached to the asset. The app scans the barcode and matches it with the corresponding barcode field. The matching asset record opens in the app for review or further action.
5. To view the details of the asset, tap **Review** and then tap the record's card in the view.

{% hint style="info" %}

* If the barcode is not legible, you can click <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2Fvuy5AQrhUIc7yfzEQbg3%2FMobile_Edit.png?alt=media&amp;token=005e3cb2-fab5-4cab-8a52-1d2ea4b57f2d" alt="" data-size="line"> to enter the barcode numbers manually.
* If a record is not found, you can tap **Add new** to add the new record to the collection.
  {% endhint %}


# Mobile: Layout Configuration

You can configure how asset record information is displayed in the Asset Panda Pro mobile app. The following layouts are available:

* **Compact**: Displays information in a condensed format, which can be useful when managing several assets simultaneously.
* **Normal**: Provides a balanced view to keep information organized without feeling too tightly spaced.
* **Large**: Spaces out the layout to make it easier to read and scan through details.

Each style arranges asset details differently, and you can specify whether titles, cover images, or field names are displayed. For example, if you’re managing laptops or equipment, you might want to hide the title or field names for a more concise display. If you don't have images, you can turn off that display to save space.

&#x20;

1. In the mobile app, tap ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/xeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm/blobs/sgdxrKlZNiH5n84b9cH9/three_dot_icon.png), select <i class="fa-gear">:gear:</i> **Settings**, and then select **Layout Configuration**. The **Layout Configuration** page is displayed.
2. Select one of the layout options: **Compact**, **Normal**, or **Large**. The preview reflects the change.&#x20;
3. Select options to specify whether to display the **Title**, **Default Image**, or **Field names**. The preview reflects the change.&#x20;
4. Tap **Apply**. The layout is applied.


# Mobile: Offline Mode

In Asset Panda’s mobile app, Offline mode enables you to download platform data to your device and work offline. Once you are connected again, the data will be uploaded to the platform for uninterrupted work.

{% hint style="info" %}

* The data download must take place prior to losing connectivity.&#x20;
* Attachments are not downloaded, to minimize the download size.&#x20;
  {% endhint %}

1. Log into the Asset Panda mobile app.
2. If necessary, select the appropriate **account** and **module**.
3. Tap <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>next to **Offline data** and then select **Download**. A confirmation message is displayed.
4. Tap Download. All record data for the active module is downloaded to your device.
5. Work with the downloaded data. You can edit records and use forms.

When you are back online, the data will be updated to Asset Panda Pro.


# Mobile: Calendar (Reservations)

You can create calendars for collections to track reservations and other events associated with **Date** or **Date & time** fields in the collection. You can select the date fields to be displayed and a separate field to control the data displayed for events in the calendar.

When Reservations are enabled for a collection, forms are also added to enable users to reserve, check out, and check in assets within the collection over defined time periods. The reservations can be viewed and managed from the Calendar view.

You can create and review reservation calendars in the mobile app. This enables you to perform the following tasks:

* Reserve assets for a specific time window
* See availability and avoid conflicts
* Check out reserved items when you pick them up
* Check in items when they are returned
* Review the reservation history for each asset

{% hint style="info" %}

* The collections and forms displayed in the mobile app depend on how your organization has configured reservations and user permissions configured in the web application.
* This guide applies to both iOS and Android. Some buttons or icon styles may differ between platforms, but the flow is the same.
  {% endhint %}

***

## View a calendar

You can adjust the collection or reservations calendar view to make it easier to location activities.

1. In the mobile app, select the appropriate **account** and **module**. for which you want to view reservations.
2. Tap <i class="fa-calendar">:calendar:</i> **Calendar**.
3. Tap <i class="fa-equals" style="color:$primary;">:equals:</i>  above the calendar and then select the appropriate **Collection** or **Reservations** calendar. The current date is displayed on the calendar.
4. Use the following options to adjust the view:
   * To navigate between weeks in the calendar, tap <i class="fa-chevron-left">:chevron-left:</i> and <i class="fa-chevron-right">:chevron-right:</i> in the week view above the calendar.
   * To select a date within the month, drag the bar below the week view to display the month and then tap the date within the month.
   * To search for an event, tap <i class="fa-magnifying-glass" style="color:$primary;">:magnifying-glass:</i> and then enter the text to be searched.
   * To return to the current date in the view, tap the date block (for example, <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FamZ2BLgimYtkpsHJq39p%2Fmobile_date.png?alt=media&amp;token=bd240f95-4914-4900-bddd-2e19532c996a" alt="" data-size="line">).
   * To filter the calendar view, tap <i class="fa-filter" style="color:$primary;">:filter:</i> and then enter the filter criteria.
   * To change between a one-day, two-day, or list view of reservation events, tap <i class="fa-equals" style="color:$primary;">:equals:</i> and then select the appropriate option.
5. To view the details of a reservation, tap the reservation in the calendar. The **Reservation details** page is displayed.&#x20;

***

## View reservations (record view)

You can view the reservations associated with a record.

1. Navigate to the collection that contains the record. See [Manage collections](/settings/account-management/collections).
2. Tap the record to be reviewed. The details page is displayed.
3. Tap **Reservations**. All reservations associated with the record are displayed.
4. To view the details of the reservation, tap the reservation card. The **Reservation details** page is displayed.&#x20;

***

## Reserve an asset

1. [View the appropriate calendar](#view-a-calendar).
2. Tap <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FaCINqnyk7qHFW5LF7iaB%2Fmobile_add.png?alt=media&amp;token=3cb5f9ad-78b0-4626-84e3-21e046f514fc" alt="" data-size="line">.
3. Click **Reserve**. The Reserve form is displayed.
4. For **Reservation field**, select the field that identifies the reservation owner.
5. For **Reserve for**, select the user associated with the reservation.
6. For **Reservation start date** and **Reservation end date**, select the beginning and ending dates of the reservation, and then tap **Ok**. To set to the current date and time, tap **Set to current**.
7. Select **Continue**. The **Select Asset** page is displayed.
8. Select the check box for each asset to include in the reservation.
9. Select **Continue**. The **Summary** page is displayed.
10. To edit any reservation details, select **Edit**.
11. Tap **Reserve**. The reservation is added and can be displayed when you [view the calendar](#view-a-calendar).

***

## Check out an asset

When an asset is reserved, you can check it out to signify the physical pickup of the asset.

1. &#x20;[View the reservations calendar](#view-a-calendar) or [view the reservation in the record view](#view-reservations-record-view) for the asset you want to check out.
2. In the calendar, tap the reservation for which you want to check out assets. The **Reservation details** pane is displayed.
3. Tap **Check out**. The check out form is displayed.
4. Complete any fields required in the form and then tap **Continue**. The Summary page lists all assets associated with the reservation.
5. To remove an asset from the checkout process, tap <i class="fa-trash" style="color:red;">:trash:</i> next to the asset.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you remove an asset, you can tap **Include** to reinstate it.
{% endhint %}

6. Select **Check out**. The checkout is displayed in the calendar.

***

## Check in an asset

When an asset is checked out, you can check it in to signify the physical return of the asset.

1. &#x20;[View the reservations calendar](#view-a-calendar) or [view the reservation in the record view](#view-reservations-record-view) for the asset you want to check in.
2. In the calendar, tap the **Checked out** event for which you want to check in assets.&#x20;
3. Click **Check in**. The check in form is displayed.
4. Complete any fields required in the form and then click **Continue**. The Summary page lists all assets associated with the reservation.
5. To remove an asset from the check-in process, click <i class="fa-trash" style="color:red;">:trash:</i> next to the asset.

{% hint style="info" %}
If you remove an asset, you can click **Include** to reinstate it.
{% endhint %}

6. Select **Checked in**. The check-in is displayed in the calendar.

***

## **Create a collection calendar** <a href="#id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships" id="id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships"></a>

You can create a custom calendar to track events associated with a configured Date field.

1. In the mobile app, select the appropriate **account** and **module**. for which you want to add a calendar.
2. Tap <i class="fa-calendar">:calendar:</i> **Calendar**.
3. Tap <i class="fa-equals" style="color:$primary;">:equals:</i>  above the calendar and then select **Add calendar**. The **Add calendar** page is displayed.
4. Select **Collection**.
5. Enter the **Calendar name**.
6. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and **Collection** you want to associate with the calendar.
7. Select the **Date field** for which you want to display events in the calendar.
8. Select the **Display field** that you want to display in the calendar for the event.
9. Select **Add**.

***

## **Create a reservations calendar** <a href="#id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships" id="id-2.-key-concepts-and-relationships"></a>

You can create a reservations calendar to track when assets are reserved by users.

1. In the mobile app, select the appropriate **account** and **module**. for which you want to add a calendar.
2. Tap <i class="fa-calendar">:calendar:</i> **Calendar**.
3. Tap <i class="fa-equals" style="color:$primary;">:equals:</i>  above the calendar and then select **Add calendar**. The **Add calendar** page is displayed.
4. Select **Reservations**.
5. Enter the **Calendar name**. For best results, name the calendar in a way that identifies the collection whose assets are being reserved.&#x20;
6. Select the **Account**, **Module**, and **Collection** you want to associate with the calendar.
7. For **Reservations made by**, select whether to display reservation events for all users or the current user only.
8. Select **Add**.


# Integrations Store

#### <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2F6GAtChw2I6mvyUQRhLrJ%2Fpanda.png?alt=media&amp;token=ae1afdf5-65b1-4b6e-ba31-e8f4e7161898" alt="" data-size="line">  [**Visit Integrations Store in the app**](https://assetpanda.app/settings/account-management/integrations/integration-store)

Asset Panda Pro’s Integration Store provides connections to third-party applications, designed to optimize your asset, device, and user management processes. By leveraging these integrations, you can streamline operations, improve data accuracy, and enhance overall efficiency within your organization. Proper integration ensures seamless workflows and minimizes disruptions.&#x20;

Integrating Asset Panda Pro with external applications requires planning and attention to requirements and permissions. To implement integrations successfully, you must consider key aspects, including active subscriptions, compatibility checks, and data synchronization requirements.

## Requirements

* **Active Subscriptions**: Asset Panda Pro and the external application must have active and valid subscriptions.&#x20;
* **Administrator Access**: Administrator-level access must be available on both systems to configure and enable integration settings effectively.
* **Version Compatibility**: The external application and Asset Panda Pro versions must be compatible to avoid technical issues during synchronization.
* **Collections and Fields**: The required collections and fields must already be set up in Asset Panda Pro to avoid an incomplete or failed data synchronization.

***

## Permissions and security <a href="#permissions-and-security" id="permissions-and-security"></a>

* **Role Assignments**: Assign appropriate user roles in both systems. Permissions must align with responsibilities to ensure operational efficiency.
* **Principle of Least Privilege**: Grant users access only to the data necessary for their tasks.
* **Regular Audits**: Periodically audit user roles and permissions to maintain compliance with security policies and prevent unauthorized access.

***

## Data management and synchronization  <a href="#synchronization-and-data-management" id="synchronization-and-data-management"></a>

* **Data Mapping**: Clearly map data fields between Asset Panda Pro and the external platform. Clean, standardize, and validate all fields before initiating synchronization.
* **Testing Environment**: Conduct integration testing in a controlled environment to identify and resolve potential issues without impacting live systems.
* **Logs and Error Review**: Review logs and error messages regularly to address synchronization failures promptly and maintain system reliability.
* **Notification Thresholds**: Configure thresholds for critical changes, such as stock depletion in consumables, and set up automated notifications to keep stakeholders informed.&#x20;
* **Sequential Data Flow**: When multiple integrations are configured, maintain a sequential data flow to avoid conflicts and ensure the accurate processing of records.

***

## Filter the integration list

You can click the integration categories above the integration list to locate integrations more quickly.

***

## Available integrations

For more information on the integrations, click **Details** in the application tile or refer to the following links.

{% columns %}
{% column width="50%" %}

* Collaboration
  * [DocuSign](/integrations-store/collaboration/docusign-integration)
  * [Google Calendar](/integrations-store/collaboration/google-calendar-integration-api-based)
  * [Microsoft Teams](/integrations-store/collaboration/microsoft-teams-integration)
  * [Slack](/integrations-store/collaboration/slack-integration)
* Data Sync
  * [ArcGIS](/integrations-store/data-sync/arcgis-integration)
  * [ConnectWise](/integrations-store/data-sync/connectwise-integration)
  * [SFTP Imports](/integrations-store/data-sync/sftp-imports-integration)
  * [SFTP Reports](/integrations-store/data-sync/sftp-reports-integration)
  * [Webhooks](/integrations-store/data-sync/webhooks-integration)
  * [Zapier](/integrations-store/data-sync/zapier-integration)
* Device Management
  * [Apple Business Manager](/integrations-store/device-management/apple-business-manager-integration)
  * [Cisco Meraki](/integrations-store/device-management/cisco-meraki-integration)
  * [Dell](/integrations-store/device-management/dell-warranty-integration)
  * [Hexnode](/integrations-store/device-management/hexnode-integration)
  * [Jamf Pro](/integrations-store/device-management/jamf-pro-integration)
  * [Kandji](/integrations-store/device-management/kandji-iru-integration)
  * [Lenovo](/integrations-store/device-management/lenovo-integration)
  * [Microsoft Intune](/integrations-store/device-management/microsoft-intune-integration)
    {% endcolumn %}

{% column width="50%" %}

* Identity & Access Management (IAM)
  * [Google Workspace](/integrations-store/identity-and-access-management-iam/google-workspace-integration)
  * [Microsoft Active Directory On-Premises](/integrations-store/identity-and-access-management-iam/microsoft-active-directory-on-premises-integration)
  * [Microsoft Entra ID](/integrations-store/identity-and-access-management-iam/microsoft-entra-id-integration)
  * [Okta](/integrations-store/identity-and-access-management-iam/okta-integration)
* Operations (Ops)
  * [NetSuite](/integrations-store/operations-ops/netsuite-integration)
  * [QuickBooks](/integrations-store/operations-ops/quickbooks-integration)
  * [Xero](/integrations-store/operations-ops/xero-integration)
* Single Sign On (SSO)
  * [Google Workspace SSO](/integrations-store/ticket-management/single-sign-on-sso/google-workspace-sso)
  * [Microsoft Entra ID SSO](/integrations-store/ticket-management/single-sign-on-sso/microsoft-entra-id-sso)
  * [Okta SSO](/integrations-store/ticket-management/single-sign-on-sso/okta-sso)
* Ticket Management
  * [Freshservice](/integrations-store/ticket-management/freshservice-integration)
  * [Jira](/integrations-store/ticket-management/jira-integration)
  * [ServiceNow](/integrations-store/ticket-management/servicenow-integration)
  * [Zendesk](/integrations-store/ticket-management/zendesk-integration)

{% endcolumn %}
{% endcolumns %}


# Collaboration


# DocuSign Integration

You can integrate your DocuSign account with Asset Panda Pro to send documents for signature directly from your asset records. When an asset is assigned, Asset Panda Pro fills a DocuSign template with the asset's details and emails it to the assignee to sign. This integration supports uni-directional data flow from Asset Panda Pro to DocuSign.

{% hint style="info" %}

* DocuSign is a third-party application. Asset Panda does not control updates made by DocuSign. For information on DocuSign, see [DocuSign Support](https://support.docusign.com/) and the [DocuSign Developer Center](https://developers.docusign.com/).
* This integration covers sending documents for signature. Retrieving the signed copy back into the asset record is not included.
  {% endhint %}

You must perform the following steps to integrate DocuSign with Asset Panda Pro:

* **Enable DocuSign:** Connect your DocuSign account.
* **Configure the mapping:** Choose a DocuSign template, bind it to a collection, and map the asset fields that fill the form.
* **Set up the automation:** Create an automation that sends the form for signature when an asset is assigned.

***

## Prerequisites <a href="#prerequisites" id="prerequisites"></a>

* Active Asset Panda Pro subscription with Organization, Account, or Module administrator access
* Collections and fields to be pre-filled must exist in Asset Panda Pro.
* Active DocuSign account with sufficient privileges, at least one signing template, and DocuSign permissions to create and send envelopes
  * **Templates**: Required to read and select the template used for the mapping
  * **Send envelopes**: Required to send documents for signature
  * **Account authentication**: Required to connect the DocuSign account to Asset Panda Pro

***

## Set up the DocuSign integration with Asset Panda Pro <a href="#setup" id="setup"></a>

1. Log into Asset Panda Pro with an administrator account.
2. Navigate to to <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
3. Expand the appropriate account and module.
4. Click **Manage** in the **Integrations** card.
5. In the **DocuSign** tile, click **Add**, and then click **Edit**.
6. Authenticate your DocuSign connection, when prompted, and grant the requested permissions.
7. Click **Continue with mapping**.
8. Specify the following information for the mapping:
   1. For **Mapping Name**, enter a descriptive name for the mapping.
   2. For **Sync Direction**, confirm **Asset Panda Pro to DocuSign**.
   3. Select the **External Entity** (DocuSign template) to send.
   4. Choose the **Collection** in Asset Panda Pro to which the template applies.
   5. For **Signer email**, select the asset field that provides the recipient's email address (for example, **Assigned to > Email**).
9. Map the Asset Panda Pro fields to the DocuSign template fields.

{% hint style="info" %}
A signature status field is created automatically for each mapping. It shows the send status only:&#x20;

* Blank (not sent)
* Out for signature
* Send failed
* Needs valid email

It does not show whether the document was signed.
{% endhint %}

### DocuSign Field Mapping Reference <a href="#docusign-field-mapping-reference" id="docusign-field-mapping-reference"></a>

Mapping defines the Asset Panda Pro value used to fill each field on the DocuSign template. Mapping is optional for each field; map only the fields you want pre-filled.&#x20;

* Any template field that you leave unmapped is completed by the signer in DocuSign.&#x20;
* Signature, signer name, and date-signed fields are handled by DocuSign automatically and are not shown for mapping.

{% hint style="info" %}
The field list is read from the selected DocuSign template, so the fields available for mapping depend on that template.
{% endhint %}

<table><thead><tr><th width="167.80078125">DocuSign Field</th><th>Description</th><th>Mapping Guidance</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Asset ID</td><td>Asset's identifier</td><td>Map to the Asset ID or Tag number field</td></tr><tr><td>Model</td><td>Device model name</td><td>Map to categorize the equipment being handed over</td></tr><tr><td>Serial number</td><td>Manufacturer serial number</td><td>Map for a precise record of the exact device</td></tr><tr><td>Assignment date</td><td>Date the form is sent, or a date from the asset</td><td>Map to <strong>Date sent (auto)</strong>, or to an asset date field</td></tr><tr><td>Employee name</td><td>Name of the signer</td><td>Handled automatically by DocuSign from the recipient</td></tr><tr><td>Condition notes</td><td>Free-text notes about the asset condition</td><td>Map to an asset field, or leave unmapped for the signer to complete</td></tr><tr><td>Signature</td><td>Signer's signature</td><td>Handled automatically by DocuSign; not mapped</td></tr></tbody></table>

***

## Send documents for signature <a href="#automation" id="automation"></a>

After the mapping is saved, create an automation to send the form when an asset is assigned. The automation uses your existing WHEN and THEN model.

1. Create an automation for the same collection. See [Create an automation](/settings/account-management/automations#create-an-automation).
2. Set the **Trigger**:
   * **When a record is created** covers assets that are created with an assignee already set.
   * **When a record is updated** covers assets assigned after creation.
3. Set the **By** sources:
   * For the created trigger, include Manual, Import, API, Form, and Automation.
   * For the updated trigger, include Manual, Import, API, and Form. Exclude Automation.
4. Add conditions so the form sends only when appropriate:
   * **Assigned to** is not empty.
   * **Signature status** is Blank, Send failed, or Needs valid email.
5. For the action **Type**, select **Send for DocuSign signature**, then select the mapping to send.

{% hint style="info" %}
The **Send for DocuSign signature** action type is available only when DocuSign is configured with at least one mapping, and when the trigger is a record create (any By source) or a record update with Automation excluded.
{% endhint %}

When the automation runs on a matching record, Asset Panda Pro fills the form from the mapping, emails it to the assignee to sign, and sets the **Signature status** to Out **for signature**. If the signer's email is missing or invalid, the send is skipped and the record is flagged **Needs valid email**. If the send fails, the status is set to **Send failed** and the record remains eligible to retry.

{% hint style="info" %}
If an asset is reassigned to a new person, the form is not sent again automatically. You must reset the **Signature status** field to send a new form.
{% endhint %}


# Google Calendar Integration (API-Based)

Sync dashboard calendar events to your personal Google Calendar in real time.

The Google Calendar integration enables real-time synchronization of individual user-level events from the Asset Panda Pro Calendar widget directly to a user’s Google Calendar. This API-based integration provides instant updates and a seamless user-level sync experience.&#x20;

The integration requires a one-time authentication using Google OAuth, but no manual export or ICS link.

{% hint style="info" %}
Behavior related to event deletions, calendar selection, and certain advanced configurations may vary based on Google Calendar settings and permissions.
{% endhint %}

***

## Prerequisites <a href="#prerequisites" id="prerequisites"></a>

* Access to the Asset Panda Pro web application
* Valid Google account with permission to authenticate third-party apps

***

## Limitations <a href="#limitations" id="limitations"></a>

* The synchronization is one-way (Asset Panda → Google Calendar).
* Events created in Google Calendar do not sync back to Asset Panda Pro.
* Integration is **user-specific** and must be configured individually.
* Users must authenticate individually for their events to sync.
* Some advanced event attributes (such as custom fields) may not sync.

***

## Add the Google Calendar integration <a href="#adding-the-sftp-integration-in-asset-panda" id="adding-the-sftp-integration-in-asset-panda"></a>

1. Log into Asset Panda Pro with an administrator account.
2. Navigate to <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
3. Expand the appropriate account and module.
4. Click **Manage** in the **Integrations** card.
5. In the **Google Calendar** tile, click **Add**, and then click **Edit**.

***

## Set up the Google Calendar integration <a href="#setting-up-google-calendar-integration" id="setting-up-google-calendar-integration"></a>

Admins can install this integration from the Integration Store. No configuration is required during setup.

1. Connect your Google Calendar
   1. Log into the Asset Panda Pro web application.
   2. Click your profile avatar and select **Manage Profile**.
   3. Under **Calendar**, click **Authenticate**. A Google authentication window is displayed.
   4. Select your Google account. Since the application is not yet verified by Google, a warning screen is displayed during authentication.

{% hint style="info" %}

* This is expected behavior. It is not a security issue and does not impact functionality.
* Popups must be enabled for the browser for the warning screen to be displayed.
  {% endhint %}

2. Authenticate the application:
   1. Click **Advanced**.
   2. Select **Go to Asset Panda Pro (unsafe)**.
   3. &#x20;Review the available permissions and select the options you are willing to share for the calendar. At a minimum, you must enable the ability to edit calendar events
   4. Click **Continue**. Once authentication is completed, your Google account is securely linked to Asset Panda Pro.

***

## Sync events from the Calendar widget <a href="#how-the-integration-works" id="how-the-integration-works"></a>

1. Log into Asset Panda Pro with an administrator account.
2. Navigate to <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
3. Expand the appropriate account and module.
4. Click **Manage** in the **Integrations** card.
5. Select Integrations in this module.
6. In the **Google Calendar** tile, click **Configure**.
7. Click **Go to Dashboards**.
8. For the appropriate calendar, click <i class="fa-ellipsis-vertical">:ellipsis-vertical:</i>  and then select **Add to Google Calendar**. Events and updates are displayed automatically in your Google Calendar.

{% hint style="info" %}
If multiple users have access to the same events and have connected their Google Calendar, the events sync to each user’s respective Google Calendar individually.
{% endhint %}

***

## Troubleshooting <a href="#troubleshooting" id="troubleshooting"></a>

### Events do not sync or are delayed

* Ensure Google authentication is completed successfully.
* Reconnect your Google account.
* Confirm events are visible in the Asset Panda Pro Calendar widget.


# Microsoft Teams Integration

Any automation that supports email notifications can also send notifications to Microsoft Teams. The Microsoft Teams integration enables you to send real-time notifications from Asset Panda Pro to Microsoft Teams channels using automation workflows. This enables teams to stay informed without switching platforms.&#x20;

The automation workflow enables you to trigger messages based on events, such as record updates.&#x20;

The integration uses Microsoft Teams Incoming Webhooks to send messages from Asset Panda Pro to Teams channels. Multiple webhook URLs (channels) can be configured to send to different channels simultaneously based on the event type.

***

## Prerequisites <a href="#prerequisites" id="prerequisites"></a>

* Active access to Microsoft Teams with permission to create connectors in a Teams channel
* Administrative access to Asset Panda Pro

***

## Add the Microsoft Teams integration in Asset Panda Pro

1. Log into Asset Panda Pro with an administrator account.
2. Navigate to <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
3. Expand the appropriate account and module.
4. Click **Manage** in the **Integrations** card.
5. In the **Microsoft Teams** tile, click **Add**, and then click **Edit**.

***

### Generate the Webhook URL in Microsoft Teams

1. Open Microsoft Teams and then navigate to the appropriate channel.
2. Click <i class="fa-ellipsis">:ellipsis:</i> and then select **Manage channel**.
3. Under **Connectors**, search for **Incoming Webhook**.
4. Click **Configure**.
5. Enter a name (and optional image)**.**
6. Click **Create**.
7. Copy the generated **Webhook URL**.

***

## Configure an automation in Asset Panda Pro

1. Create or edit an automation. See [Automations](/settings/account-management/automations).
2. Select a trigger (for example, **Record Update**).
3. For **Action type**, select **Send Notification.**
4. For **Notification Type**, select **Microsoft Teams**.
5. Click **Compose**.
6. For **Channel URL**, paste the webhook URL.

{% hint style="info" %}
Ensure the webhook URL is active and valid.
{% endhint %}

7. Compose your message.
8. Click **Save**.


# Slack integration

The Slack integration enables real-time notifications to be triggered through automation rules and delivered from Asset Panda to specific Slack users or channels. This integration provides instant updates into asset-related activities and supports faster decision-making. It improves communication and helps teams stay aligned by delivering updates where they already collaborate.

## Prerequisites

* Active Asset Panda subscription with Admin access
* Slack workspace with permission to install apps
* Slack account with admin role or permission to install and configure Slack apps
* Slack Bot Token Scopes and User Token Scopes
* User and bot must be manually invited to each private channel where notifications should be delivered.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
To invite a bot:

* Select a channel, go into integrations, and then add the app.
* @mention the bot by name in the channel.
  {% endhint %}

***

## Slack tasks <a href="#slack-tasks" id="slack-tasks"></a>

{% hint style="info" %}
All setup actions for Slack must be performed using the Slack API portal: <https://api.slack.com/apps>.
{% endhint %}

### Create a Slack app <a href="#slack-app" id="slack-app"></a>

1. Go to <https://api.slack.com/apps>.
2. Click **Create New App.**
3. Select **From scratch.**
4. Enter an app name (for example, `AssetPandaNotification`).
5. Select the workspace where the app will be used.
6. Click **Create App.**

***

### Configure Bot and User Token Scopes  <a href="#slack-token" id="slack-token"></a>

1. In the app dashboard, open **OAuth & Permissions**.
2. Scroll to the **Bot Token Scopes** section.
3. Add the following scopes:

| Scope               | Description                                             |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| `chat:write`        | Send messages as the bot.                               |
| `chat:write.public` | Send messages to channels where the bot isn't a member. |

4. Scroll to the **User Token Scopes** section.
5. Add the following scopes:

| Scope                 | Description                                                  |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |
| `channels:read`       | View basic information about public channels in a workspace. |
| `groups:read`         | View basic information about a user’s private channels.      |
| `search:read.private` | Search a workspace's content in private channels.            |
| `search:read.public`  | Search a workspace's content in public channels.             |
| `search:read.users`   | Search a workspace's users.                                  |

{% hint style="info" %}
To allow access to private channels, invite the user and bot manually to each channel after the app is installed.
{% endhint %}

***

### Install the Slack app&#x20;

1. In **OAuth & Permissions**, go to the **OAuth Tokens for Your Workspace**.
2. Click **Install App to Workspace**.
3. Review the requested permissions and click **Allow**.
4. Copy the generated **User OAuth Token** and **Bot User OAuth Token**.

{% hint style="info" %}
Store the tokens in a secure location. These tokens are required during the integration setup in Asset Panda Pro.
{% endhint %}

***

## Asset Panda tasks <a href="#adding-integration" id="adding-integration"></a>

### Add the Slack integration <a href="#adding-integration" id="adding-integration"></a>

1. Log into Asset Panda Pro with an administrator account
2. Navigate to <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
3. Expand the appropriate account and module.
4. Click **Manage** in the **Integrations** card.
5. In the **Slack** tile, click **Add**, and then click **Edit**.
6. Authenticate the Slack connection:
   1. Paste the **User OAuth Token** and **Bot User OAuth Token** obtained from the Slack API portal.
   2. Click **Test and save connection**.
7. If the test passes move to the below step.
8. Create an automation to enable notifications to be sent using Slack:

   * Select **Slack notification** as the **Notification Type**.&#x20;
   * Select the relevant Slack users or channels as the recipient.

   See [Create an automation](/settings/account-management/automations#create-an-automation).<br>


# Data Sync


# ArcGIS Integration

You can integrate your Asset Panda Pro account with your ArcGIS account to synchronize GIS-based asset information between both platforms. The ArcGIS integration supports two-way synchronization, allowing Asset Panda Pro records to be pushed to ArcGIS while also retrieving updates from ArcGIS into Asset Panda Pro. New records can be created in either system during synchronization. This ensures that location and attribute updates remain synchronized between both platforms.

This integration helps organizations maintain accurate location-based asset data, streamline field operations, and ensure asset records remain updated across both systems.

{% hint style="info" %}
Currently, the integration supports only full synchronization. Support for delta synchronization may be added in future releases based on ArcGIS API capabilities.
{% endhint %}

***

## Prerequisites <a href="#prerequisites" id="prerequisites"></a>

* Active ArcGIS account with administrative permissions
* Active Asset Panda Pro subscription with administrative permissions to configure integrations
* ArcGIS permissions to create Developer Credentials

***

## ArcGIS tasks <a href="#arcgis-tasks" id="arcgis-tasks"></a>

### Generate ArcGIS API Credentials <a href="#generate-arcgis-api-credentials" id="generate-arcgis-api-credentials"></a>

Asset Panda Pro uses ArcGIS Developer Credentials for authentication.

1. Open the [ArcGIS Developer Credentials Portal](https://location.arcgis.com/credentials/?utm_source=chatgpt.com).
2. Sign in using your ArcGIS account credentials.
3. Click **Create Developer Credentials.**
4. Select **OAuth 2.0 Credentials**.
5. Configure the application details:
   * **Application Name**
   * **Description**
   * **Redirect URLs** (if applicable)
6. Save the application. ArcGIS generates the following credentials:
   * **Client ID**: Unique identifier for the ArcGIS application
   * **Client Secret**: Secret key used for authentication
   * **Username**: ArcGIS account username

{% hint style="warning" %}
Store the **Client Secret** securely, as ArcGIS may not display the full value again after generation.
{% endhint %}

***

## Asset Panda tasks <a href="#asset-panda-tasks" id="asset-panda-tasks"></a>

### Set up the ArcGIS integration in Asset Panda Pro <a href="#setup-arcgis-integration-with-asset-panda" id="setup-arcgis-integration-with-asset-panda"></a>

1. Log into Asset Panda Pro with an administrator account
2. Navigate to <img src="https://1392520265-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2FxeONEzrcpTXxoedP4Phm%2Fuploads%2FPGcLPehdYLLP7bOmBehU%2FSettings.png?alt=media&amp;token=3aac23e7-2676-4aa4-ae39-6e8941b81b8c" alt="Settings icon" data-size="line"> **Settings** > **Account Management**.
3. Expand the appropriate account and module.
4. Click **Manage** in the **Integrations** card.
5. In the **ArcGIS** tile, click **Add**, and then click **Edit**.
6. Enter the following details to authenticate Asset Panda Pro with ArcGIS:
   * **Client ID**: ArcGIS OAuth Client ID
   * **Username**: ArcGIS account username
   * **Client Secret**: ArcGIS OAuth Client Secret
7. Click **Sign in with ArcGIS** and complete the ArcGIS authorization process.
8. Click **Test and save connection**.
9. If the test is successful, click **Continue with mapping**.
10. Click **Add mapping option**.
11. Enter a **Mapping Name** for your configuration.
12. Select the **Sync Direction** to specify the direction of the data transfer:
    * **Push to Asset Panda Pro**: Push ArcGIS data to Asset Panda Pro collections.
    * **Asset Panda Pro to ArcGIS**: Push Asset Panda Pro data to ArcGIS layers.
13. For **External Entity**, select the ArcGIS layer for which data will be transferred.
14. For **Collection**, select the collection for which data will be transferred.
15. Under **Mapping & Sync Direction**, map ArcGIS fields to corresponding Asset Panda Pro fields.

{% hint style="info" %}

* Select the appropriate **Unique Identifier** field to ensure accurate record matching between both systems.
* To map additional fields, click **Add more** and repeat the previous step.
  {% endhint %}

18. When all fields are mapped, click **Save**.

{% hint style="info" %}
You can schedule the sync to run on a configured schedule or choose **Run now** for the associated automation to trigger the sync manually.&#x20;
{% endhint %}


# ConnectWise Integration

You can integrate Asset Panda Pro and ConnectWise Cloud to pull device information from ConnectWise into Asset Panda. This integration ensures you have up-to-date information in Asset Panda Pro to manage your assets more efficiently.The Asset Panda and ConnectWise integration supports uni-directional data synchronization, pulling data from ConnectWise into Asset Panda.&#x20;

{% hint style="info" %}
ConnectWise is a third-party application. Asset Panda does not control updates made by ConnectWise. For information on ConnectWise, see [ConnectWise resources](https://www.connectwise.com/resources).&#x20;
{% endhint %}

You must perform the following steps to integrate ConnectWise with Asset Panda Pro:

* **Generate ConnectWise API credentials:** Create and configure the ConnectWise account and API credentials.
* **Configure Asset Panda Integration:** Configure and map the ConnectWise data fields in Asset Panda Pro.
* **Ensure Data Accuracy:** Ensure that the data fetched from ConnectWise is accurately mapped and stored in Asset Panda. &#x20;

***

## Prerequisites <a href="#prereqs" id="prereqs"></a>

* Active ConnectWise and Asset Panda Pro accounts
* Administrative permissions in ConnectWise and Asset Panda

***

## ConnectWise tasks <a href="#cw-tasks" id="cw-tasks"></a>

### Create a role

1. Log into **ConnectWise Manage** with an administrator account.
2. Navigate to **System > Security Roles**.
3. Click **+** to create a new role.
4. Enter a **Role ID** (for example, <kbd>AssetPandaIntegration</kbd>).
5. Assign the following permissions:
   * **Companies >** **Company Maintenance**: Set **Inquire Level** to **All**.
   * **Companies > Configurations**: Set **Inquire Level** to **All**.
   * **Companies > Contacts**: Set **Inquire Level** to **All**.
   * **Finance >** **Agreements**: Set **Add**, **Edit**, and **Inquire Levels** to **All**.
   * **Procurement >** **Product Catalog**: Set **Inquire Level** to **All**.
   * **Service Desk >** **Service Tickets**: Set **Add** and **Inquire Levels** to **All**.
6. Click **Save**.

***

### Create an API member

1. In ConnectWise, navigate to **System > Members**.
2. Select the **API Members** tab.
3. Click **+**.
4. Provide the following details:
   * **Member ID**: Enter a unique identifier (for example, <kbd>AssetPandaAPI</kbd>).
   * **Member Name**: Enter a name (for example, <kbd>Asset Panda Integration</kbd>).
   * **Role ID**: Select the security role created earlier.
   * **Level**: Set to **Corporate**.
   * **Email**: Provide a valid email address.
5. Click **Save**.

***

### Generate API credentials&#x20;

1. In ConnectWise, open the newly created API member.
2. Go to the **API Keys** tab.
3. Click **+** to create a new API key.
4. Enter a **Description** (for example, <kbd>Asset Panda API Key</kbd>).
5. Click **Save**. The system generates a **Public Key** and **Private Key**.
6. Copy and store the keys for future use.

{% hint style="warning" %}
The Private Key cannot be retrieved later, so save the keys securely to ensure it is accessible later.
{% endhint %}

***

## Asset Panda Pro tasks

### Set up the ConnectWise integration

1. Log into Asset Panda Pro with an administrator account
2. Navigate to **Settings > Account Management**.
3. Expand the appropriate account and module.
4. Click **Manage** in the Integrations card.
5. In the **ConnectWise** tile, click **Add**, and then click **Edit**.

{% hint style="info" %}
To ensure full access and proper functionality, the Public & Private Keys must be generated using a user with an ADMIN role in ConnectWise.&#x20;
{% endhint %}

8. Enter the following details:
   * **URL**: Web address of the system to which you are connecting. This identifies the location of the service.
   * **Company Name**: Organization’s unique identifier within the connected system, which helps link your account.
   * **Public Key**: Unique identifier used for authentication. This key is part of a secure login process.
   * **Private Key**: Confidential code that, when used with the Public Key, verifies access permissions.
   * **Is Self Hosted (Checkbox)**: Specifies whether the system runs on a private server instead of a cloud-based service.
9. Click **Test and Save Connection** to verify the authentication.&#x20;
10. Click **Add mapping.**
11. In the **Mapping** section, map the appropriate field from ConnectWise to the relevant column in your Asset Panda Pro collection. See [Configure data mapping and filtering](#configure-data-mapping-and-filtering).
12. Click **Save**.

***

### Configure data mapping and filtering

During integration, ConnectWise fields must be mapped to the corresponding Asset Panda Pro fields to ensure accurate data synchronization. Proper mapping prevents duplication and ensures that records are updated correctly.

#### Custom field support

Custom fields from ConnectWise can be mapped to Asset Panda Pro fields during integration setup to sync additional business-specific information beyond the default ConnectWise fields. The integration supports custom fields for all supported external entities, including the following field types:

* Text
* Numeric
* Percentage
* Date
* URL
* Checkbox
* SSL-supported list and radio field variations

{% hint style="info" %}
Field behavior depends on how the custom field is configured in ConnectWise. For example, date-based custom fields support date mapping only when the source system uses a date picker.
{% endhint %}

#### Unique identifiers

A unique identifier is a field that remains constant and is distinct for each record, ensuring accurate data syncing and preventing duplicates between ConnectWise and Asset Panda. For example:

* Use **Company ID** for company records.
* Use **Product SKU** for products.
* Use **Ticket Number** for service tickets.
* Use **Agreement ID** for agreements.

{% hint style="danger" %}
Do not use fields like **Company Name**, **Phone**, or **Status** as unique identifiers, as they can change over time, leading to sync errors.
{% endhint %}

You can set up [an automation](/settings/account-management/automations) to ensure data stays up to date by syncing records at scheduled intervals.

#### ConnectWise fields

| Field Name                                                               | Description                                    | Mapping & Filtering Guidance                                            |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Address 1**                                                            | Primary address of the company                 | Map to address fields; filter by region if needed.                      |
| **Address 2**                                                            | Additional address details                     | Optional for extended address information.                              |
| **City**                                                                 | Company’s city location                        | Map to city fields; filter by city if required.                         |
| **Company**                                                              | Official company name                          | Map to company name in Asset Panda; avoid using as a unique identifier. |
| <p><strong>Company ID</strong><br><em>Unique identifier</em></p>         | System-generated unique company identifier     | Best choice for a unique identifier.                                    |
| <p><strong>Company Identifier</strong><br><em>Unique identifier</em></p> | Alternate internal company ID                  | Can be used as a unique identifier, if structured properly.             |
| **Country**                                                              | Country of operation                           | Map to country fields; filter by specific countries.                    |
| **Number of Employees**                                                  | Total employee count                           | Use for reporting; filter by size if needed.                            |
| **Phone**                                                                | Primary contact number                         | Map to phone fields; not suitable for filtering.                        |
| **State**                                                                | State or province location                     | Useful for filtering by region.                                         |
| **Status**                                                               | Active, inactive, or other status              | Filter to include only active records.                                  |
| **Type**                                                                 | Classification (for example, Client or Vendor) | Filter by type to sync relevant data.                                   |
| **Website**                                                              | Company’s official website                     | Map to website fields.                                                  |
| **Zip**                                                                  | Postal or ZIP code                             | Map to ZIP code fields; filter by location if needed.                   |

***

## Troubleshooting

<table><thead><tr><th width="178.59375" valign="top">Issue</th><th>Steps to Resolve</th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td valign="top">Test and Save Connection fails</td><td><ol><li>Set <strong>Companies > Contacts</strong> to <strong>Inquire: All</strong> in the security role.</li><li>Confirm keys were made by a ConnectWise admin.</li><li>Re-check that the <strong>URL</strong> and <strong>Company Name</strong> are typed correctly.</li><li>Check that the <strong>Is Self Hosted</strong> selection matches your setup (Cloud = unchecked).</li><li>If the issue persists, regenerate the Public/Private Key pair.</li></ol></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Data missing after a sync</td><td><ul><li><p>Set <strong>Inquire: All</strong> for the specific record type:</p><ul><li>Companies > Configurations for configs</li><li>Companies > Contacts for contacts</li></ul></li><li>Check that mapping filters aren't excluding records (for example, Status = Active).</li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Duplicate records after sync</td><td><ul><li><p>Confirm that the unique identifier is Company ID, Product SKU, Ticket Number, or Agreement ID.</p><ul><li>Do not use Company Name, Phone, or Status as the identifier.</li></ul></li></ul></td></tr><tr><td valign="top">Custom fields are blank or not syncing</td><td><ul><li>Confirm the field type is supported: Text, Numeric, Percentage, Date, URL, Checkbox, or list/radio</li><li>Date fields only sync if set up as a date picker in ConnectWise.</li></ul></td></tr></tbody></table>




---

[Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)

